<?xml version="1.0"?>
<feed xmlns="http://www.w3.org/2005/Atom" xml:lang="en">
	<id>https://docs.sandbox.joomla.org/api.php?action=feedcontributions&amp;feedformat=atom&amp;user=Wisgar</id>
	<title>Joomla! Documentation - User contributions [en]</title>
	<link rel="self" type="application/atom+xml" href="https://docs.sandbox.joomla.org/api.php?action=feedcontributions&amp;feedformat=atom&amp;user=Wisgar"/>
	<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://docs.sandbox.joomla.org/Special:Contributions/Wisgar"/>
	<updated>2026-05-28T10:58:29Z</updated>
	<subtitle>User contributions</subtitle>
	<generator>MediaWiki 1.43.0</generator>
	<entry>
		<id>https://docs.sandbox.joomla.org/index.php?title=Publishing_Workflow/Scenarios/fr&amp;diff=639458</id>
		<title>Publishing Workflow/Scenarios/fr</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://docs.sandbox.joomla.org/index.php?title=Publishing_Workflow/Scenarios/fr&amp;diff=639458"/>
		<updated>2019-10-20T13:52:14Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Wisgar: Created page with &amp;quot;Cliquer sur l&amp;#039;onglet &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Permissions&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; de l&amp;#039;onglet &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Transition&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;.&amp;quot;&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;&amp;lt;noinclude&amp;gt;&amp;lt;languages /&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/noinclude&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
==Implémentation des flux de travail ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
L&#039;ordre général des tâches pour créer un nouveau flux de travail est :&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
# Planifier&lt;br /&gt;
# Ajouter un nouveau &#039;&#039;&#039;Groupes d&#039;utilisateurs&#039;&#039;&#039; (facultatif)&lt;br /&gt;
# Ajouter de nouveaux &#039;&#039;&#039;Utilisateurs&#039;&#039;&#039; et les assigner aux groupes d&#039;utilisateurs appropriés (facultatif)&lt;br /&gt;
# Créer le the nouveau &amp;quot;flux de travail&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
# Créez l&#039;(es) état(s) pour ce flux de travail avec la(les) condition(s).&lt;br /&gt;
# Créer la(les) &#039;&#039;&#039;Transition(s)&#039;&#039;&#039; du flux de travail&lt;br /&gt;
# Ajoutez ou modifiez la &#039;&#039;&#039;Catégorie&#039;&#039;&#039; applicable pour ajouter le &#039;&#039;&#039;Flux de travail&#039;&#039;&#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
# Modifier les &#039;&#039;Permissions&#039;&#039;&#039; de la &#039;&#039;Catégorie&#039;&#039; de sorte que les nouveaux&#039;&#039;Groupes d&#039;utilisateurs&#039;&#039; aient les permissions de faire seulement ce qu&#039;ils sont en droit de faire&lt;br /&gt;
# Paramétrer les notifications si nécessaire&lt;br /&gt;
# Configurer l&#039;accès de connexion pour les &#039;&#039;&#039;Utilisateurs&#039;&#039;&#039; sur le frontend (ou le backend : non inclus dans ce tutoriel) (facultatif)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Planification ==&lt;br /&gt;
Planifiez ce que votre flux de travail fera. La planification est toujours la partie la plus importante. Répondez à ces questions pour vous aider à planifier :&lt;br /&gt;
* Combien de groupes d&#039;utilisateurs (même s&#039;il n&#039;y a qu&#039;un seul utilisateur dans le groupe) doivent intervenir?&lt;br /&gt;
* Combien d&#039;actions y aura-t-il dans le flux de travail?&lt;br /&gt;
* L&#039;un ou l&#039;autre des groupes aura-t-il besoin de recevoir des notifications pour prendre les mesures qui s&#039;imposent ?&lt;br /&gt;
* Les groupes effectueront-ils leurs actions à partir du frontend ou du backend ou de la combinaison des deux ?&lt;br /&gt;
* Quelles &amp;quot;Catégories&amp;quot; se verront attribuer un/ce flux de travail ?&lt;br /&gt;
* Les différentes catégories auront-elles des flux de travail différents ?&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Scénario #1 ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*Un groupe d&#039;utilisateurs ajoute des messages de blog mais ne peut pas les publier&lt;br /&gt;
*Le deuxième groupe d&#039;utilisateurs approuve les messages du blog et les publie.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Créer de nouveaux groupes d&#039;utilisateurs ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
# Allez dans &#039;&#039;&#039;Utilisateurs&#039;&#039;&#039; {{rarr}} &#039;&#039;&#039;Groupes&#039;&#039;&#039; {{rarr}} Nouveau&lt;br /&gt;
# Saisissez le &#039;&#039;&#039;Titre du groupe&#039;&#039;&#039;:&#039;&#039;Affiches du Blog&#039;&#039;&#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
# Sélectionnez le &#039;&#039;&#039;Group Parent&#039;&#039;&#039; : Enregistré&lt;br /&gt;
# Cliquez sur Enregistrer &amp;amp; Nouveau.&lt;br /&gt;
# Saisissez le &#039;&#039;&#039;Titre du groupe&#039;&#039;&#039;:&#039;&#039;Modérateur de Blog&#039;&#039;&#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
# Sélectionnez le &#039;&#039;&#039;Group Parent&#039;&#039;&#039; : Enregistré&lt;br /&gt;
# Cliquez sur Enregistrer &amp;amp; Fermer.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Créer de nouveaux utilisateurs (ou modifier des utilisateurs existants) ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Using the directions on [[S:MyLanguage/Adding_a_new_user|create your new &#039;&#039;&#039;Users&#039;&#039;&#039;]].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
# Create &#039;&#039;&#039;User(s)&#039;&#039;&#039; and assign them to the &#039;&#039;Blog Posters&#039;&#039; &#039;&#039;&#039;User Group&#039;&#039;&#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
# Create &#039;&#039;&#039;User(s)&#039;&#039;&#039; and assign them to the &#039;&#039;Blog Approvers&#039;&#039; &#039;&#039;&#039;User Group&#039;&#039;&#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;quot;REMARQUE&amp;quot; : Si vous voulez que vos &amp;quot;Utilisateurs&amp;quot; reçoivent des notifications pour une &amp;quot;Transition&amp;quot; (voir plus bas), sélectionnez Oui pour &amp;quot;Recevoir des courriels du système&amp;quot; pour chaque &amp;quot;Utilisateur&amp;quot; devant recevoir des notifications.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Créer le flux de travail ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
# Allez dans &#039;&#039;&#039;Contenu&#039;&#039;&#039; {{rarr}} &#039;&#039;&#039;Flux de Travail&#039;&#039;&#039; {{rarr}} Nouveau&lt;br /&gt;
# Entrer le &#039;&#039;&#039;Titre&#039;&#039;&#039; : &#039;&#039;Flux de Travail du Blog&#039;&#039;&#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
# Cliquez sur Enregistrer &amp;amp; fermer.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;quot;REMARQUE&#039;&#039; : Ne cochez cette case par défaut que s&#039;il s&#039;agit du Flux de travail par défaut pour TOUS les nouveaux articles créés dans les catégories &#039;&#039;sans&#039;&#039; un flux de travail attribué. Les articles existants ne seront pas modifiés.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Créer le(s) statut(s) du flux de travail ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
# A partir de la vue en liste &#039;&#039;&#039;Workflows&#039;&#039;&#039;, cliquez sur le lien &amp;quot;&#039;&#039;&#039;gérer&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039; dans la colonne &#039;&#039;Etats&#039;&#039; à côté du &#039;&#039;Flux de Travail de Blog&#039;&#039;. Vous verrez l&#039;état par défaut &amp;quot;Publié&amp;quot;.&lt;br /&gt;
# Click the &#039;&#039;&#039;Default State&#039;&#039;&#039; for Published and change the &#039;&#039;&#039;Title&#039;&#039;&#039; to: &#039;&#039;Publish new blog post&#039;&#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
# &#039;&#039;&#039;L&#039;état des articles déjà marqués comme : Publiés&#039;&#039;&#039; restera inchangé.&lt;br /&gt;
# Cliquez sur Enregistrer &amp;amp; nouveau.&lt;br /&gt;
# Enter the &#039;&#039;&#039;Title&#039;&#039;&#039;: &#039;&#039;New blog post, unpublished&#039;&#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
# Modifiez &#039;&#039;&#039;le Statut&#039;&#039;&#039; des éléments dans cet &#039;&#039;&#039;État&#039;&#039;&#039; en &amp;quot;Non publié&amp;quot;.&lt;br /&gt;
# Change the &#039;&#039;&#039;Default&#039;&#039;&#039; to Yes (Green) since this is the &#039;&#039;&#039;Default State&#039;&#039;&#039; for Articles in this Workflow.&lt;br /&gt;
# Cliquez sur Enregistrer &amp;amp; fermer.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Créer la transition pour le flux de travail ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Il y a deux façons d&#039;accéder à &#039;&#039;&#039;Transitions&#039;&#039; :&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
# Click &#039;&#039;&#039;Transitions&#039;&#039;&#039; from the sidebar while in the States list view.&lt;br /&gt;
# Cliquez sur la ligne bleue avec les flèches dans les deux directions à partir de la vue en liste &#039;&#039;&#039;Flux de Travail&#039;&#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
# Allez à &#039;&#039;&#039;Transitions&#039;&#039;&#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
# Cliquez sur Nouveau&lt;br /&gt;
# Ajouter le &#039;&#039;&#039;Titre&#039;&#039;&#039; : &#039;&#039;Approuver/Publier&#039;&#039;&#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
# Sélectionnez le &#039;&#039;&#039;Statut&#039;&#039;&#039; &#039;&#039;Nouveau billet de blog - non publié&#039;&#039; dans le champ déroulant &amp;quot;&#039;De l&#039;état&#039;&amp;quot;.&lt;br /&gt;
# Sélectionnez le &#039;&#039;Statut&#039;&#039; &#039;&#039;Publier un nouveau billet de blog&#039;&#039; dans le champ déroulant &#039;&#039;&#039;Vers le Statut&#039;&#039;&#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
# Cliquer sur Enregistrer et rester dans cette &#039;&#039;&#039;Transition&#039;&#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
# Cliquer sur l&#039;onglet &#039;&#039;&#039;Permissions&#039;&#039;&#039; de l&#039;onglet &#039;&#039;&#039;Transition&#039;&#039;&#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
# Select the &#039;&#039;&#039;User Group&#039;&#039;&#039; &#039;&#039;Blog Approvers&#039;&#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
# For the &#039;&#039;&#039;Action&#039;&#039;&#039; &#039;&#039;&#039;Execute transition&#039;&#039;&#039;, select &#039;&#039;&#039;Allowed&#039;&#039;&#039; from the &#039;&#039;&#039;Select New Setting&#039;&#039;&#039; drop-down.&lt;br /&gt;
# Cliquez sur Enregistrer &amp;amp; fermer.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;NOTE&#039;&#039;&#039;: You can quickly access your &#039;&#039;&#039;States&#039;&#039;&#039; and &#039;&#039;&#039;Transitions&#039;&#039;&#039; from the &#039;&#039;&#039;Workflow&#039;&#039;&#039; list view. The orange circle is the States and has the quantity of States listed next to the Workflow Title. The blue line with arrows in both directions is for Transitions and shows the quantity of Transitions for the Workflow.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Assign Workflow &amp;amp; User Group Permissions to the Category ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
# Allez dans &#039;&#039;&#039;Contenu&#039;&#039;&#039; {{rarr}} &#039;&#039;&#039;Catégories&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
# Access the &#039;&#039;Blog&#039;&#039; &#039;&#039;&#039;Category&#039;&#039;&#039; (or create it if necessary) and click the &#039;&#039;&#039;Workflow&#039;&#039;&#039; tab.&lt;br /&gt;
# Click the drop-down and select &#039;&#039;Blog Workflow&#039;&#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
# Cliquez sur l&#039;onglet &#039;&#039;&#039;Droits&#039;&#039;&#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
# Click on the &#039;&#039;Blog Poster&#039;&#039; &#039;&#039;&#039;User Group&#039;&#039;&#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
# For the &#039;&#039;&#039;Action&#039;&#039;&#039; Create and Edit, change the &#039;&#039;&#039;Select New Setting&#039;&#039;&#039; drop-down to Allowed.&lt;br /&gt;
# Click on the &#039;&#039;Blog Approvers&#039;&#039; &#039;&#039;&#039;User Group&#039;&#039;&#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
# For the &#039;&#039;&#039;Action&#039;&#039;&#039; Delete, Edit, Edit State and Edit Own, change the &#039;&#039;&#039;Select New Setting&#039;&#039;&#039; drop-down to Allowed.&lt;br /&gt;
# Cliquez sur Enregistrer &amp;amp; fermer.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
For more information on ACL and assigning permissions to User Groups, see the [[S:MyLanguage/J3.x:Access_Control_List_Tutorial|ACL Tutorial]].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Paramétrer les notifications ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Notifications use the Joomla core Messaging component. It is very basic. When enabled for Workflows, it will send a message to the User associated with the Group assigned to the Transition. The message simply states that they have a message in the site. It will then be their responsibility to login and check the articles that need approval and publish them.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;To set up notifications for the Workgroup Transitions:&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
# Allez dans &#039;&#039;&#039;Extensions&#039;&#039;&#039; {{rarr}} &#039;&#039;&#039;Plug-ins&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
# Click the &#039;&#039;&#039;Table Options&#039;&#039;&#039; button and &#039;&#039;&#039;Select Type&#039;&#039;&#039; of content&lt;br /&gt;
# Click on &#039;&#039;&#039;Content – Joomla&#039;&#039;&#039; and then toggle Yes for &#039;&#039;&#039;Email on transition execution&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
# Then make sure that the &#039;&#039;&#039;Users&#039;&#039;&#039; themselves have &#039;&#039;&#039;Receive System Emails&#039;&#039;&#039; toggled to Yes in &#039;&#039;&#039;Users&#039;&#039;&#039; {{rarr}} &#039;&#039;&#039;Manage&#039;&#039;&#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== To set it up so that Users can Post and Approve from the frontend ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
# Create a &#039;&#039;&#039;Menu Item&#039;&#039;&#039; for the &#039;&#039;&#039;Menu Item Type&#039;&#039;&#039; Login so that your Blog Posters can login.&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;&#039;&#039;&#039;Menus&#039;&#039;&#039; {{rarr}} &#039;&#039;Choose or create a menu&#039;&#039; {{rarr}} New {{rarr}} &#039;&#039;&#039;Users&#039;&#039;&#039; {{rarr}} &#039;&#039;&#039;Login&#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;OR&lt;br /&gt;
# Create a module for Login so that your Blog Posters can login.&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;&#039;&#039;&#039;Extensions&#039;&#039;&#039; {{rarr}} &#039;&#039;&#039;Modules&#039;&#039;&#039; {{rarr}} New {{rarr}} &#039;&#039;&#039;Login&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
# Add a &#039;&#039;&#039;Menu Item&#039;&#039;&#039; to a Menu that displays only for the &#039;&#039;&#039;Registered User Group&#039;&#039;&#039; to Add an article&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;&#039;&#039;&#039;Menu Item Type Articles&#039;&#039;&#039; {{rarr}} &#039;&#039;&#039;Create Article&#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;&#039;&#039;&#039;NOTE&#039;&#039;&#039;: this will display for all Registered Users unless you create an Access Level for your Blog Poster User Group and select this in the Menu Item under Access.&lt;br /&gt;
# When your &#039;&#039;&#039;User&#039;&#039;&#039; logs in, they add an &#039;&#039;&#039;Article&#039;&#039;&#039;, enter the content and Save.&lt;br /&gt;
# This will trigger a notification to the Blog Approvers Users that there is a new private message on the site. It doesn’t get more specific than that. Approvers should just come to the site and approve the Article. It will also send a message to Super Admins.&lt;br /&gt;
# When the Blog Approver logs in, they can navigate to where the new article will appear. They will be able to see the unpublished article and edit it/approve it/publish it. Then they can Save &amp;amp; Close and logout.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Admin note&#039;&#039;&#039;: Super Admins can use Batch to move existing Articles to a different workflow than it is currently assigned. It won’t make a difference if the Articles are already published.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Scénario #2 ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Ajoutez ici un autre scénario pour aider les autres à voir la puissance des flux de travail. Les documents peuvent être modifiés ou ajoutés par quiconque possèdant un compte.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Related Information==&lt;br /&gt;
See also:&lt;br /&gt;
* [[S:MyLanguage/Publishing_Workflow_Implementation|Publishing Workflow Implementation]]&lt;br /&gt;
* [[S:MyLanguage/Publishing_Workflow|Publishing Workflow]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;noinclude&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[Category:Google Summer of Code 2017{{#translation:}}]]&lt;br /&gt;
[[Category:Development{{#translation:}}]]&lt;br /&gt;
[[Category:Joomla! 4.x{{#translation:}}]]&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/noinclude&amp;gt;&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Wisgar</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://docs.sandbox.joomla.org/index.php?title=Translations:Publishing_Workflow/Scenarios/60/fr&amp;diff=639457</id>
		<title>Translations:Publishing Workflow/Scenarios/60/fr</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://docs.sandbox.joomla.org/index.php?title=Translations:Publishing_Workflow/Scenarios/60/fr&amp;diff=639457"/>
		<updated>2019-10-20T13:52:14Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Wisgar: Created page with &amp;quot;Cliquer sur l&amp;#039;onglet &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Permissions&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; de l&amp;#039;onglet &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Transition&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;.&amp;quot;&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;Cliquer sur l&#039;onglet &#039;&#039;&#039;Permissions&#039;&#039;&#039; de l&#039;onglet &#039;&#039;&#039;Transition&#039;&#039;&#039;.&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Wisgar</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://docs.sandbox.joomla.org/index.php?title=Publishing_Workflow/Scenarios/fr&amp;diff=639456</id>
		<title>Publishing Workflow/Scenarios/fr</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://docs.sandbox.joomla.org/index.php?title=Publishing_Workflow/Scenarios/fr&amp;diff=639456"/>
		<updated>2019-10-20T13:51:23Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Wisgar: Created page with &amp;quot;Cliquer sur Enregistrer et rester dans cette &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Transition&amp;#039;&amp;#039;.&amp;quot;&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;&amp;lt;noinclude&amp;gt;&amp;lt;languages /&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/noinclude&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
==Implémentation des flux de travail ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
L&#039;ordre général des tâches pour créer un nouveau flux de travail est :&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
# Planifier&lt;br /&gt;
# Ajouter un nouveau &#039;&#039;&#039;Groupes d&#039;utilisateurs&#039;&#039;&#039; (facultatif)&lt;br /&gt;
# Ajouter de nouveaux &#039;&#039;&#039;Utilisateurs&#039;&#039;&#039; et les assigner aux groupes d&#039;utilisateurs appropriés (facultatif)&lt;br /&gt;
# Créer le the nouveau &amp;quot;flux de travail&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
# Créez l&#039;(es) état(s) pour ce flux de travail avec la(les) condition(s).&lt;br /&gt;
# Créer la(les) &#039;&#039;&#039;Transition(s)&#039;&#039;&#039; du flux de travail&lt;br /&gt;
# Ajoutez ou modifiez la &#039;&#039;&#039;Catégorie&#039;&#039;&#039; applicable pour ajouter le &#039;&#039;&#039;Flux de travail&#039;&#039;&#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
# Modifier les &#039;&#039;Permissions&#039;&#039;&#039; de la &#039;&#039;Catégorie&#039;&#039; de sorte que les nouveaux&#039;&#039;Groupes d&#039;utilisateurs&#039;&#039; aient les permissions de faire seulement ce qu&#039;ils sont en droit de faire&lt;br /&gt;
# Paramétrer les notifications si nécessaire&lt;br /&gt;
# Configurer l&#039;accès de connexion pour les &#039;&#039;&#039;Utilisateurs&#039;&#039;&#039; sur le frontend (ou le backend : non inclus dans ce tutoriel) (facultatif)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Planification ==&lt;br /&gt;
Planifiez ce que votre flux de travail fera. La planification est toujours la partie la plus importante. Répondez à ces questions pour vous aider à planifier :&lt;br /&gt;
* Combien de groupes d&#039;utilisateurs (même s&#039;il n&#039;y a qu&#039;un seul utilisateur dans le groupe) doivent intervenir?&lt;br /&gt;
* Combien d&#039;actions y aura-t-il dans le flux de travail?&lt;br /&gt;
* L&#039;un ou l&#039;autre des groupes aura-t-il besoin de recevoir des notifications pour prendre les mesures qui s&#039;imposent ?&lt;br /&gt;
* Les groupes effectueront-ils leurs actions à partir du frontend ou du backend ou de la combinaison des deux ?&lt;br /&gt;
* Quelles &amp;quot;Catégories&amp;quot; se verront attribuer un/ce flux de travail ?&lt;br /&gt;
* Les différentes catégories auront-elles des flux de travail différents ?&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Scénario #1 ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*Un groupe d&#039;utilisateurs ajoute des messages de blog mais ne peut pas les publier&lt;br /&gt;
*Le deuxième groupe d&#039;utilisateurs approuve les messages du blog et les publie.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Créer de nouveaux groupes d&#039;utilisateurs ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
# Allez dans &#039;&#039;&#039;Utilisateurs&#039;&#039;&#039; {{rarr}} &#039;&#039;&#039;Groupes&#039;&#039;&#039; {{rarr}} Nouveau&lt;br /&gt;
# Saisissez le &#039;&#039;&#039;Titre du groupe&#039;&#039;&#039;:&#039;&#039;Affiches du Blog&#039;&#039;&#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
# Sélectionnez le &#039;&#039;&#039;Group Parent&#039;&#039;&#039; : Enregistré&lt;br /&gt;
# Cliquez sur Enregistrer &amp;amp; Nouveau.&lt;br /&gt;
# Saisissez le &#039;&#039;&#039;Titre du groupe&#039;&#039;&#039;:&#039;&#039;Modérateur de Blog&#039;&#039;&#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
# Sélectionnez le &#039;&#039;&#039;Group Parent&#039;&#039;&#039; : Enregistré&lt;br /&gt;
# Cliquez sur Enregistrer &amp;amp; Fermer.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Créer de nouveaux utilisateurs (ou modifier des utilisateurs existants) ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Using the directions on [[S:MyLanguage/Adding_a_new_user|create your new &#039;&#039;&#039;Users&#039;&#039;&#039;]].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
# Create &#039;&#039;&#039;User(s)&#039;&#039;&#039; and assign them to the &#039;&#039;Blog Posters&#039;&#039; &#039;&#039;&#039;User Group&#039;&#039;&#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
# Create &#039;&#039;&#039;User(s)&#039;&#039;&#039; and assign them to the &#039;&#039;Blog Approvers&#039;&#039; &#039;&#039;&#039;User Group&#039;&#039;&#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;quot;REMARQUE&amp;quot; : Si vous voulez que vos &amp;quot;Utilisateurs&amp;quot; reçoivent des notifications pour une &amp;quot;Transition&amp;quot; (voir plus bas), sélectionnez Oui pour &amp;quot;Recevoir des courriels du système&amp;quot; pour chaque &amp;quot;Utilisateur&amp;quot; devant recevoir des notifications.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Créer le flux de travail ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
# Allez dans &#039;&#039;&#039;Contenu&#039;&#039;&#039; {{rarr}} &#039;&#039;&#039;Flux de Travail&#039;&#039;&#039; {{rarr}} Nouveau&lt;br /&gt;
# Entrer le &#039;&#039;&#039;Titre&#039;&#039;&#039; : &#039;&#039;Flux de Travail du Blog&#039;&#039;&#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
# Cliquez sur Enregistrer &amp;amp; fermer.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;quot;REMARQUE&#039;&#039; : Ne cochez cette case par défaut que s&#039;il s&#039;agit du Flux de travail par défaut pour TOUS les nouveaux articles créés dans les catégories &#039;&#039;sans&#039;&#039; un flux de travail attribué. Les articles existants ne seront pas modifiés.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Créer le(s) statut(s) du flux de travail ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
# A partir de la vue en liste &#039;&#039;&#039;Workflows&#039;&#039;&#039;, cliquez sur le lien &amp;quot;&#039;&#039;&#039;gérer&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039; dans la colonne &#039;&#039;Etats&#039;&#039; à côté du &#039;&#039;Flux de Travail de Blog&#039;&#039;. Vous verrez l&#039;état par défaut &amp;quot;Publié&amp;quot;.&lt;br /&gt;
# Click the &#039;&#039;&#039;Default State&#039;&#039;&#039; for Published and change the &#039;&#039;&#039;Title&#039;&#039;&#039; to: &#039;&#039;Publish new blog post&#039;&#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
# &#039;&#039;&#039;L&#039;état des articles déjà marqués comme : Publiés&#039;&#039;&#039; restera inchangé.&lt;br /&gt;
# Cliquez sur Enregistrer &amp;amp; nouveau.&lt;br /&gt;
# Enter the &#039;&#039;&#039;Title&#039;&#039;&#039;: &#039;&#039;New blog post, unpublished&#039;&#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
# Modifiez &#039;&#039;&#039;le Statut&#039;&#039;&#039; des éléments dans cet &#039;&#039;&#039;État&#039;&#039;&#039; en &amp;quot;Non publié&amp;quot;.&lt;br /&gt;
# Change the &#039;&#039;&#039;Default&#039;&#039;&#039; to Yes (Green) since this is the &#039;&#039;&#039;Default State&#039;&#039;&#039; for Articles in this Workflow.&lt;br /&gt;
# Cliquez sur Enregistrer &amp;amp; fermer.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Créer la transition pour le flux de travail ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Il y a deux façons d&#039;accéder à &#039;&#039;&#039;Transitions&#039;&#039; :&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
# Click &#039;&#039;&#039;Transitions&#039;&#039;&#039; from the sidebar while in the States list view.&lt;br /&gt;
# Cliquez sur la ligne bleue avec les flèches dans les deux directions à partir de la vue en liste &#039;&#039;&#039;Flux de Travail&#039;&#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
# Allez à &#039;&#039;&#039;Transitions&#039;&#039;&#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
# Cliquez sur Nouveau&lt;br /&gt;
# Ajouter le &#039;&#039;&#039;Titre&#039;&#039;&#039; : &#039;&#039;Approuver/Publier&#039;&#039;&#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
# Sélectionnez le &#039;&#039;&#039;Statut&#039;&#039;&#039; &#039;&#039;Nouveau billet de blog - non publié&#039;&#039; dans le champ déroulant &amp;quot;&#039;De l&#039;état&#039;&amp;quot;.&lt;br /&gt;
# Sélectionnez le &#039;&#039;Statut&#039;&#039; &#039;&#039;Publier un nouveau billet de blog&#039;&#039; dans le champ déroulant &#039;&#039;&#039;Vers le Statut&#039;&#039;&#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
# Cliquer sur Enregistrer et rester dans cette &#039;&#039;&#039;Transition&#039;&#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
# Click the &#039;&#039;&#039;Permissions&#039;&#039;&#039; tab of the &#039;&#039;&#039;Transition&#039;&#039;&#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
# Select the &#039;&#039;&#039;User Group&#039;&#039;&#039; &#039;&#039;Blog Approvers&#039;&#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
# For the &#039;&#039;&#039;Action&#039;&#039;&#039; &#039;&#039;&#039;Execute transition&#039;&#039;&#039;, select &#039;&#039;&#039;Allowed&#039;&#039;&#039; from the &#039;&#039;&#039;Select New Setting&#039;&#039;&#039; drop-down.&lt;br /&gt;
# Cliquez sur Enregistrer &amp;amp; fermer.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;NOTE&#039;&#039;&#039;: You can quickly access your &#039;&#039;&#039;States&#039;&#039;&#039; and &#039;&#039;&#039;Transitions&#039;&#039;&#039; from the &#039;&#039;&#039;Workflow&#039;&#039;&#039; list view. The orange circle is the States and has the quantity of States listed next to the Workflow Title. The blue line with arrows in both directions is for Transitions and shows the quantity of Transitions for the Workflow.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Assign Workflow &amp;amp; User Group Permissions to the Category ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
# Allez dans &#039;&#039;&#039;Contenu&#039;&#039;&#039; {{rarr}} &#039;&#039;&#039;Catégories&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
# Access the &#039;&#039;Blog&#039;&#039; &#039;&#039;&#039;Category&#039;&#039;&#039; (or create it if necessary) and click the &#039;&#039;&#039;Workflow&#039;&#039;&#039; tab.&lt;br /&gt;
# Click the drop-down and select &#039;&#039;Blog Workflow&#039;&#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
# Cliquez sur l&#039;onglet &#039;&#039;&#039;Droits&#039;&#039;&#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
# Click on the &#039;&#039;Blog Poster&#039;&#039; &#039;&#039;&#039;User Group&#039;&#039;&#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
# For the &#039;&#039;&#039;Action&#039;&#039;&#039; Create and Edit, change the &#039;&#039;&#039;Select New Setting&#039;&#039;&#039; drop-down to Allowed.&lt;br /&gt;
# Click on the &#039;&#039;Blog Approvers&#039;&#039; &#039;&#039;&#039;User Group&#039;&#039;&#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
# For the &#039;&#039;&#039;Action&#039;&#039;&#039; Delete, Edit, Edit State and Edit Own, change the &#039;&#039;&#039;Select New Setting&#039;&#039;&#039; drop-down to Allowed.&lt;br /&gt;
# Cliquez sur Enregistrer &amp;amp; fermer.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
For more information on ACL and assigning permissions to User Groups, see the [[S:MyLanguage/J3.x:Access_Control_List_Tutorial|ACL Tutorial]].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Paramétrer les notifications ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Notifications use the Joomla core Messaging component. It is very basic. When enabled for Workflows, it will send a message to the User associated with the Group assigned to the Transition. The message simply states that they have a message in the site. It will then be their responsibility to login and check the articles that need approval and publish them.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;To set up notifications for the Workgroup Transitions:&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
# Allez dans &#039;&#039;&#039;Extensions&#039;&#039;&#039; {{rarr}} &#039;&#039;&#039;Plug-ins&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
# Click the &#039;&#039;&#039;Table Options&#039;&#039;&#039; button and &#039;&#039;&#039;Select Type&#039;&#039;&#039; of content&lt;br /&gt;
# Click on &#039;&#039;&#039;Content – Joomla&#039;&#039;&#039; and then toggle Yes for &#039;&#039;&#039;Email on transition execution&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
# Then make sure that the &#039;&#039;&#039;Users&#039;&#039;&#039; themselves have &#039;&#039;&#039;Receive System Emails&#039;&#039;&#039; toggled to Yes in &#039;&#039;&#039;Users&#039;&#039;&#039; {{rarr}} &#039;&#039;&#039;Manage&#039;&#039;&#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== To set it up so that Users can Post and Approve from the frontend ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
# Create a &#039;&#039;&#039;Menu Item&#039;&#039;&#039; for the &#039;&#039;&#039;Menu Item Type&#039;&#039;&#039; Login so that your Blog Posters can login.&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;&#039;&#039;&#039;Menus&#039;&#039;&#039; {{rarr}} &#039;&#039;Choose or create a menu&#039;&#039; {{rarr}} New {{rarr}} &#039;&#039;&#039;Users&#039;&#039;&#039; {{rarr}} &#039;&#039;&#039;Login&#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;OR&lt;br /&gt;
# Create a module for Login so that your Blog Posters can login.&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;&#039;&#039;&#039;Extensions&#039;&#039;&#039; {{rarr}} &#039;&#039;&#039;Modules&#039;&#039;&#039; {{rarr}} New {{rarr}} &#039;&#039;&#039;Login&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
# Add a &#039;&#039;&#039;Menu Item&#039;&#039;&#039; to a Menu that displays only for the &#039;&#039;&#039;Registered User Group&#039;&#039;&#039; to Add an article&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;&#039;&#039;&#039;Menu Item Type Articles&#039;&#039;&#039; {{rarr}} &#039;&#039;&#039;Create Article&#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;&#039;&#039;&#039;NOTE&#039;&#039;&#039;: this will display for all Registered Users unless you create an Access Level for your Blog Poster User Group and select this in the Menu Item under Access.&lt;br /&gt;
# When your &#039;&#039;&#039;User&#039;&#039;&#039; logs in, they add an &#039;&#039;&#039;Article&#039;&#039;&#039;, enter the content and Save.&lt;br /&gt;
# This will trigger a notification to the Blog Approvers Users that there is a new private message on the site. It doesn’t get more specific than that. Approvers should just come to the site and approve the Article. It will also send a message to Super Admins.&lt;br /&gt;
# When the Blog Approver logs in, they can navigate to where the new article will appear. They will be able to see the unpublished article and edit it/approve it/publish it. Then they can Save &amp;amp; Close and logout.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Admin note&#039;&#039;&#039;: Super Admins can use Batch to move existing Articles to a different workflow than it is currently assigned. It won’t make a difference if the Articles are already published.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Scénario #2 ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Ajoutez ici un autre scénario pour aider les autres à voir la puissance des flux de travail. Les documents peuvent être modifiés ou ajoutés par quiconque possèdant un compte.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Related Information==&lt;br /&gt;
See also:&lt;br /&gt;
* [[S:MyLanguage/Publishing_Workflow_Implementation|Publishing Workflow Implementation]]&lt;br /&gt;
* [[S:MyLanguage/Publishing_Workflow|Publishing Workflow]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;noinclude&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[Category:Google Summer of Code 2017{{#translation:}}]]&lt;br /&gt;
[[Category:Development{{#translation:}}]]&lt;br /&gt;
[[Category:Joomla! 4.x{{#translation:}}]]&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/noinclude&amp;gt;&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Wisgar</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://docs.sandbox.joomla.org/index.php?title=Translations:Publishing_Workflow/Scenarios/59/fr&amp;diff=639455</id>
		<title>Translations:Publishing Workflow/Scenarios/59/fr</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://docs.sandbox.joomla.org/index.php?title=Translations:Publishing_Workflow/Scenarios/59/fr&amp;diff=639455"/>
		<updated>2019-10-20T13:51:23Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Wisgar: Created page with &amp;quot;Cliquer sur Enregistrer et rester dans cette &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Transition&amp;#039;&amp;#039;.&amp;quot;&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;Cliquer sur Enregistrer et rester dans cette &#039;&#039;&#039;Transition&#039;&#039;.&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Wisgar</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://docs.sandbox.joomla.org/index.php?title=Publishing_Workflow/Scenarios/fr&amp;diff=639454</id>
		<title>Publishing Workflow/Scenarios/fr</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://docs.sandbox.joomla.org/index.php?title=Publishing_Workflow/Scenarios/fr&amp;diff=639454"/>
		<updated>2019-10-20T13:50:39Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Wisgar: Created page with &amp;quot;Sélectionnez le &amp;#039;&amp;#039;Statut&amp;#039;&amp;#039; &amp;#039;&amp;#039;Publier un nouveau billet de blog&amp;#039;&amp;#039; dans le champ déroulant &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Vers le Statut&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;.&amp;quot;&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;&amp;lt;noinclude&amp;gt;&amp;lt;languages /&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/noinclude&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
==Implémentation des flux de travail ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
L&#039;ordre général des tâches pour créer un nouveau flux de travail est :&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
# Planifier&lt;br /&gt;
# Ajouter un nouveau &#039;&#039;&#039;Groupes d&#039;utilisateurs&#039;&#039;&#039; (facultatif)&lt;br /&gt;
# Ajouter de nouveaux &#039;&#039;&#039;Utilisateurs&#039;&#039;&#039; et les assigner aux groupes d&#039;utilisateurs appropriés (facultatif)&lt;br /&gt;
# Créer le the nouveau &amp;quot;flux de travail&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
# Créez l&#039;(es) état(s) pour ce flux de travail avec la(les) condition(s).&lt;br /&gt;
# Créer la(les) &#039;&#039;&#039;Transition(s)&#039;&#039;&#039; du flux de travail&lt;br /&gt;
# Ajoutez ou modifiez la &#039;&#039;&#039;Catégorie&#039;&#039;&#039; applicable pour ajouter le &#039;&#039;&#039;Flux de travail&#039;&#039;&#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
# Modifier les &#039;&#039;Permissions&#039;&#039;&#039; de la &#039;&#039;Catégorie&#039;&#039; de sorte que les nouveaux&#039;&#039;Groupes d&#039;utilisateurs&#039;&#039; aient les permissions de faire seulement ce qu&#039;ils sont en droit de faire&lt;br /&gt;
# Paramétrer les notifications si nécessaire&lt;br /&gt;
# Configurer l&#039;accès de connexion pour les &#039;&#039;&#039;Utilisateurs&#039;&#039;&#039; sur le frontend (ou le backend : non inclus dans ce tutoriel) (facultatif)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Planification ==&lt;br /&gt;
Planifiez ce que votre flux de travail fera. La planification est toujours la partie la plus importante. Répondez à ces questions pour vous aider à planifier :&lt;br /&gt;
* Combien de groupes d&#039;utilisateurs (même s&#039;il n&#039;y a qu&#039;un seul utilisateur dans le groupe) doivent intervenir?&lt;br /&gt;
* Combien d&#039;actions y aura-t-il dans le flux de travail?&lt;br /&gt;
* L&#039;un ou l&#039;autre des groupes aura-t-il besoin de recevoir des notifications pour prendre les mesures qui s&#039;imposent ?&lt;br /&gt;
* Les groupes effectueront-ils leurs actions à partir du frontend ou du backend ou de la combinaison des deux ?&lt;br /&gt;
* Quelles &amp;quot;Catégories&amp;quot; se verront attribuer un/ce flux de travail ?&lt;br /&gt;
* Les différentes catégories auront-elles des flux de travail différents ?&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Scénario #1 ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*Un groupe d&#039;utilisateurs ajoute des messages de blog mais ne peut pas les publier&lt;br /&gt;
*Le deuxième groupe d&#039;utilisateurs approuve les messages du blog et les publie.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Créer de nouveaux groupes d&#039;utilisateurs ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
# Allez dans &#039;&#039;&#039;Utilisateurs&#039;&#039;&#039; {{rarr}} &#039;&#039;&#039;Groupes&#039;&#039;&#039; {{rarr}} Nouveau&lt;br /&gt;
# Saisissez le &#039;&#039;&#039;Titre du groupe&#039;&#039;&#039;:&#039;&#039;Affiches du Blog&#039;&#039;&#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
# Sélectionnez le &#039;&#039;&#039;Group Parent&#039;&#039;&#039; : Enregistré&lt;br /&gt;
# Cliquez sur Enregistrer &amp;amp; Nouveau.&lt;br /&gt;
# Saisissez le &#039;&#039;&#039;Titre du groupe&#039;&#039;&#039;:&#039;&#039;Modérateur de Blog&#039;&#039;&#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
# Sélectionnez le &#039;&#039;&#039;Group Parent&#039;&#039;&#039; : Enregistré&lt;br /&gt;
# Cliquez sur Enregistrer &amp;amp; Fermer.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Créer de nouveaux utilisateurs (ou modifier des utilisateurs existants) ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Using the directions on [[S:MyLanguage/Adding_a_new_user|create your new &#039;&#039;&#039;Users&#039;&#039;&#039;]].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
# Create &#039;&#039;&#039;User(s)&#039;&#039;&#039; and assign them to the &#039;&#039;Blog Posters&#039;&#039; &#039;&#039;&#039;User Group&#039;&#039;&#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
# Create &#039;&#039;&#039;User(s)&#039;&#039;&#039; and assign them to the &#039;&#039;Blog Approvers&#039;&#039; &#039;&#039;&#039;User Group&#039;&#039;&#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;quot;REMARQUE&amp;quot; : Si vous voulez que vos &amp;quot;Utilisateurs&amp;quot; reçoivent des notifications pour une &amp;quot;Transition&amp;quot; (voir plus bas), sélectionnez Oui pour &amp;quot;Recevoir des courriels du système&amp;quot; pour chaque &amp;quot;Utilisateur&amp;quot; devant recevoir des notifications.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Créer le flux de travail ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
# Allez dans &#039;&#039;&#039;Contenu&#039;&#039;&#039; {{rarr}} &#039;&#039;&#039;Flux de Travail&#039;&#039;&#039; {{rarr}} Nouveau&lt;br /&gt;
# Entrer le &#039;&#039;&#039;Titre&#039;&#039;&#039; : &#039;&#039;Flux de Travail du Blog&#039;&#039;&#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
# Cliquez sur Enregistrer &amp;amp; fermer.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;quot;REMARQUE&#039;&#039; : Ne cochez cette case par défaut que s&#039;il s&#039;agit du Flux de travail par défaut pour TOUS les nouveaux articles créés dans les catégories &#039;&#039;sans&#039;&#039; un flux de travail attribué. Les articles existants ne seront pas modifiés.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Créer le(s) statut(s) du flux de travail ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
# A partir de la vue en liste &#039;&#039;&#039;Workflows&#039;&#039;&#039;, cliquez sur le lien &amp;quot;&#039;&#039;&#039;gérer&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039; dans la colonne &#039;&#039;Etats&#039;&#039; à côté du &#039;&#039;Flux de Travail de Blog&#039;&#039;. Vous verrez l&#039;état par défaut &amp;quot;Publié&amp;quot;.&lt;br /&gt;
# Click the &#039;&#039;&#039;Default State&#039;&#039;&#039; for Published and change the &#039;&#039;&#039;Title&#039;&#039;&#039; to: &#039;&#039;Publish new blog post&#039;&#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
# &#039;&#039;&#039;L&#039;état des articles déjà marqués comme : Publiés&#039;&#039;&#039; restera inchangé.&lt;br /&gt;
# Cliquez sur Enregistrer &amp;amp; nouveau.&lt;br /&gt;
# Enter the &#039;&#039;&#039;Title&#039;&#039;&#039;: &#039;&#039;New blog post, unpublished&#039;&#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
# Modifiez &#039;&#039;&#039;le Statut&#039;&#039;&#039; des éléments dans cet &#039;&#039;&#039;État&#039;&#039;&#039; en &amp;quot;Non publié&amp;quot;.&lt;br /&gt;
# Change the &#039;&#039;&#039;Default&#039;&#039;&#039; to Yes (Green) since this is the &#039;&#039;&#039;Default State&#039;&#039;&#039; for Articles in this Workflow.&lt;br /&gt;
# Cliquez sur Enregistrer &amp;amp; fermer.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Créer la transition pour le flux de travail ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Il y a deux façons d&#039;accéder à &#039;&#039;&#039;Transitions&#039;&#039; :&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
# Click &#039;&#039;&#039;Transitions&#039;&#039;&#039; from the sidebar while in the States list view.&lt;br /&gt;
# Cliquez sur la ligne bleue avec les flèches dans les deux directions à partir de la vue en liste &#039;&#039;&#039;Flux de Travail&#039;&#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
# Allez à &#039;&#039;&#039;Transitions&#039;&#039;&#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
# Cliquez sur Nouveau&lt;br /&gt;
# Ajouter le &#039;&#039;&#039;Titre&#039;&#039;&#039; : &#039;&#039;Approuver/Publier&#039;&#039;&#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
# Sélectionnez le &#039;&#039;&#039;Statut&#039;&#039;&#039; &#039;&#039;Nouveau billet de blog - non publié&#039;&#039; dans le champ déroulant &amp;quot;&#039;De l&#039;état&#039;&amp;quot;.&lt;br /&gt;
# Sélectionnez le &#039;&#039;Statut&#039;&#039; &#039;&#039;Publier un nouveau billet de blog&#039;&#039; dans le champ déroulant &#039;&#039;&#039;Vers le Statut&#039;&#039;&#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
# Click Save and remain in this &#039;&#039;&#039;Transition&#039;&#039;&#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
# Click the &#039;&#039;&#039;Permissions&#039;&#039;&#039; tab of the &#039;&#039;&#039;Transition&#039;&#039;&#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
# Select the &#039;&#039;&#039;User Group&#039;&#039;&#039; &#039;&#039;Blog Approvers&#039;&#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
# For the &#039;&#039;&#039;Action&#039;&#039;&#039; &#039;&#039;&#039;Execute transition&#039;&#039;&#039;, select &#039;&#039;&#039;Allowed&#039;&#039;&#039; from the &#039;&#039;&#039;Select New Setting&#039;&#039;&#039; drop-down.&lt;br /&gt;
# Cliquez sur Enregistrer &amp;amp; fermer.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;NOTE&#039;&#039;&#039;: You can quickly access your &#039;&#039;&#039;States&#039;&#039;&#039; and &#039;&#039;&#039;Transitions&#039;&#039;&#039; from the &#039;&#039;&#039;Workflow&#039;&#039;&#039; list view. The orange circle is the States and has the quantity of States listed next to the Workflow Title. The blue line with arrows in both directions is for Transitions and shows the quantity of Transitions for the Workflow.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Assign Workflow &amp;amp; User Group Permissions to the Category ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
# Allez dans &#039;&#039;&#039;Contenu&#039;&#039;&#039; {{rarr}} &#039;&#039;&#039;Catégories&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
# Access the &#039;&#039;Blog&#039;&#039; &#039;&#039;&#039;Category&#039;&#039;&#039; (or create it if necessary) and click the &#039;&#039;&#039;Workflow&#039;&#039;&#039; tab.&lt;br /&gt;
# Click the drop-down and select &#039;&#039;Blog Workflow&#039;&#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
# Cliquez sur l&#039;onglet &#039;&#039;&#039;Droits&#039;&#039;&#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
# Click on the &#039;&#039;Blog Poster&#039;&#039; &#039;&#039;&#039;User Group&#039;&#039;&#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
# For the &#039;&#039;&#039;Action&#039;&#039;&#039; Create and Edit, change the &#039;&#039;&#039;Select New Setting&#039;&#039;&#039; drop-down to Allowed.&lt;br /&gt;
# Click on the &#039;&#039;Blog Approvers&#039;&#039; &#039;&#039;&#039;User Group&#039;&#039;&#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
# For the &#039;&#039;&#039;Action&#039;&#039;&#039; Delete, Edit, Edit State and Edit Own, change the &#039;&#039;&#039;Select New Setting&#039;&#039;&#039; drop-down to Allowed.&lt;br /&gt;
# Cliquez sur Enregistrer &amp;amp; fermer.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
For more information on ACL and assigning permissions to User Groups, see the [[S:MyLanguage/J3.x:Access_Control_List_Tutorial|ACL Tutorial]].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Paramétrer les notifications ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Notifications use the Joomla core Messaging component. It is very basic. When enabled for Workflows, it will send a message to the User associated with the Group assigned to the Transition. The message simply states that they have a message in the site. It will then be their responsibility to login and check the articles that need approval and publish them.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;To set up notifications for the Workgroup Transitions:&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
# Allez dans &#039;&#039;&#039;Extensions&#039;&#039;&#039; {{rarr}} &#039;&#039;&#039;Plug-ins&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
# Click the &#039;&#039;&#039;Table Options&#039;&#039;&#039; button and &#039;&#039;&#039;Select Type&#039;&#039;&#039; of content&lt;br /&gt;
# Click on &#039;&#039;&#039;Content – Joomla&#039;&#039;&#039; and then toggle Yes for &#039;&#039;&#039;Email on transition execution&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
# Then make sure that the &#039;&#039;&#039;Users&#039;&#039;&#039; themselves have &#039;&#039;&#039;Receive System Emails&#039;&#039;&#039; toggled to Yes in &#039;&#039;&#039;Users&#039;&#039;&#039; {{rarr}} &#039;&#039;&#039;Manage&#039;&#039;&#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== To set it up so that Users can Post and Approve from the frontend ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
# Create a &#039;&#039;&#039;Menu Item&#039;&#039;&#039; for the &#039;&#039;&#039;Menu Item Type&#039;&#039;&#039; Login so that your Blog Posters can login.&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;&#039;&#039;&#039;Menus&#039;&#039;&#039; {{rarr}} &#039;&#039;Choose or create a menu&#039;&#039; {{rarr}} New {{rarr}} &#039;&#039;&#039;Users&#039;&#039;&#039; {{rarr}} &#039;&#039;&#039;Login&#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;OR&lt;br /&gt;
# Create a module for Login so that your Blog Posters can login.&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;&#039;&#039;&#039;Extensions&#039;&#039;&#039; {{rarr}} &#039;&#039;&#039;Modules&#039;&#039;&#039; {{rarr}} New {{rarr}} &#039;&#039;&#039;Login&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
# Add a &#039;&#039;&#039;Menu Item&#039;&#039;&#039; to a Menu that displays only for the &#039;&#039;&#039;Registered User Group&#039;&#039;&#039; to Add an article&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;&#039;&#039;&#039;Menu Item Type Articles&#039;&#039;&#039; {{rarr}} &#039;&#039;&#039;Create Article&#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;&#039;&#039;&#039;NOTE&#039;&#039;&#039;: this will display for all Registered Users unless you create an Access Level for your Blog Poster User Group and select this in the Menu Item under Access.&lt;br /&gt;
# When your &#039;&#039;&#039;User&#039;&#039;&#039; logs in, they add an &#039;&#039;&#039;Article&#039;&#039;&#039;, enter the content and Save.&lt;br /&gt;
# This will trigger a notification to the Blog Approvers Users that there is a new private message on the site. It doesn’t get more specific than that. Approvers should just come to the site and approve the Article. It will also send a message to Super Admins.&lt;br /&gt;
# When the Blog Approver logs in, they can navigate to where the new article will appear. They will be able to see the unpublished article and edit it/approve it/publish it. Then they can Save &amp;amp; Close and logout.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Admin note&#039;&#039;&#039;: Super Admins can use Batch to move existing Articles to a different workflow than it is currently assigned. It won’t make a difference if the Articles are already published.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Scénario #2 ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Ajoutez ici un autre scénario pour aider les autres à voir la puissance des flux de travail. Les documents peuvent être modifiés ou ajoutés par quiconque possèdant un compte.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Related Information==&lt;br /&gt;
See also:&lt;br /&gt;
* [[S:MyLanguage/Publishing_Workflow_Implementation|Publishing Workflow Implementation]]&lt;br /&gt;
* [[S:MyLanguage/Publishing_Workflow|Publishing Workflow]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;noinclude&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[Category:Google Summer of Code 2017{{#translation:}}]]&lt;br /&gt;
[[Category:Development{{#translation:}}]]&lt;br /&gt;
[[Category:Joomla! 4.x{{#translation:}}]]&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/noinclude&amp;gt;&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Wisgar</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://docs.sandbox.joomla.org/index.php?title=Translations:Publishing_Workflow/Scenarios/58/fr&amp;diff=639453</id>
		<title>Translations:Publishing Workflow/Scenarios/58/fr</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://docs.sandbox.joomla.org/index.php?title=Translations:Publishing_Workflow/Scenarios/58/fr&amp;diff=639453"/>
		<updated>2019-10-20T13:50:38Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Wisgar: Created page with &amp;quot;Sélectionnez le &amp;#039;&amp;#039;Statut&amp;#039;&amp;#039; &amp;#039;&amp;#039;Publier un nouveau billet de blog&amp;#039;&amp;#039; dans le champ déroulant &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Vers le Statut&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;.&amp;quot;&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;Sélectionnez le &#039;&#039;Statut&#039;&#039; &#039;&#039;Publier un nouveau billet de blog&#039;&#039; dans le champ déroulant &#039;&#039;&#039;Vers le Statut&#039;&#039;&#039;.&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Wisgar</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://docs.sandbox.joomla.org/index.php?title=Publishing_Workflow/Scenarios/fr&amp;diff=639452</id>
		<title>Publishing Workflow/Scenarios/fr</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://docs.sandbox.joomla.org/index.php?title=Publishing_Workflow/Scenarios/fr&amp;diff=639452"/>
		<updated>2019-10-20T13:48:48Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Wisgar: Created page with &amp;quot;Sélectionnez le &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Statut&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; &amp;#039;&amp;#039;Nouveau billet de blog - non publié&amp;#039;&amp;#039; dans le champ déroulant &amp;quot;&amp;#039;De l&amp;#039;état&amp;#039;&amp;quot;.&amp;quot;&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;&amp;lt;noinclude&amp;gt;&amp;lt;languages /&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/noinclude&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
==Implémentation des flux de travail ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
L&#039;ordre général des tâches pour créer un nouveau flux de travail est :&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
# Planifier&lt;br /&gt;
# Ajouter un nouveau &#039;&#039;&#039;Groupes d&#039;utilisateurs&#039;&#039;&#039; (facultatif)&lt;br /&gt;
# Ajouter de nouveaux &#039;&#039;&#039;Utilisateurs&#039;&#039;&#039; et les assigner aux groupes d&#039;utilisateurs appropriés (facultatif)&lt;br /&gt;
# Créer le the nouveau &amp;quot;flux de travail&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
# Créez l&#039;(es) état(s) pour ce flux de travail avec la(les) condition(s).&lt;br /&gt;
# Créer la(les) &#039;&#039;&#039;Transition(s)&#039;&#039;&#039; du flux de travail&lt;br /&gt;
# Ajoutez ou modifiez la &#039;&#039;&#039;Catégorie&#039;&#039;&#039; applicable pour ajouter le &#039;&#039;&#039;Flux de travail&#039;&#039;&#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
# Modifier les &#039;&#039;Permissions&#039;&#039;&#039; de la &#039;&#039;Catégorie&#039;&#039; de sorte que les nouveaux&#039;&#039;Groupes d&#039;utilisateurs&#039;&#039; aient les permissions de faire seulement ce qu&#039;ils sont en droit de faire&lt;br /&gt;
# Paramétrer les notifications si nécessaire&lt;br /&gt;
# Configurer l&#039;accès de connexion pour les &#039;&#039;&#039;Utilisateurs&#039;&#039;&#039; sur le frontend (ou le backend : non inclus dans ce tutoriel) (facultatif)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Planification ==&lt;br /&gt;
Planifiez ce que votre flux de travail fera. La planification est toujours la partie la plus importante. Répondez à ces questions pour vous aider à planifier :&lt;br /&gt;
* Combien de groupes d&#039;utilisateurs (même s&#039;il n&#039;y a qu&#039;un seul utilisateur dans le groupe) doivent intervenir?&lt;br /&gt;
* Combien d&#039;actions y aura-t-il dans le flux de travail?&lt;br /&gt;
* L&#039;un ou l&#039;autre des groupes aura-t-il besoin de recevoir des notifications pour prendre les mesures qui s&#039;imposent ?&lt;br /&gt;
* Les groupes effectueront-ils leurs actions à partir du frontend ou du backend ou de la combinaison des deux ?&lt;br /&gt;
* Quelles &amp;quot;Catégories&amp;quot; se verront attribuer un/ce flux de travail ?&lt;br /&gt;
* Les différentes catégories auront-elles des flux de travail différents ?&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Scénario #1 ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*Un groupe d&#039;utilisateurs ajoute des messages de blog mais ne peut pas les publier&lt;br /&gt;
*Le deuxième groupe d&#039;utilisateurs approuve les messages du blog et les publie.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Créer de nouveaux groupes d&#039;utilisateurs ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
# Allez dans &#039;&#039;&#039;Utilisateurs&#039;&#039;&#039; {{rarr}} &#039;&#039;&#039;Groupes&#039;&#039;&#039; {{rarr}} Nouveau&lt;br /&gt;
# Saisissez le &#039;&#039;&#039;Titre du groupe&#039;&#039;&#039;:&#039;&#039;Affiches du Blog&#039;&#039;&#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
# Sélectionnez le &#039;&#039;&#039;Group Parent&#039;&#039;&#039; : Enregistré&lt;br /&gt;
# Cliquez sur Enregistrer &amp;amp; Nouveau.&lt;br /&gt;
# Saisissez le &#039;&#039;&#039;Titre du groupe&#039;&#039;&#039;:&#039;&#039;Modérateur de Blog&#039;&#039;&#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
# Sélectionnez le &#039;&#039;&#039;Group Parent&#039;&#039;&#039; : Enregistré&lt;br /&gt;
# Cliquez sur Enregistrer &amp;amp; Fermer.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Créer de nouveaux utilisateurs (ou modifier des utilisateurs existants) ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Using the directions on [[S:MyLanguage/Adding_a_new_user|create your new &#039;&#039;&#039;Users&#039;&#039;&#039;]].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
# Create &#039;&#039;&#039;User(s)&#039;&#039;&#039; and assign them to the &#039;&#039;Blog Posters&#039;&#039; &#039;&#039;&#039;User Group&#039;&#039;&#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
# Create &#039;&#039;&#039;User(s)&#039;&#039;&#039; and assign them to the &#039;&#039;Blog Approvers&#039;&#039; &#039;&#039;&#039;User Group&#039;&#039;&#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;quot;REMARQUE&amp;quot; : Si vous voulez que vos &amp;quot;Utilisateurs&amp;quot; reçoivent des notifications pour une &amp;quot;Transition&amp;quot; (voir plus bas), sélectionnez Oui pour &amp;quot;Recevoir des courriels du système&amp;quot; pour chaque &amp;quot;Utilisateur&amp;quot; devant recevoir des notifications.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Créer le flux de travail ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
# Allez dans &#039;&#039;&#039;Contenu&#039;&#039;&#039; {{rarr}} &#039;&#039;&#039;Flux de Travail&#039;&#039;&#039; {{rarr}} Nouveau&lt;br /&gt;
# Entrer le &#039;&#039;&#039;Titre&#039;&#039;&#039; : &#039;&#039;Flux de Travail du Blog&#039;&#039;&#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
# Cliquez sur Enregistrer &amp;amp; fermer.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;quot;REMARQUE&#039;&#039; : Ne cochez cette case par défaut que s&#039;il s&#039;agit du Flux de travail par défaut pour TOUS les nouveaux articles créés dans les catégories &#039;&#039;sans&#039;&#039; un flux de travail attribué. Les articles existants ne seront pas modifiés.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Créer le(s) statut(s) du flux de travail ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
# A partir de la vue en liste &#039;&#039;&#039;Workflows&#039;&#039;&#039;, cliquez sur le lien &amp;quot;&#039;&#039;&#039;gérer&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039; dans la colonne &#039;&#039;Etats&#039;&#039; à côté du &#039;&#039;Flux de Travail de Blog&#039;&#039;. Vous verrez l&#039;état par défaut &amp;quot;Publié&amp;quot;.&lt;br /&gt;
# Click the &#039;&#039;&#039;Default State&#039;&#039;&#039; for Published and change the &#039;&#039;&#039;Title&#039;&#039;&#039; to: &#039;&#039;Publish new blog post&#039;&#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
# &#039;&#039;&#039;L&#039;état des articles déjà marqués comme : Publiés&#039;&#039;&#039; restera inchangé.&lt;br /&gt;
# Cliquez sur Enregistrer &amp;amp; nouveau.&lt;br /&gt;
# Enter the &#039;&#039;&#039;Title&#039;&#039;&#039;: &#039;&#039;New blog post, unpublished&#039;&#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
# Modifiez &#039;&#039;&#039;le Statut&#039;&#039;&#039; des éléments dans cet &#039;&#039;&#039;État&#039;&#039;&#039; en &amp;quot;Non publié&amp;quot;.&lt;br /&gt;
# Change the &#039;&#039;&#039;Default&#039;&#039;&#039; to Yes (Green) since this is the &#039;&#039;&#039;Default State&#039;&#039;&#039; for Articles in this Workflow.&lt;br /&gt;
# Cliquez sur Enregistrer &amp;amp; fermer.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Créer la transition pour le flux de travail ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Il y a deux façons d&#039;accéder à &#039;&#039;&#039;Transitions&#039;&#039; :&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
# Click &#039;&#039;&#039;Transitions&#039;&#039;&#039; from the sidebar while in the States list view.&lt;br /&gt;
# Cliquez sur la ligne bleue avec les flèches dans les deux directions à partir de la vue en liste &#039;&#039;&#039;Flux de Travail&#039;&#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
# Allez à &#039;&#039;&#039;Transitions&#039;&#039;&#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
# Cliquez sur Nouveau&lt;br /&gt;
# Ajouter le &#039;&#039;&#039;Titre&#039;&#039;&#039; : &#039;&#039;Approuver/Publier&#039;&#039;&#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
# Sélectionnez le &#039;&#039;&#039;Statut&#039;&#039;&#039; &#039;&#039;Nouveau billet de blog - non publié&#039;&#039; dans le champ déroulant &amp;quot;&#039;De l&#039;état&#039;&amp;quot;.&lt;br /&gt;
# Select the &#039;&#039;&#039;State&#039;&#039;&#039; &#039;&#039;Publish new blog post&#039;&#039; in the &#039;&#039;&#039;To state&#039;&#039;&#039; field drop-down.&lt;br /&gt;
# Click Save and remain in this &#039;&#039;&#039;Transition&#039;&#039;&#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
# Click the &#039;&#039;&#039;Permissions&#039;&#039;&#039; tab of the &#039;&#039;&#039;Transition&#039;&#039;&#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
# Select the &#039;&#039;&#039;User Group&#039;&#039;&#039; &#039;&#039;Blog Approvers&#039;&#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
# For the &#039;&#039;&#039;Action&#039;&#039;&#039; &#039;&#039;&#039;Execute transition&#039;&#039;&#039;, select &#039;&#039;&#039;Allowed&#039;&#039;&#039; from the &#039;&#039;&#039;Select New Setting&#039;&#039;&#039; drop-down.&lt;br /&gt;
# Cliquez sur Enregistrer &amp;amp; fermer.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;NOTE&#039;&#039;&#039;: You can quickly access your &#039;&#039;&#039;States&#039;&#039;&#039; and &#039;&#039;&#039;Transitions&#039;&#039;&#039; from the &#039;&#039;&#039;Workflow&#039;&#039;&#039; list view. The orange circle is the States and has the quantity of States listed next to the Workflow Title. The blue line with arrows in both directions is for Transitions and shows the quantity of Transitions for the Workflow.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Assign Workflow &amp;amp; User Group Permissions to the Category ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
# Allez dans &#039;&#039;&#039;Contenu&#039;&#039;&#039; {{rarr}} &#039;&#039;&#039;Catégories&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
# Access the &#039;&#039;Blog&#039;&#039; &#039;&#039;&#039;Category&#039;&#039;&#039; (or create it if necessary) and click the &#039;&#039;&#039;Workflow&#039;&#039;&#039; tab.&lt;br /&gt;
# Click the drop-down and select &#039;&#039;Blog Workflow&#039;&#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
# Cliquez sur l&#039;onglet &#039;&#039;&#039;Droits&#039;&#039;&#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
# Click on the &#039;&#039;Blog Poster&#039;&#039; &#039;&#039;&#039;User Group&#039;&#039;&#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
# For the &#039;&#039;&#039;Action&#039;&#039;&#039; Create and Edit, change the &#039;&#039;&#039;Select New Setting&#039;&#039;&#039; drop-down to Allowed.&lt;br /&gt;
# Click on the &#039;&#039;Blog Approvers&#039;&#039; &#039;&#039;&#039;User Group&#039;&#039;&#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
# For the &#039;&#039;&#039;Action&#039;&#039;&#039; Delete, Edit, Edit State and Edit Own, change the &#039;&#039;&#039;Select New Setting&#039;&#039;&#039; drop-down to Allowed.&lt;br /&gt;
# Cliquez sur Enregistrer &amp;amp; fermer.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
For more information on ACL and assigning permissions to User Groups, see the [[S:MyLanguage/J3.x:Access_Control_List_Tutorial|ACL Tutorial]].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Paramétrer les notifications ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Notifications use the Joomla core Messaging component. It is very basic. When enabled for Workflows, it will send a message to the User associated with the Group assigned to the Transition. The message simply states that they have a message in the site. It will then be their responsibility to login and check the articles that need approval and publish them.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;To set up notifications for the Workgroup Transitions:&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
# Allez dans &#039;&#039;&#039;Extensions&#039;&#039;&#039; {{rarr}} &#039;&#039;&#039;Plug-ins&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
# Click the &#039;&#039;&#039;Table Options&#039;&#039;&#039; button and &#039;&#039;&#039;Select Type&#039;&#039;&#039; of content&lt;br /&gt;
# Click on &#039;&#039;&#039;Content – Joomla&#039;&#039;&#039; and then toggle Yes for &#039;&#039;&#039;Email on transition execution&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
# Then make sure that the &#039;&#039;&#039;Users&#039;&#039;&#039; themselves have &#039;&#039;&#039;Receive System Emails&#039;&#039;&#039; toggled to Yes in &#039;&#039;&#039;Users&#039;&#039;&#039; {{rarr}} &#039;&#039;&#039;Manage&#039;&#039;&#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== To set it up so that Users can Post and Approve from the frontend ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
# Create a &#039;&#039;&#039;Menu Item&#039;&#039;&#039; for the &#039;&#039;&#039;Menu Item Type&#039;&#039;&#039; Login so that your Blog Posters can login.&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;&#039;&#039;&#039;Menus&#039;&#039;&#039; {{rarr}} &#039;&#039;Choose or create a menu&#039;&#039; {{rarr}} New {{rarr}} &#039;&#039;&#039;Users&#039;&#039;&#039; {{rarr}} &#039;&#039;&#039;Login&#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;OR&lt;br /&gt;
# Create a module for Login so that your Blog Posters can login.&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;&#039;&#039;&#039;Extensions&#039;&#039;&#039; {{rarr}} &#039;&#039;&#039;Modules&#039;&#039;&#039; {{rarr}} New {{rarr}} &#039;&#039;&#039;Login&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
# Add a &#039;&#039;&#039;Menu Item&#039;&#039;&#039; to a Menu that displays only for the &#039;&#039;&#039;Registered User Group&#039;&#039;&#039; to Add an article&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;&#039;&#039;&#039;Menu Item Type Articles&#039;&#039;&#039; {{rarr}} &#039;&#039;&#039;Create Article&#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;&#039;&#039;&#039;NOTE&#039;&#039;&#039;: this will display for all Registered Users unless you create an Access Level for your Blog Poster User Group and select this in the Menu Item under Access.&lt;br /&gt;
# When your &#039;&#039;&#039;User&#039;&#039;&#039; logs in, they add an &#039;&#039;&#039;Article&#039;&#039;&#039;, enter the content and Save.&lt;br /&gt;
# This will trigger a notification to the Blog Approvers Users that there is a new private message on the site. It doesn’t get more specific than that. Approvers should just come to the site and approve the Article. It will also send a message to Super Admins.&lt;br /&gt;
# When the Blog Approver logs in, they can navigate to where the new article will appear. They will be able to see the unpublished article and edit it/approve it/publish it. Then they can Save &amp;amp; Close and logout.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Admin note&#039;&#039;&#039;: Super Admins can use Batch to move existing Articles to a different workflow than it is currently assigned. It won’t make a difference if the Articles are already published.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Scénario #2 ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Ajoutez ici un autre scénario pour aider les autres à voir la puissance des flux de travail. Les documents peuvent être modifiés ou ajoutés par quiconque possèdant un compte.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Related Information==&lt;br /&gt;
See also:&lt;br /&gt;
* [[S:MyLanguage/Publishing_Workflow_Implementation|Publishing Workflow Implementation]]&lt;br /&gt;
* [[S:MyLanguage/Publishing_Workflow|Publishing Workflow]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;noinclude&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[Category:Google Summer of Code 2017{{#translation:}}]]&lt;br /&gt;
[[Category:Development{{#translation:}}]]&lt;br /&gt;
[[Category:Joomla! 4.x{{#translation:}}]]&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/noinclude&amp;gt;&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Wisgar</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://docs.sandbox.joomla.org/index.php?title=Translations:Publishing_Workflow/Scenarios/57/fr&amp;diff=639451</id>
		<title>Translations:Publishing Workflow/Scenarios/57/fr</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://docs.sandbox.joomla.org/index.php?title=Translations:Publishing_Workflow/Scenarios/57/fr&amp;diff=639451"/>
		<updated>2019-10-20T13:48:48Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Wisgar: Created page with &amp;quot;Sélectionnez le &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Statut&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; &amp;#039;&amp;#039;Nouveau billet de blog - non publié&amp;#039;&amp;#039; dans le champ déroulant &amp;quot;&amp;#039;De l&amp;#039;état&amp;#039;&amp;quot;.&amp;quot;&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;Sélectionnez le &#039;&#039;&#039;Statut&#039;&#039;&#039; &#039;&#039;Nouveau billet de blog - non publié&#039;&#039; dans le champ déroulant &amp;quot;&#039;De l&#039;état&#039;&amp;quot;.&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Wisgar</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://docs.sandbox.joomla.org/index.php?title=Publishing_Workflow/Scenarios/fr&amp;diff=639450</id>
		<title>Publishing Workflow/Scenarios/fr</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://docs.sandbox.joomla.org/index.php?title=Publishing_Workflow/Scenarios/fr&amp;diff=639450"/>
		<updated>2019-10-20T13:44:08Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Wisgar: Created page with &amp;quot;Ajouter le &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Titre&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; : &amp;#039;&amp;#039;Approuver/Publier&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;.&amp;quot;&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;&amp;lt;noinclude&amp;gt;&amp;lt;languages /&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/noinclude&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
==Implémentation des flux de travail ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
L&#039;ordre général des tâches pour créer un nouveau flux de travail est :&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
# Planifier&lt;br /&gt;
# Ajouter un nouveau &#039;&#039;&#039;Groupes d&#039;utilisateurs&#039;&#039;&#039; (facultatif)&lt;br /&gt;
# Ajouter de nouveaux &#039;&#039;&#039;Utilisateurs&#039;&#039;&#039; et les assigner aux groupes d&#039;utilisateurs appropriés (facultatif)&lt;br /&gt;
# Créer le the nouveau &amp;quot;flux de travail&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
# Créez l&#039;(es) état(s) pour ce flux de travail avec la(les) condition(s).&lt;br /&gt;
# Créer la(les) &#039;&#039;&#039;Transition(s)&#039;&#039;&#039; du flux de travail&lt;br /&gt;
# Ajoutez ou modifiez la &#039;&#039;&#039;Catégorie&#039;&#039;&#039; applicable pour ajouter le &#039;&#039;&#039;Flux de travail&#039;&#039;&#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
# Modifier les &#039;&#039;Permissions&#039;&#039;&#039; de la &#039;&#039;Catégorie&#039;&#039; de sorte que les nouveaux&#039;&#039;Groupes d&#039;utilisateurs&#039;&#039; aient les permissions de faire seulement ce qu&#039;ils sont en droit de faire&lt;br /&gt;
# Paramétrer les notifications si nécessaire&lt;br /&gt;
# Configurer l&#039;accès de connexion pour les &#039;&#039;&#039;Utilisateurs&#039;&#039;&#039; sur le frontend (ou le backend : non inclus dans ce tutoriel) (facultatif)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Planification ==&lt;br /&gt;
Planifiez ce que votre flux de travail fera. La planification est toujours la partie la plus importante. Répondez à ces questions pour vous aider à planifier :&lt;br /&gt;
* Combien de groupes d&#039;utilisateurs (même s&#039;il n&#039;y a qu&#039;un seul utilisateur dans le groupe) doivent intervenir?&lt;br /&gt;
* Combien d&#039;actions y aura-t-il dans le flux de travail?&lt;br /&gt;
* L&#039;un ou l&#039;autre des groupes aura-t-il besoin de recevoir des notifications pour prendre les mesures qui s&#039;imposent ?&lt;br /&gt;
* Les groupes effectueront-ils leurs actions à partir du frontend ou du backend ou de la combinaison des deux ?&lt;br /&gt;
* Quelles &amp;quot;Catégories&amp;quot; se verront attribuer un/ce flux de travail ?&lt;br /&gt;
* Les différentes catégories auront-elles des flux de travail différents ?&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Scénario #1 ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*Un groupe d&#039;utilisateurs ajoute des messages de blog mais ne peut pas les publier&lt;br /&gt;
*Le deuxième groupe d&#039;utilisateurs approuve les messages du blog et les publie.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Créer de nouveaux groupes d&#039;utilisateurs ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
# Allez dans &#039;&#039;&#039;Utilisateurs&#039;&#039;&#039; {{rarr}} &#039;&#039;&#039;Groupes&#039;&#039;&#039; {{rarr}} Nouveau&lt;br /&gt;
# Saisissez le &#039;&#039;&#039;Titre du groupe&#039;&#039;&#039;:&#039;&#039;Affiches du Blog&#039;&#039;&#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
# Sélectionnez le &#039;&#039;&#039;Group Parent&#039;&#039;&#039; : Enregistré&lt;br /&gt;
# Cliquez sur Enregistrer &amp;amp; Nouveau.&lt;br /&gt;
# Saisissez le &#039;&#039;&#039;Titre du groupe&#039;&#039;&#039;:&#039;&#039;Modérateur de Blog&#039;&#039;&#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
# Sélectionnez le &#039;&#039;&#039;Group Parent&#039;&#039;&#039; : Enregistré&lt;br /&gt;
# Cliquez sur Enregistrer &amp;amp; Fermer.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Créer de nouveaux utilisateurs (ou modifier des utilisateurs existants) ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Using the directions on [[S:MyLanguage/Adding_a_new_user|create your new &#039;&#039;&#039;Users&#039;&#039;&#039;]].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
# Create &#039;&#039;&#039;User(s)&#039;&#039;&#039; and assign them to the &#039;&#039;Blog Posters&#039;&#039; &#039;&#039;&#039;User Group&#039;&#039;&#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
# Create &#039;&#039;&#039;User(s)&#039;&#039;&#039; and assign them to the &#039;&#039;Blog Approvers&#039;&#039; &#039;&#039;&#039;User Group&#039;&#039;&#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;quot;REMARQUE&amp;quot; : Si vous voulez que vos &amp;quot;Utilisateurs&amp;quot; reçoivent des notifications pour une &amp;quot;Transition&amp;quot; (voir plus bas), sélectionnez Oui pour &amp;quot;Recevoir des courriels du système&amp;quot; pour chaque &amp;quot;Utilisateur&amp;quot; devant recevoir des notifications.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Créer le flux de travail ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
# Allez dans &#039;&#039;&#039;Contenu&#039;&#039;&#039; {{rarr}} &#039;&#039;&#039;Flux de Travail&#039;&#039;&#039; {{rarr}} Nouveau&lt;br /&gt;
# Entrer le &#039;&#039;&#039;Titre&#039;&#039;&#039; : &#039;&#039;Flux de Travail du Blog&#039;&#039;&#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
# Cliquez sur Enregistrer &amp;amp; fermer.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;quot;REMARQUE&#039;&#039; : Ne cochez cette case par défaut que s&#039;il s&#039;agit du Flux de travail par défaut pour TOUS les nouveaux articles créés dans les catégories &#039;&#039;sans&#039;&#039; un flux de travail attribué. Les articles existants ne seront pas modifiés.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Créer le(s) statut(s) du flux de travail ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
# A partir de la vue en liste &#039;&#039;&#039;Workflows&#039;&#039;&#039;, cliquez sur le lien &amp;quot;&#039;&#039;&#039;gérer&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039; dans la colonne &#039;&#039;Etats&#039;&#039; à côté du &#039;&#039;Flux de Travail de Blog&#039;&#039;. Vous verrez l&#039;état par défaut &amp;quot;Publié&amp;quot;.&lt;br /&gt;
# Click the &#039;&#039;&#039;Default State&#039;&#039;&#039; for Published and change the &#039;&#039;&#039;Title&#039;&#039;&#039; to: &#039;&#039;Publish new blog post&#039;&#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
# &#039;&#039;&#039;L&#039;état des articles déjà marqués comme : Publiés&#039;&#039;&#039; restera inchangé.&lt;br /&gt;
# Cliquez sur Enregistrer &amp;amp; nouveau.&lt;br /&gt;
# Enter the &#039;&#039;&#039;Title&#039;&#039;&#039;: &#039;&#039;New blog post, unpublished&#039;&#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
# Modifiez &#039;&#039;&#039;le Statut&#039;&#039;&#039; des éléments dans cet &#039;&#039;&#039;État&#039;&#039;&#039; en &amp;quot;Non publié&amp;quot;.&lt;br /&gt;
# Change the &#039;&#039;&#039;Default&#039;&#039;&#039; to Yes (Green) since this is the &#039;&#039;&#039;Default State&#039;&#039;&#039; for Articles in this Workflow.&lt;br /&gt;
# Cliquez sur Enregistrer &amp;amp; fermer.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Créer la transition pour le flux de travail ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Il y a deux façons d&#039;accéder à &#039;&#039;&#039;Transitions&#039;&#039; :&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
# Click &#039;&#039;&#039;Transitions&#039;&#039;&#039; from the sidebar while in the States list view.&lt;br /&gt;
# Cliquez sur la ligne bleue avec les flèches dans les deux directions à partir de la vue en liste &#039;&#039;&#039;Flux de Travail&#039;&#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
# Allez à &#039;&#039;&#039;Transitions&#039;&#039;&#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
# Cliquez sur Nouveau&lt;br /&gt;
# Ajouter le &#039;&#039;&#039;Titre&#039;&#039;&#039; : &#039;&#039;Approuver/Publier&#039;&#039;&#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
# Select the &#039;&#039;&#039;State&#039;&#039;&#039; &#039;&#039;New blog post – unpublished&#039;&#039; in the &#039;&#039;&#039;From state&#039;&#039;&#039; field drop-down.&lt;br /&gt;
# Select the &#039;&#039;&#039;State&#039;&#039;&#039; &#039;&#039;Publish new blog post&#039;&#039; in the &#039;&#039;&#039;To state&#039;&#039;&#039; field drop-down.&lt;br /&gt;
# Click Save and remain in this &#039;&#039;&#039;Transition&#039;&#039;&#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
# Click the &#039;&#039;&#039;Permissions&#039;&#039;&#039; tab of the &#039;&#039;&#039;Transition&#039;&#039;&#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
# Select the &#039;&#039;&#039;User Group&#039;&#039;&#039; &#039;&#039;Blog Approvers&#039;&#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
# For the &#039;&#039;&#039;Action&#039;&#039;&#039; &#039;&#039;&#039;Execute transition&#039;&#039;&#039;, select &#039;&#039;&#039;Allowed&#039;&#039;&#039; from the &#039;&#039;&#039;Select New Setting&#039;&#039;&#039; drop-down.&lt;br /&gt;
# Cliquez sur Enregistrer &amp;amp; fermer.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;NOTE&#039;&#039;&#039;: You can quickly access your &#039;&#039;&#039;States&#039;&#039;&#039; and &#039;&#039;&#039;Transitions&#039;&#039;&#039; from the &#039;&#039;&#039;Workflow&#039;&#039;&#039; list view. The orange circle is the States and has the quantity of States listed next to the Workflow Title. The blue line with arrows in both directions is for Transitions and shows the quantity of Transitions for the Workflow.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Assign Workflow &amp;amp; User Group Permissions to the Category ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
# Allez dans &#039;&#039;&#039;Contenu&#039;&#039;&#039; {{rarr}} &#039;&#039;&#039;Catégories&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
# Access the &#039;&#039;Blog&#039;&#039; &#039;&#039;&#039;Category&#039;&#039;&#039; (or create it if necessary) and click the &#039;&#039;&#039;Workflow&#039;&#039;&#039; tab.&lt;br /&gt;
# Click the drop-down and select &#039;&#039;Blog Workflow&#039;&#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
# Cliquez sur l&#039;onglet &#039;&#039;&#039;Droits&#039;&#039;&#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
# Click on the &#039;&#039;Blog Poster&#039;&#039; &#039;&#039;&#039;User Group&#039;&#039;&#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
# For the &#039;&#039;&#039;Action&#039;&#039;&#039; Create and Edit, change the &#039;&#039;&#039;Select New Setting&#039;&#039;&#039; drop-down to Allowed.&lt;br /&gt;
# Click on the &#039;&#039;Blog Approvers&#039;&#039; &#039;&#039;&#039;User Group&#039;&#039;&#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
# For the &#039;&#039;&#039;Action&#039;&#039;&#039; Delete, Edit, Edit State and Edit Own, change the &#039;&#039;&#039;Select New Setting&#039;&#039;&#039; drop-down to Allowed.&lt;br /&gt;
# Cliquez sur Enregistrer &amp;amp; fermer.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
For more information on ACL and assigning permissions to User Groups, see the [[S:MyLanguage/J3.x:Access_Control_List_Tutorial|ACL Tutorial]].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Paramétrer les notifications ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Notifications use the Joomla core Messaging component. It is very basic. When enabled for Workflows, it will send a message to the User associated with the Group assigned to the Transition. The message simply states that they have a message in the site. It will then be their responsibility to login and check the articles that need approval and publish them.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;To set up notifications for the Workgroup Transitions:&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
# Allez dans &#039;&#039;&#039;Extensions&#039;&#039;&#039; {{rarr}} &#039;&#039;&#039;Plug-ins&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
# Click the &#039;&#039;&#039;Table Options&#039;&#039;&#039; button and &#039;&#039;&#039;Select Type&#039;&#039;&#039; of content&lt;br /&gt;
# Click on &#039;&#039;&#039;Content – Joomla&#039;&#039;&#039; and then toggle Yes for &#039;&#039;&#039;Email on transition execution&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
# Then make sure that the &#039;&#039;&#039;Users&#039;&#039;&#039; themselves have &#039;&#039;&#039;Receive System Emails&#039;&#039;&#039; toggled to Yes in &#039;&#039;&#039;Users&#039;&#039;&#039; {{rarr}} &#039;&#039;&#039;Manage&#039;&#039;&#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== To set it up so that Users can Post and Approve from the frontend ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
# Create a &#039;&#039;&#039;Menu Item&#039;&#039;&#039; for the &#039;&#039;&#039;Menu Item Type&#039;&#039;&#039; Login so that your Blog Posters can login.&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;&#039;&#039;&#039;Menus&#039;&#039;&#039; {{rarr}} &#039;&#039;Choose or create a menu&#039;&#039; {{rarr}} New {{rarr}} &#039;&#039;&#039;Users&#039;&#039;&#039; {{rarr}} &#039;&#039;&#039;Login&#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;OR&lt;br /&gt;
# Create a module for Login so that your Blog Posters can login.&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;&#039;&#039;&#039;Extensions&#039;&#039;&#039; {{rarr}} &#039;&#039;&#039;Modules&#039;&#039;&#039; {{rarr}} New {{rarr}} &#039;&#039;&#039;Login&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
# Add a &#039;&#039;&#039;Menu Item&#039;&#039;&#039; to a Menu that displays only for the &#039;&#039;&#039;Registered User Group&#039;&#039;&#039; to Add an article&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;&#039;&#039;&#039;Menu Item Type Articles&#039;&#039;&#039; {{rarr}} &#039;&#039;&#039;Create Article&#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;&#039;&#039;&#039;NOTE&#039;&#039;&#039;: this will display for all Registered Users unless you create an Access Level for your Blog Poster User Group and select this in the Menu Item under Access.&lt;br /&gt;
# When your &#039;&#039;&#039;User&#039;&#039;&#039; logs in, they add an &#039;&#039;&#039;Article&#039;&#039;&#039;, enter the content and Save.&lt;br /&gt;
# This will trigger a notification to the Blog Approvers Users that there is a new private message on the site. It doesn’t get more specific than that. Approvers should just come to the site and approve the Article. It will also send a message to Super Admins.&lt;br /&gt;
# When the Blog Approver logs in, they can navigate to where the new article will appear. They will be able to see the unpublished article and edit it/approve it/publish it. Then they can Save &amp;amp; Close and logout.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Admin note&#039;&#039;&#039;: Super Admins can use Batch to move existing Articles to a different workflow than it is currently assigned. It won’t make a difference if the Articles are already published.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Scénario #2 ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Ajoutez ici un autre scénario pour aider les autres à voir la puissance des flux de travail. Les documents peuvent être modifiés ou ajoutés par quiconque possèdant un compte.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Related Information==&lt;br /&gt;
See also:&lt;br /&gt;
* [[S:MyLanguage/Publishing_Workflow_Implementation|Publishing Workflow Implementation]]&lt;br /&gt;
* [[S:MyLanguage/Publishing_Workflow|Publishing Workflow]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;noinclude&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[Category:Google Summer of Code 2017{{#translation:}}]]&lt;br /&gt;
[[Category:Development{{#translation:}}]]&lt;br /&gt;
[[Category:Joomla! 4.x{{#translation:}}]]&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/noinclude&amp;gt;&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Wisgar</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://docs.sandbox.joomla.org/index.php?title=Translations:Publishing_Workflow/Scenarios/56/fr&amp;diff=639449</id>
		<title>Translations:Publishing Workflow/Scenarios/56/fr</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://docs.sandbox.joomla.org/index.php?title=Translations:Publishing_Workflow/Scenarios/56/fr&amp;diff=639449"/>
		<updated>2019-10-20T13:44:08Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Wisgar: Created page with &amp;quot;Ajouter le &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Titre&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; : &amp;#039;&amp;#039;Approuver/Publier&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;.&amp;quot;&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;Ajouter le &#039;&#039;&#039;Titre&#039;&#039;&#039; : &#039;&#039;Approuver/Publier&#039;&#039;&#039;.&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Wisgar</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://docs.sandbox.joomla.org/index.php?title=Publishing_Workflow/Scenarios/fr&amp;diff=639448</id>
		<title>Publishing Workflow/Scenarios/fr</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://docs.sandbox.joomla.org/index.php?title=Publishing_Workflow/Scenarios/fr&amp;diff=639448"/>
		<updated>2019-10-20T13:43:48Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Wisgar: Created page with &amp;quot;Allez à &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Transitions&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;.&amp;quot;&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;&amp;lt;noinclude&amp;gt;&amp;lt;languages /&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/noinclude&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
==Implémentation des flux de travail ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
L&#039;ordre général des tâches pour créer un nouveau flux de travail est :&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
# Planifier&lt;br /&gt;
# Ajouter un nouveau &#039;&#039;&#039;Groupes d&#039;utilisateurs&#039;&#039;&#039; (facultatif)&lt;br /&gt;
# Ajouter de nouveaux &#039;&#039;&#039;Utilisateurs&#039;&#039;&#039; et les assigner aux groupes d&#039;utilisateurs appropriés (facultatif)&lt;br /&gt;
# Créer le the nouveau &amp;quot;flux de travail&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
# Créez l&#039;(es) état(s) pour ce flux de travail avec la(les) condition(s).&lt;br /&gt;
# Créer la(les) &#039;&#039;&#039;Transition(s)&#039;&#039;&#039; du flux de travail&lt;br /&gt;
# Ajoutez ou modifiez la &#039;&#039;&#039;Catégorie&#039;&#039;&#039; applicable pour ajouter le &#039;&#039;&#039;Flux de travail&#039;&#039;&#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
# Modifier les &#039;&#039;Permissions&#039;&#039;&#039; de la &#039;&#039;Catégorie&#039;&#039; de sorte que les nouveaux&#039;&#039;Groupes d&#039;utilisateurs&#039;&#039; aient les permissions de faire seulement ce qu&#039;ils sont en droit de faire&lt;br /&gt;
# Paramétrer les notifications si nécessaire&lt;br /&gt;
# Configurer l&#039;accès de connexion pour les &#039;&#039;&#039;Utilisateurs&#039;&#039;&#039; sur le frontend (ou le backend : non inclus dans ce tutoriel) (facultatif)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Planification ==&lt;br /&gt;
Planifiez ce que votre flux de travail fera. La planification est toujours la partie la plus importante. Répondez à ces questions pour vous aider à planifier :&lt;br /&gt;
* Combien de groupes d&#039;utilisateurs (même s&#039;il n&#039;y a qu&#039;un seul utilisateur dans le groupe) doivent intervenir?&lt;br /&gt;
* Combien d&#039;actions y aura-t-il dans le flux de travail?&lt;br /&gt;
* L&#039;un ou l&#039;autre des groupes aura-t-il besoin de recevoir des notifications pour prendre les mesures qui s&#039;imposent ?&lt;br /&gt;
* Les groupes effectueront-ils leurs actions à partir du frontend ou du backend ou de la combinaison des deux ?&lt;br /&gt;
* Quelles &amp;quot;Catégories&amp;quot; se verront attribuer un/ce flux de travail ?&lt;br /&gt;
* Les différentes catégories auront-elles des flux de travail différents ?&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Scénario #1 ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*Un groupe d&#039;utilisateurs ajoute des messages de blog mais ne peut pas les publier&lt;br /&gt;
*Le deuxième groupe d&#039;utilisateurs approuve les messages du blog et les publie.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Créer de nouveaux groupes d&#039;utilisateurs ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
# Allez dans &#039;&#039;&#039;Utilisateurs&#039;&#039;&#039; {{rarr}} &#039;&#039;&#039;Groupes&#039;&#039;&#039; {{rarr}} Nouveau&lt;br /&gt;
# Saisissez le &#039;&#039;&#039;Titre du groupe&#039;&#039;&#039;:&#039;&#039;Affiches du Blog&#039;&#039;&#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
# Sélectionnez le &#039;&#039;&#039;Group Parent&#039;&#039;&#039; : Enregistré&lt;br /&gt;
# Cliquez sur Enregistrer &amp;amp; Nouveau.&lt;br /&gt;
# Saisissez le &#039;&#039;&#039;Titre du groupe&#039;&#039;&#039;:&#039;&#039;Modérateur de Blog&#039;&#039;&#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
# Sélectionnez le &#039;&#039;&#039;Group Parent&#039;&#039;&#039; : Enregistré&lt;br /&gt;
# Cliquez sur Enregistrer &amp;amp; Fermer.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Créer de nouveaux utilisateurs (ou modifier des utilisateurs existants) ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Using the directions on [[S:MyLanguage/Adding_a_new_user|create your new &#039;&#039;&#039;Users&#039;&#039;&#039;]].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
# Create &#039;&#039;&#039;User(s)&#039;&#039;&#039; and assign them to the &#039;&#039;Blog Posters&#039;&#039; &#039;&#039;&#039;User Group&#039;&#039;&#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
# Create &#039;&#039;&#039;User(s)&#039;&#039;&#039; and assign them to the &#039;&#039;Blog Approvers&#039;&#039; &#039;&#039;&#039;User Group&#039;&#039;&#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;quot;REMARQUE&amp;quot; : Si vous voulez que vos &amp;quot;Utilisateurs&amp;quot; reçoivent des notifications pour une &amp;quot;Transition&amp;quot; (voir plus bas), sélectionnez Oui pour &amp;quot;Recevoir des courriels du système&amp;quot; pour chaque &amp;quot;Utilisateur&amp;quot; devant recevoir des notifications.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Créer le flux de travail ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
# Allez dans &#039;&#039;&#039;Contenu&#039;&#039;&#039; {{rarr}} &#039;&#039;&#039;Flux de Travail&#039;&#039;&#039; {{rarr}} Nouveau&lt;br /&gt;
# Entrer le &#039;&#039;&#039;Titre&#039;&#039;&#039; : &#039;&#039;Flux de Travail du Blog&#039;&#039;&#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
# Cliquez sur Enregistrer &amp;amp; fermer.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;quot;REMARQUE&#039;&#039; : Ne cochez cette case par défaut que s&#039;il s&#039;agit du Flux de travail par défaut pour TOUS les nouveaux articles créés dans les catégories &#039;&#039;sans&#039;&#039; un flux de travail attribué. Les articles existants ne seront pas modifiés.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Créer le(s) statut(s) du flux de travail ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
# A partir de la vue en liste &#039;&#039;&#039;Workflows&#039;&#039;&#039;, cliquez sur le lien &amp;quot;&#039;&#039;&#039;gérer&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039; dans la colonne &#039;&#039;Etats&#039;&#039; à côté du &#039;&#039;Flux de Travail de Blog&#039;&#039;. Vous verrez l&#039;état par défaut &amp;quot;Publié&amp;quot;.&lt;br /&gt;
# Click the &#039;&#039;&#039;Default State&#039;&#039;&#039; for Published and change the &#039;&#039;&#039;Title&#039;&#039;&#039; to: &#039;&#039;Publish new blog post&#039;&#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
# &#039;&#039;&#039;L&#039;état des articles déjà marqués comme : Publiés&#039;&#039;&#039; restera inchangé.&lt;br /&gt;
# Cliquez sur Enregistrer &amp;amp; nouveau.&lt;br /&gt;
# Enter the &#039;&#039;&#039;Title&#039;&#039;&#039;: &#039;&#039;New blog post, unpublished&#039;&#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
# Modifiez &#039;&#039;&#039;le Statut&#039;&#039;&#039; des éléments dans cet &#039;&#039;&#039;État&#039;&#039;&#039; en &amp;quot;Non publié&amp;quot;.&lt;br /&gt;
# Change the &#039;&#039;&#039;Default&#039;&#039;&#039; to Yes (Green) since this is the &#039;&#039;&#039;Default State&#039;&#039;&#039; for Articles in this Workflow.&lt;br /&gt;
# Cliquez sur Enregistrer &amp;amp; fermer.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Créer la transition pour le flux de travail ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Il y a deux façons d&#039;accéder à &#039;&#039;&#039;Transitions&#039;&#039; :&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
# Click &#039;&#039;&#039;Transitions&#039;&#039;&#039; from the sidebar while in the States list view.&lt;br /&gt;
# Cliquez sur la ligne bleue avec les flèches dans les deux directions à partir de la vue en liste &#039;&#039;&#039;Flux de Travail&#039;&#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
# Allez à &#039;&#039;&#039;Transitions&#039;&#039;&#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
# Cliquez sur Nouveau&lt;br /&gt;
# Add the &#039;&#039;&#039;Title&#039;&#039;&#039;: &#039;&#039;Approve/Publish&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
# Select the &#039;&#039;&#039;State&#039;&#039;&#039; &#039;&#039;New blog post – unpublished&#039;&#039; in the &#039;&#039;&#039;From state&#039;&#039;&#039; field drop-down.&lt;br /&gt;
# Select the &#039;&#039;&#039;State&#039;&#039;&#039; &#039;&#039;Publish new blog post&#039;&#039; in the &#039;&#039;&#039;To state&#039;&#039;&#039; field drop-down.&lt;br /&gt;
# Click Save and remain in this &#039;&#039;&#039;Transition&#039;&#039;&#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
# Click the &#039;&#039;&#039;Permissions&#039;&#039;&#039; tab of the &#039;&#039;&#039;Transition&#039;&#039;&#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
# Select the &#039;&#039;&#039;User Group&#039;&#039;&#039; &#039;&#039;Blog Approvers&#039;&#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
# For the &#039;&#039;&#039;Action&#039;&#039;&#039; &#039;&#039;&#039;Execute transition&#039;&#039;&#039;, select &#039;&#039;&#039;Allowed&#039;&#039;&#039; from the &#039;&#039;&#039;Select New Setting&#039;&#039;&#039; drop-down.&lt;br /&gt;
# Cliquez sur Enregistrer &amp;amp; fermer.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;NOTE&#039;&#039;&#039;: You can quickly access your &#039;&#039;&#039;States&#039;&#039;&#039; and &#039;&#039;&#039;Transitions&#039;&#039;&#039; from the &#039;&#039;&#039;Workflow&#039;&#039;&#039; list view. The orange circle is the States and has the quantity of States listed next to the Workflow Title. The blue line with arrows in both directions is for Transitions and shows the quantity of Transitions for the Workflow.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Assign Workflow &amp;amp; User Group Permissions to the Category ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
# Allez dans &#039;&#039;&#039;Contenu&#039;&#039;&#039; {{rarr}} &#039;&#039;&#039;Catégories&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
# Access the &#039;&#039;Blog&#039;&#039; &#039;&#039;&#039;Category&#039;&#039;&#039; (or create it if necessary) and click the &#039;&#039;&#039;Workflow&#039;&#039;&#039; tab.&lt;br /&gt;
# Click the drop-down and select &#039;&#039;Blog Workflow&#039;&#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
# Cliquez sur l&#039;onglet &#039;&#039;&#039;Droits&#039;&#039;&#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
# Click on the &#039;&#039;Blog Poster&#039;&#039; &#039;&#039;&#039;User Group&#039;&#039;&#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
# For the &#039;&#039;&#039;Action&#039;&#039;&#039; Create and Edit, change the &#039;&#039;&#039;Select New Setting&#039;&#039;&#039; drop-down to Allowed.&lt;br /&gt;
# Click on the &#039;&#039;Blog Approvers&#039;&#039; &#039;&#039;&#039;User Group&#039;&#039;&#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
# For the &#039;&#039;&#039;Action&#039;&#039;&#039; Delete, Edit, Edit State and Edit Own, change the &#039;&#039;&#039;Select New Setting&#039;&#039;&#039; drop-down to Allowed.&lt;br /&gt;
# Cliquez sur Enregistrer &amp;amp; fermer.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
For more information on ACL and assigning permissions to User Groups, see the [[S:MyLanguage/J3.x:Access_Control_List_Tutorial|ACL Tutorial]].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Paramétrer les notifications ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Notifications use the Joomla core Messaging component. It is very basic. When enabled for Workflows, it will send a message to the User associated with the Group assigned to the Transition. The message simply states that they have a message in the site. It will then be their responsibility to login and check the articles that need approval and publish them.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;To set up notifications for the Workgroup Transitions:&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
# Allez dans &#039;&#039;&#039;Extensions&#039;&#039;&#039; {{rarr}} &#039;&#039;&#039;Plug-ins&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
# Click the &#039;&#039;&#039;Table Options&#039;&#039;&#039; button and &#039;&#039;&#039;Select Type&#039;&#039;&#039; of content&lt;br /&gt;
# Click on &#039;&#039;&#039;Content – Joomla&#039;&#039;&#039; and then toggle Yes for &#039;&#039;&#039;Email on transition execution&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
# Then make sure that the &#039;&#039;&#039;Users&#039;&#039;&#039; themselves have &#039;&#039;&#039;Receive System Emails&#039;&#039;&#039; toggled to Yes in &#039;&#039;&#039;Users&#039;&#039;&#039; {{rarr}} &#039;&#039;&#039;Manage&#039;&#039;&#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== To set it up so that Users can Post and Approve from the frontend ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
# Create a &#039;&#039;&#039;Menu Item&#039;&#039;&#039; for the &#039;&#039;&#039;Menu Item Type&#039;&#039;&#039; Login so that your Blog Posters can login.&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;&#039;&#039;&#039;Menus&#039;&#039;&#039; {{rarr}} &#039;&#039;Choose or create a menu&#039;&#039; {{rarr}} New {{rarr}} &#039;&#039;&#039;Users&#039;&#039;&#039; {{rarr}} &#039;&#039;&#039;Login&#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;OR&lt;br /&gt;
# Create a module for Login so that your Blog Posters can login.&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;&#039;&#039;&#039;Extensions&#039;&#039;&#039; {{rarr}} &#039;&#039;&#039;Modules&#039;&#039;&#039; {{rarr}} New {{rarr}} &#039;&#039;&#039;Login&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
# Add a &#039;&#039;&#039;Menu Item&#039;&#039;&#039; to a Menu that displays only for the &#039;&#039;&#039;Registered User Group&#039;&#039;&#039; to Add an article&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;&#039;&#039;&#039;Menu Item Type Articles&#039;&#039;&#039; {{rarr}} &#039;&#039;&#039;Create Article&#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;&#039;&#039;&#039;NOTE&#039;&#039;&#039;: this will display for all Registered Users unless you create an Access Level for your Blog Poster User Group and select this in the Menu Item under Access.&lt;br /&gt;
# When your &#039;&#039;&#039;User&#039;&#039;&#039; logs in, they add an &#039;&#039;&#039;Article&#039;&#039;&#039;, enter the content and Save.&lt;br /&gt;
# This will trigger a notification to the Blog Approvers Users that there is a new private message on the site. It doesn’t get more specific than that. Approvers should just come to the site and approve the Article. It will also send a message to Super Admins.&lt;br /&gt;
# When the Blog Approver logs in, they can navigate to where the new article will appear. They will be able to see the unpublished article and edit it/approve it/publish it. Then they can Save &amp;amp; Close and logout.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Admin note&#039;&#039;&#039;: Super Admins can use Batch to move existing Articles to a different workflow than it is currently assigned. It won’t make a difference if the Articles are already published.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Scénario #2 ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Ajoutez ici un autre scénario pour aider les autres à voir la puissance des flux de travail. Les documents peuvent être modifiés ou ajoutés par quiconque possèdant un compte.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Related Information==&lt;br /&gt;
See also:&lt;br /&gt;
* [[S:MyLanguage/Publishing_Workflow_Implementation|Publishing Workflow Implementation]]&lt;br /&gt;
* [[S:MyLanguage/Publishing_Workflow|Publishing Workflow]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;noinclude&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[Category:Google Summer of Code 2017{{#translation:}}]]&lt;br /&gt;
[[Category:Development{{#translation:}}]]&lt;br /&gt;
[[Category:Joomla! 4.x{{#translation:}}]]&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/noinclude&amp;gt;&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Wisgar</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://docs.sandbox.joomla.org/index.php?title=Translations:Publishing_Workflow/Scenarios/54/fr&amp;diff=639447</id>
		<title>Translations:Publishing Workflow/Scenarios/54/fr</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://docs.sandbox.joomla.org/index.php?title=Translations:Publishing_Workflow/Scenarios/54/fr&amp;diff=639447"/>
		<updated>2019-10-20T13:43:48Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Wisgar: Created page with &amp;quot;Allez à &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Transitions&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;.&amp;quot;&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;Allez à &#039;&#039;&#039;Transitions&#039;&#039;&#039;.&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Wisgar</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://docs.sandbox.joomla.org/index.php?title=Publishing_Workflow/Scenarios/fr&amp;diff=639446</id>
		<title>Publishing Workflow/Scenarios/fr</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://docs.sandbox.joomla.org/index.php?title=Publishing_Workflow/Scenarios/fr&amp;diff=639446"/>
		<updated>2019-10-20T13:43:30Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Wisgar: Created page with &amp;quot;Cliquez sur la ligne bleue avec les flèches dans les deux directions à partir de la vue en liste &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Flux de Travail&amp;#039;&amp;#039;.&amp;quot;&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;&amp;lt;noinclude&amp;gt;&amp;lt;languages /&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/noinclude&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
==Implémentation des flux de travail ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
L&#039;ordre général des tâches pour créer un nouveau flux de travail est :&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
# Planifier&lt;br /&gt;
# Ajouter un nouveau &#039;&#039;&#039;Groupes d&#039;utilisateurs&#039;&#039;&#039; (facultatif)&lt;br /&gt;
# Ajouter de nouveaux &#039;&#039;&#039;Utilisateurs&#039;&#039;&#039; et les assigner aux groupes d&#039;utilisateurs appropriés (facultatif)&lt;br /&gt;
# Créer le the nouveau &amp;quot;flux de travail&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
# Créez l&#039;(es) état(s) pour ce flux de travail avec la(les) condition(s).&lt;br /&gt;
# Créer la(les) &#039;&#039;&#039;Transition(s)&#039;&#039;&#039; du flux de travail&lt;br /&gt;
# Ajoutez ou modifiez la &#039;&#039;&#039;Catégorie&#039;&#039;&#039; applicable pour ajouter le &#039;&#039;&#039;Flux de travail&#039;&#039;&#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
# Modifier les &#039;&#039;Permissions&#039;&#039;&#039; de la &#039;&#039;Catégorie&#039;&#039; de sorte que les nouveaux&#039;&#039;Groupes d&#039;utilisateurs&#039;&#039; aient les permissions de faire seulement ce qu&#039;ils sont en droit de faire&lt;br /&gt;
# Paramétrer les notifications si nécessaire&lt;br /&gt;
# Configurer l&#039;accès de connexion pour les &#039;&#039;&#039;Utilisateurs&#039;&#039;&#039; sur le frontend (ou le backend : non inclus dans ce tutoriel) (facultatif)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Planification ==&lt;br /&gt;
Planifiez ce que votre flux de travail fera. La planification est toujours la partie la plus importante. Répondez à ces questions pour vous aider à planifier :&lt;br /&gt;
* Combien de groupes d&#039;utilisateurs (même s&#039;il n&#039;y a qu&#039;un seul utilisateur dans le groupe) doivent intervenir?&lt;br /&gt;
* Combien d&#039;actions y aura-t-il dans le flux de travail?&lt;br /&gt;
* L&#039;un ou l&#039;autre des groupes aura-t-il besoin de recevoir des notifications pour prendre les mesures qui s&#039;imposent ?&lt;br /&gt;
* Les groupes effectueront-ils leurs actions à partir du frontend ou du backend ou de la combinaison des deux ?&lt;br /&gt;
* Quelles &amp;quot;Catégories&amp;quot; se verront attribuer un/ce flux de travail ?&lt;br /&gt;
* Les différentes catégories auront-elles des flux de travail différents ?&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Scénario #1 ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*Un groupe d&#039;utilisateurs ajoute des messages de blog mais ne peut pas les publier&lt;br /&gt;
*Le deuxième groupe d&#039;utilisateurs approuve les messages du blog et les publie.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Créer de nouveaux groupes d&#039;utilisateurs ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
# Allez dans &#039;&#039;&#039;Utilisateurs&#039;&#039;&#039; {{rarr}} &#039;&#039;&#039;Groupes&#039;&#039;&#039; {{rarr}} Nouveau&lt;br /&gt;
# Saisissez le &#039;&#039;&#039;Titre du groupe&#039;&#039;&#039;:&#039;&#039;Affiches du Blog&#039;&#039;&#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
# Sélectionnez le &#039;&#039;&#039;Group Parent&#039;&#039;&#039; : Enregistré&lt;br /&gt;
# Cliquez sur Enregistrer &amp;amp; Nouveau.&lt;br /&gt;
# Saisissez le &#039;&#039;&#039;Titre du groupe&#039;&#039;&#039;:&#039;&#039;Modérateur de Blog&#039;&#039;&#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
# Sélectionnez le &#039;&#039;&#039;Group Parent&#039;&#039;&#039; : Enregistré&lt;br /&gt;
# Cliquez sur Enregistrer &amp;amp; Fermer.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Créer de nouveaux utilisateurs (ou modifier des utilisateurs existants) ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Using the directions on [[S:MyLanguage/Adding_a_new_user|create your new &#039;&#039;&#039;Users&#039;&#039;&#039;]].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
# Create &#039;&#039;&#039;User(s)&#039;&#039;&#039; and assign them to the &#039;&#039;Blog Posters&#039;&#039; &#039;&#039;&#039;User Group&#039;&#039;&#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
# Create &#039;&#039;&#039;User(s)&#039;&#039;&#039; and assign them to the &#039;&#039;Blog Approvers&#039;&#039; &#039;&#039;&#039;User Group&#039;&#039;&#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;quot;REMARQUE&amp;quot; : Si vous voulez que vos &amp;quot;Utilisateurs&amp;quot; reçoivent des notifications pour une &amp;quot;Transition&amp;quot; (voir plus bas), sélectionnez Oui pour &amp;quot;Recevoir des courriels du système&amp;quot; pour chaque &amp;quot;Utilisateur&amp;quot; devant recevoir des notifications.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Créer le flux de travail ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
# Allez dans &#039;&#039;&#039;Contenu&#039;&#039;&#039; {{rarr}} &#039;&#039;&#039;Flux de Travail&#039;&#039;&#039; {{rarr}} Nouveau&lt;br /&gt;
# Entrer le &#039;&#039;&#039;Titre&#039;&#039;&#039; : &#039;&#039;Flux de Travail du Blog&#039;&#039;&#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
# Cliquez sur Enregistrer &amp;amp; fermer.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;quot;REMARQUE&#039;&#039; : Ne cochez cette case par défaut que s&#039;il s&#039;agit du Flux de travail par défaut pour TOUS les nouveaux articles créés dans les catégories &#039;&#039;sans&#039;&#039; un flux de travail attribué. Les articles existants ne seront pas modifiés.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Créer le(s) statut(s) du flux de travail ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
# A partir de la vue en liste &#039;&#039;&#039;Workflows&#039;&#039;&#039;, cliquez sur le lien &amp;quot;&#039;&#039;&#039;gérer&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039; dans la colonne &#039;&#039;Etats&#039;&#039; à côté du &#039;&#039;Flux de Travail de Blog&#039;&#039;. Vous verrez l&#039;état par défaut &amp;quot;Publié&amp;quot;.&lt;br /&gt;
# Click the &#039;&#039;&#039;Default State&#039;&#039;&#039; for Published and change the &#039;&#039;&#039;Title&#039;&#039;&#039; to: &#039;&#039;Publish new blog post&#039;&#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
# &#039;&#039;&#039;L&#039;état des articles déjà marqués comme : Publiés&#039;&#039;&#039; restera inchangé.&lt;br /&gt;
# Cliquez sur Enregistrer &amp;amp; nouveau.&lt;br /&gt;
# Enter the &#039;&#039;&#039;Title&#039;&#039;&#039;: &#039;&#039;New blog post, unpublished&#039;&#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
# Modifiez &#039;&#039;&#039;le Statut&#039;&#039;&#039; des éléments dans cet &#039;&#039;&#039;État&#039;&#039;&#039; en &amp;quot;Non publié&amp;quot;.&lt;br /&gt;
# Change the &#039;&#039;&#039;Default&#039;&#039;&#039; to Yes (Green) since this is the &#039;&#039;&#039;Default State&#039;&#039;&#039; for Articles in this Workflow.&lt;br /&gt;
# Cliquez sur Enregistrer &amp;amp; fermer.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Créer la transition pour le flux de travail ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Il y a deux façons d&#039;accéder à &#039;&#039;&#039;Transitions&#039;&#039; :&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
# Click &#039;&#039;&#039;Transitions&#039;&#039;&#039; from the sidebar while in the States list view.&lt;br /&gt;
# Cliquez sur la ligne bleue avec les flèches dans les deux directions à partir de la vue en liste &#039;&#039;&#039;Flux de Travail&#039;&#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
# Go to &#039;&#039;&#039;Transitions&#039;&#039;&#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
# Cliquez sur Nouveau&lt;br /&gt;
# Add the &#039;&#039;&#039;Title&#039;&#039;&#039;: &#039;&#039;Approve/Publish&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
# Select the &#039;&#039;&#039;State&#039;&#039;&#039; &#039;&#039;New blog post – unpublished&#039;&#039; in the &#039;&#039;&#039;From state&#039;&#039;&#039; field drop-down.&lt;br /&gt;
# Select the &#039;&#039;&#039;State&#039;&#039;&#039; &#039;&#039;Publish new blog post&#039;&#039; in the &#039;&#039;&#039;To state&#039;&#039;&#039; field drop-down.&lt;br /&gt;
# Click Save and remain in this &#039;&#039;&#039;Transition&#039;&#039;&#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
# Click the &#039;&#039;&#039;Permissions&#039;&#039;&#039; tab of the &#039;&#039;&#039;Transition&#039;&#039;&#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
# Select the &#039;&#039;&#039;User Group&#039;&#039;&#039; &#039;&#039;Blog Approvers&#039;&#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
# For the &#039;&#039;&#039;Action&#039;&#039;&#039; &#039;&#039;&#039;Execute transition&#039;&#039;&#039;, select &#039;&#039;&#039;Allowed&#039;&#039;&#039; from the &#039;&#039;&#039;Select New Setting&#039;&#039;&#039; drop-down.&lt;br /&gt;
# Cliquez sur Enregistrer &amp;amp; fermer.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;NOTE&#039;&#039;&#039;: You can quickly access your &#039;&#039;&#039;States&#039;&#039;&#039; and &#039;&#039;&#039;Transitions&#039;&#039;&#039; from the &#039;&#039;&#039;Workflow&#039;&#039;&#039; list view. The orange circle is the States and has the quantity of States listed next to the Workflow Title. The blue line with arrows in both directions is for Transitions and shows the quantity of Transitions for the Workflow.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Assign Workflow &amp;amp; User Group Permissions to the Category ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
# Allez dans &#039;&#039;&#039;Contenu&#039;&#039;&#039; {{rarr}} &#039;&#039;&#039;Catégories&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
# Access the &#039;&#039;Blog&#039;&#039; &#039;&#039;&#039;Category&#039;&#039;&#039; (or create it if necessary) and click the &#039;&#039;&#039;Workflow&#039;&#039;&#039; tab.&lt;br /&gt;
# Click the drop-down and select &#039;&#039;Blog Workflow&#039;&#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
# Cliquez sur l&#039;onglet &#039;&#039;&#039;Droits&#039;&#039;&#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
# Click on the &#039;&#039;Blog Poster&#039;&#039; &#039;&#039;&#039;User Group&#039;&#039;&#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
# For the &#039;&#039;&#039;Action&#039;&#039;&#039; Create and Edit, change the &#039;&#039;&#039;Select New Setting&#039;&#039;&#039; drop-down to Allowed.&lt;br /&gt;
# Click on the &#039;&#039;Blog Approvers&#039;&#039; &#039;&#039;&#039;User Group&#039;&#039;&#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
# For the &#039;&#039;&#039;Action&#039;&#039;&#039; Delete, Edit, Edit State and Edit Own, change the &#039;&#039;&#039;Select New Setting&#039;&#039;&#039; drop-down to Allowed.&lt;br /&gt;
# Cliquez sur Enregistrer &amp;amp; fermer.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
For more information on ACL and assigning permissions to User Groups, see the [[S:MyLanguage/J3.x:Access_Control_List_Tutorial|ACL Tutorial]].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Paramétrer les notifications ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Notifications use the Joomla core Messaging component. It is very basic. When enabled for Workflows, it will send a message to the User associated with the Group assigned to the Transition. The message simply states that they have a message in the site. It will then be their responsibility to login and check the articles that need approval and publish them.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;To set up notifications for the Workgroup Transitions:&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
# Allez dans &#039;&#039;&#039;Extensions&#039;&#039;&#039; {{rarr}} &#039;&#039;&#039;Plug-ins&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
# Click the &#039;&#039;&#039;Table Options&#039;&#039;&#039; button and &#039;&#039;&#039;Select Type&#039;&#039;&#039; of content&lt;br /&gt;
# Click on &#039;&#039;&#039;Content – Joomla&#039;&#039;&#039; and then toggle Yes for &#039;&#039;&#039;Email on transition execution&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
# Then make sure that the &#039;&#039;&#039;Users&#039;&#039;&#039; themselves have &#039;&#039;&#039;Receive System Emails&#039;&#039;&#039; toggled to Yes in &#039;&#039;&#039;Users&#039;&#039;&#039; {{rarr}} &#039;&#039;&#039;Manage&#039;&#039;&#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== To set it up so that Users can Post and Approve from the frontend ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
# Create a &#039;&#039;&#039;Menu Item&#039;&#039;&#039; for the &#039;&#039;&#039;Menu Item Type&#039;&#039;&#039; Login so that your Blog Posters can login.&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;&#039;&#039;&#039;Menus&#039;&#039;&#039; {{rarr}} &#039;&#039;Choose or create a menu&#039;&#039; {{rarr}} New {{rarr}} &#039;&#039;&#039;Users&#039;&#039;&#039; {{rarr}} &#039;&#039;&#039;Login&#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;OR&lt;br /&gt;
# Create a module for Login so that your Blog Posters can login.&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;&#039;&#039;&#039;Extensions&#039;&#039;&#039; {{rarr}} &#039;&#039;&#039;Modules&#039;&#039;&#039; {{rarr}} New {{rarr}} &#039;&#039;&#039;Login&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
# Add a &#039;&#039;&#039;Menu Item&#039;&#039;&#039; to a Menu that displays only for the &#039;&#039;&#039;Registered User Group&#039;&#039;&#039; to Add an article&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;&#039;&#039;&#039;Menu Item Type Articles&#039;&#039;&#039; {{rarr}} &#039;&#039;&#039;Create Article&#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;&#039;&#039;&#039;NOTE&#039;&#039;&#039;: this will display for all Registered Users unless you create an Access Level for your Blog Poster User Group and select this in the Menu Item under Access.&lt;br /&gt;
# When your &#039;&#039;&#039;User&#039;&#039;&#039; logs in, they add an &#039;&#039;&#039;Article&#039;&#039;&#039;, enter the content and Save.&lt;br /&gt;
# This will trigger a notification to the Blog Approvers Users that there is a new private message on the site. It doesn’t get more specific than that. Approvers should just come to the site and approve the Article. It will also send a message to Super Admins.&lt;br /&gt;
# When the Blog Approver logs in, they can navigate to where the new article will appear. They will be able to see the unpublished article and edit it/approve it/publish it. Then they can Save &amp;amp; Close and logout.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Admin note&#039;&#039;&#039;: Super Admins can use Batch to move existing Articles to a different workflow than it is currently assigned. It won’t make a difference if the Articles are already published.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Scénario #2 ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Ajoutez ici un autre scénario pour aider les autres à voir la puissance des flux de travail. Les documents peuvent être modifiés ou ajoutés par quiconque possèdant un compte.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Related Information==&lt;br /&gt;
See also:&lt;br /&gt;
* [[S:MyLanguage/Publishing_Workflow_Implementation|Publishing Workflow Implementation]]&lt;br /&gt;
* [[S:MyLanguage/Publishing_Workflow|Publishing Workflow]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;noinclude&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[Category:Google Summer of Code 2017{{#translation:}}]]&lt;br /&gt;
[[Category:Development{{#translation:}}]]&lt;br /&gt;
[[Category:Joomla! 4.x{{#translation:}}]]&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/noinclude&amp;gt;&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Wisgar</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://docs.sandbox.joomla.org/index.php?title=Translations:Publishing_Workflow/Scenarios/53/fr&amp;diff=639445</id>
		<title>Translations:Publishing Workflow/Scenarios/53/fr</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://docs.sandbox.joomla.org/index.php?title=Translations:Publishing_Workflow/Scenarios/53/fr&amp;diff=639445"/>
		<updated>2019-10-20T13:43:29Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Wisgar: Created page with &amp;quot;Cliquez sur la ligne bleue avec les flèches dans les deux directions à partir de la vue en liste &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Flux de Travail&amp;#039;&amp;#039;.&amp;quot;&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;Cliquez sur la ligne bleue avec les flèches dans les deux directions à partir de la vue en liste &#039;&#039;&#039;Flux de Travail&#039;&#039;.&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Wisgar</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://docs.sandbox.joomla.org/index.php?title=Publishing_Workflow/Scenarios/fr&amp;diff=639444</id>
		<title>Publishing Workflow/Scenarios/fr</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://docs.sandbox.joomla.org/index.php?title=Publishing_Workflow/Scenarios/fr&amp;diff=639444"/>
		<updated>2019-10-20T13:42:34Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Wisgar: Created page with &amp;quot;Il y a deux façons d&amp;#039;accéder à &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Transitions&amp;#039;&amp;#039; :&amp;quot;&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;&amp;lt;noinclude&amp;gt;&amp;lt;languages /&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/noinclude&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
==Implémentation des flux de travail ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
L&#039;ordre général des tâches pour créer un nouveau flux de travail est :&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
# Planifier&lt;br /&gt;
# Ajouter un nouveau &#039;&#039;&#039;Groupes d&#039;utilisateurs&#039;&#039;&#039; (facultatif)&lt;br /&gt;
# Ajouter de nouveaux &#039;&#039;&#039;Utilisateurs&#039;&#039;&#039; et les assigner aux groupes d&#039;utilisateurs appropriés (facultatif)&lt;br /&gt;
# Créer le the nouveau &amp;quot;flux de travail&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
# Créez l&#039;(es) état(s) pour ce flux de travail avec la(les) condition(s).&lt;br /&gt;
# Créer la(les) &#039;&#039;&#039;Transition(s)&#039;&#039;&#039; du flux de travail&lt;br /&gt;
# Ajoutez ou modifiez la &#039;&#039;&#039;Catégorie&#039;&#039;&#039; applicable pour ajouter le &#039;&#039;&#039;Flux de travail&#039;&#039;&#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
# Modifier les &#039;&#039;Permissions&#039;&#039;&#039; de la &#039;&#039;Catégorie&#039;&#039; de sorte que les nouveaux&#039;&#039;Groupes d&#039;utilisateurs&#039;&#039; aient les permissions de faire seulement ce qu&#039;ils sont en droit de faire&lt;br /&gt;
# Paramétrer les notifications si nécessaire&lt;br /&gt;
# Configurer l&#039;accès de connexion pour les &#039;&#039;&#039;Utilisateurs&#039;&#039;&#039; sur le frontend (ou le backend : non inclus dans ce tutoriel) (facultatif)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Planification ==&lt;br /&gt;
Planifiez ce que votre flux de travail fera. La planification est toujours la partie la plus importante. Répondez à ces questions pour vous aider à planifier :&lt;br /&gt;
* Combien de groupes d&#039;utilisateurs (même s&#039;il n&#039;y a qu&#039;un seul utilisateur dans le groupe) doivent intervenir?&lt;br /&gt;
* Combien d&#039;actions y aura-t-il dans le flux de travail?&lt;br /&gt;
* L&#039;un ou l&#039;autre des groupes aura-t-il besoin de recevoir des notifications pour prendre les mesures qui s&#039;imposent ?&lt;br /&gt;
* Les groupes effectueront-ils leurs actions à partir du frontend ou du backend ou de la combinaison des deux ?&lt;br /&gt;
* Quelles &amp;quot;Catégories&amp;quot; se verront attribuer un/ce flux de travail ?&lt;br /&gt;
* Les différentes catégories auront-elles des flux de travail différents ?&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Scénario #1 ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*Un groupe d&#039;utilisateurs ajoute des messages de blog mais ne peut pas les publier&lt;br /&gt;
*Le deuxième groupe d&#039;utilisateurs approuve les messages du blog et les publie.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Créer de nouveaux groupes d&#039;utilisateurs ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
# Allez dans &#039;&#039;&#039;Utilisateurs&#039;&#039;&#039; {{rarr}} &#039;&#039;&#039;Groupes&#039;&#039;&#039; {{rarr}} Nouveau&lt;br /&gt;
# Saisissez le &#039;&#039;&#039;Titre du groupe&#039;&#039;&#039;:&#039;&#039;Affiches du Blog&#039;&#039;&#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
# Sélectionnez le &#039;&#039;&#039;Group Parent&#039;&#039;&#039; : Enregistré&lt;br /&gt;
# Cliquez sur Enregistrer &amp;amp; Nouveau.&lt;br /&gt;
# Saisissez le &#039;&#039;&#039;Titre du groupe&#039;&#039;&#039;:&#039;&#039;Modérateur de Blog&#039;&#039;&#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
# Sélectionnez le &#039;&#039;&#039;Group Parent&#039;&#039;&#039; : Enregistré&lt;br /&gt;
# Cliquez sur Enregistrer &amp;amp; Fermer.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Créer de nouveaux utilisateurs (ou modifier des utilisateurs existants) ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Using the directions on [[S:MyLanguage/Adding_a_new_user|create your new &#039;&#039;&#039;Users&#039;&#039;&#039;]].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
# Create &#039;&#039;&#039;User(s)&#039;&#039;&#039; and assign them to the &#039;&#039;Blog Posters&#039;&#039; &#039;&#039;&#039;User Group&#039;&#039;&#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
# Create &#039;&#039;&#039;User(s)&#039;&#039;&#039; and assign them to the &#039;&#039;Blog Approvers&#039;&#039; &#039;&#039;&#039;User Group&#039;&#039;&#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;quot;REMARQUE&amp;quot; : Si vous voulez que vos &amp;quot;Utilisateurs&amp;quot; reçoivent des notifications pour une &amp;quot;Transition&amp;quot; (voir plus bas), sélectionnez Oui pour &amp;quot;Recevoir des courriels du système&amp;quot; pour chaque &amp;quot;Utilisateur&amp;quot; devant recevoir des notifications.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Créer le flux de travail ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
# Allez dans &#039;&#039;&#039;Contenu&#039;&#039;&#039; {{rarr}} &#039;&#039;&#039;Flux de Travail&#039;&#039;&#039; {{rarr}} Nouveau&lt;br /&gt;
# Entrer le &#039;&#039;&#039;Titre&#039;&#039;&#039; : &#039;&#039;Flux de Travail du Blog&#039;&#039;&#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
# Cliquez sur Enregistrer &amp;amp; fermer.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;quot;REMARQUE&#039;&#039; : Ne cochez cette case par défaut que s&#039;il s&#039;agit du Flux de travail par défaut pour TOUS les nouveaux articles créés dans les catégories &#039;&#039;sans&#039;&#039; un flux de travail attribué. Les articles existants ne seront pas modifiés.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Créer le(s) statut(s) du flux de travail ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
# A partir de la vue en liste &#039;&#039;&#039;Workflows&#039;&#039;&#039;, cliquez sur le lien &amp;quot;&#039;&#039;&#039;gérer&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039; dans la colonne &#039;&#039;Etats&#039;&#039; à côté du &#039;&#039;Flux de Travail de Blog&#039;&#039;. Vous verrez l&#039;état par défaut &amp;quot;Publié&amp;quot;.&lt;br /&gt;
# Click the &#039;&#039;&#039;Default State&#039;&#039;&#039; for Published and change the &#039;&#039;&#039;Title&#039;&#039;&#039; to: &#039;&#039;Publish new blog post&#039;&#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
# &#039;&#039;&#039;L&#039;état des articles déjà marqués comme : Publiés&#039;&#039;&#039; restera inchangé.&lt;br /&gt;
# Cliquez sur Enregistrer &amp;amp; nouveau.&lt;br /&gt;
# Enter the &#039;&#039;&#039;Title&#039;&#039;&#039;: &#039;&#039;New blog post, unpublished&#039;&#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
# Modifiez &#039;&#039;&#039;le Statut&#039;&#039;&#039; des éléments dans cet &#039;&#039;&#039;État&#039;&#039;&#039; en &amp;quot;Non publié&amp;quot;.&lt;br /&gt;
# Change the &#039;&#039;&#039;Default&#039;&#039;&#039; to Yes (Green) since this is the &#039;&#039;&#039;Default State&#039;&#039;&#039; for Articles in this Workflow.&lt;br /&gt;
# Cliquez sur Enregistrer &amp;amp; fermer.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Créer la transition pour le flux de travail ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Il y a deux façons d&#039;accéder à &#039;&#039;&#039;Transitions&#039;&#039; :&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
# Click &#039;&#039;&#039;Transitions&#039;&#039;&#039; from the sidebar while in the States list view.&lt;br /&gt;
# Click the blue line with arrows in both directions from the &#039;&#039;&#039;Workflow&#039;&#039;&#039; list view.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
# Go to &#039;&#039;&#039;Transitions&#039;&#039;&#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
# Cliquez sur Nouveau&lt;br /&gt;
# Add the &#039;&#039;&#039;Title&#039;&#039;&#039;: &#039;&#039;Approve/Publish&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
# Select the &#039;&#039;&#039;State&#039;&#039;&#039; &#039;&#039;New blog post – unpublished&#039;&#039; in the &#039;&#039;&#039;From state&#039;&#039;&#039; field drop-down.&lt;br /&gt;
# Select the &#039;&#039;&#039;State&#039;&#039;&#039; &#039;&#039;Publish new blog post&#039;&#039; in the &#039;&#039;&#039;To state&#039;&#039;&#039; field drop-down.&lt;br /&gt;
# Click Save and remain in this &#039;&#039;&#039;Transition&#039;&#039;&#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
# Click the &#039;&#039;&#039;Permissions&#039;&#039;&#039; tab of the &#039;&#039;&#039;Transition&#039;&#039;&#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
# Select the &#039;&#039;&#039;User Group&#039;&#039;&#039; &#039;&#039;Blog Approvers&#039;&#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
# For the &#039;&#039;&#039;Action&#039;&#039;&#039; &#039;&#039;&#039;Execute transition&#039;&#039;&#039;, select &#039;&#039;&#039;Allowed&#039;&#039;&#039; from the &#039;&#039;&#039;Select New Setting&#039;&#039;&#039; drop-down.&lt;br /&gt;
# Cliquez sur Enregistrer &amp;amp; fermer.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;NOTE&#039;&#039;&#039;: You can quickly access your &#039;&#039;&#039;States&#039;&#039;&#039; and &#039;&#039;&#039;Transitions&#039;&#039;&#039; from the &#039;&#039;&#039;Workflow&#039;&#039;&#039; list view. The orange circle is the States and has the quantity of States listed next to the Workflow Title. The blue line with arrows in both directions is for Transitions and shows the quantity of Transitions for the Workflow.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Assign Workflow &amp;amp; User Group Permissions to the Category ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
# Allez dans &#039;&#039;&#039;Contenu&#039;&#039;&#039; {{rarr}} &#039;&#039;&#039;Catégories&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
# Access the &#039;&#039;Blog&#039;&#039; &#039;&#039;&#039;Category&#039;&#039;&#039; (or create it if necessary) and click the &#039;&#039;&#039;Workflow&#039;&#039;&#039; tab.&lt;br /&gt;
# Click the drop-down and select &#039;&#039;Blog Workflow&#039;&#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
# Cliquez sur l&#039;onglet &#039;&#039;&#039;Droits&#039;&#039;&#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
# Click on the &#039;&#039;Blog Poster&#039;&#039; &#039;&#039;&#039;User Group&#039;&#039;&#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
# For the &#039;&#039;&#039;Action&#039;&#039;&#039; Create and Edit, change the &#039;&#039;&#039;Select New Setting&#039;&#039;&#039; drop-down to Allowed.&lt;br /&gt;
# Click on the &#039;&#039;Blog Approvers&#039;&#039; &#039;&#039;&#039;User Group&#039;&#039;&#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
# For the &#039;&#039;&#039;Action&#039;&#039;&#039; Delete, Edit, Edit State and Edit Own, change the &#039;&#039;&#039;Select New Setting&#039;&#039;&#039; drop-down to Allowed.&lt;br /&gt;
# Cliquez sur Enregistrer &amp;amp; fermer.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
For more information on ACL and assigning permissions to User Groups, see the [[S:MyLanguage/J3.x:Access_Control_List_Tutorial|ACL Tutorial]].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Paramétrer les notifications ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Notifications use the Joomla core Messaging component. It is very basic. When enabled for Workflows, it will send a message to the User associated with the Group assigned to the Transition. The message simply states that they have a message in the site. It will then be their responsibility to login and check the articles that need approval and publish them.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;To set up notifications for the Workgroup Transitions:&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
# Allez dans &#039;&#039;&#039;Extensions&#039;&#039;&#039; {{rarr}} &#039;&#039;&#039;Plug-ins&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
# Click the &#039;&#039;&#039;Table Options&#039;&#039;&#039; button and &#039;&#039;&#039;Select Type&#039;&#039;&#039; of content&lt;br /&gt;
# Click on &#039;&#039;&#039;Content – Joomla&#039;&#039;&#039; and then toggle Yes for &#039;&#039;&#039;Email on transition execution&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
# Then make sure that the &#039;&#039;&#039;Users&#039;&#039;&#039; themselves have &#039;&#039;&#039;Receive System Emails&#039;&#039;&#039; toggled to Yes in &#039;&#039;&#039;Users&#039;&#039;&#039; {{rarr}} &#039;&#039;&#039;Manage&#039;&#039;&#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== To set it up so that Users can Post and Approve from the frontend ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
# Create a &#039;&#039;&#039;Menu Item&#039;&#039;&#039; for the &#039;&#039;&#039;Menu Item Type&#039;&#039;&#039; Login so that your Blog Posters can login.&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;&#039;&#039;&#039;Menus&#039;&#039;&#039; {{rarr}} &#039;&#039;Choose or create a menu&#039;&#039; {{rarr}} New {{rarr}} &#039;&#039;&#039;Users&#039;&#039;&#039; {{rarr}} &#039;&#039;&#039;Login&#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;OR&lt;br /&gt;
# Create a module for Login so that your Blog Posters can login.&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;&#039;&#039;&#039;Extensions&#039;&#039;&#039; {{rarr}} &#039;&#039;&#039;Modules&#039;&#039;&#039; {{rarr}} New {{rarr}} &#039;&#039;&#039;Login&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
# Add a &#039;&#039;&#039;Menu Item&#039;&#039;&#039; to a Menu that displays only for the &#039;&#039;&#039;Registered User Group&#039;&#039;&#039; to Add an article&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;&#039;&#039;&#039;Menu Item Type Articles&#039;&#039;&#039; {{rarr}} &#039;&#039;&#039;Create Article&#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;&#039;&#039;&#039;NOTE&#039;&#039;&#039;: this will display for all Registered Users unless you create an Access Level for your Blog Poster User Group and select this in the Menu Item under Access.&lt;br /&gt;
# When your &#039;&#039;&#039;User&#039;&#039;&#039; logs in, they add an &#039;&#039;&#039;Article&#039;&#039;&#039;, enter the content and Save.&lt;br /&gt;
# This will trigger a notification to the Blog Approvers Users that there is a new private message on the site. It doesn’t get more specific than that. Approvers should just come to the site and approve the Article. It will also send a message to Super Admins.&lt;br /&gt;
# When the Blog Approver logs in, they can navigate to where the new article will appear. They will be able to see the unpublished article and edit it/approve it/publish it. Then they can Save &amp;amp; Close and logout.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Admin note&#039;&#039;&#039;: Super Admins can use Batch to move existing Articles to a different workflow than it is currently assigned. It won’t make a difference if the Articles are already published.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Scénario #2 ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Ajoutez ici un autre scénario pour aider les autres à voir la puissance des flux de travail. Les documents peuvent être modifiés ou ajoutés par quiconque possèdant un compte.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Related Information==&lt;br /&gt;
See also:&lt;br /&gt;
* [[S:MyLanguage/Publishing_Workflow_Implementation|Publishing Workflow Implementation]]&lt;br /&gt;
* [[S:MyLanguage/Publishing_Workflow|Publishing Workflow]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;noinclude&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[Category:Google Summer of Code 2017{{#translation:}}]]&lt;br /&gt;
[[Category:Development{{#translation:}}]]&lt;br /&gt;
[[Category:Joomla! 4.x{{#translation:}}]]&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/noinclude&amp;gt;&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Wisgar</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://docs.sandbox.joomla.org/index.php?title=Translations:Publishing_Workflow/Scenarios/51/fr&amp;diff=639443</id>
		<title>Translations:Publishing Workflow/Scenarios/51/fr</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://docs.sandbox.joomla.org/index.php?title=Translations:Publishing_Workflow/Scenarios/51/fr&amp;diff=639443"/>
		<updated>2019-10-20T13:42:33Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Wisgar: Created page with &amp;quot;Il y a deux façons d&amp;#039;accéder à &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Transitions&amp;#039;&amp;#039; :&amp;quot;&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;Il y a deux façons d&#039;accéder à &#039;&#039;&#039;Transitions&#039;&#039; :&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Wisgar</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://docs.sandbox.joomla.org/index.php?title=Publishing_Workflow/Scenarios/fr&amp;diff=639442</id>
		<title>Publishing Workflow/Scenarios/fr</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://docs.sandbox.joomla.org/index.php?title=Publishing_Workflow/Scenarios/fr&amp;diff=639442"/>
		<updated>2019-10-20T13:42:03Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Wisgar: Created page with &amp;quot;Modifiez &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;le Statut&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; des éléments dans cet &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;État&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; en &amp;quot;Non publié&amp;quot;.&amp;quot;&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;&amp;lt;noinclude&amp;gt;&amp;lt;languages /&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/noinclude&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
==Implémentation des flux de travail ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
L&#039;ordre général des tâches pour créer un nouveau flux de travail est :&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
# Planifier&lt;br /&gt;
# Ajouter un nouveau &#039;&#039;&#039;Groupes d&#039;utilisateurs&#039;&#039;&#039; (facultatif)&lt;br /&gt;
# Ajouter de nouveaux &#039;&#039;&#039;Utilisateurs&#039;&#039;&#039; et les assigner aux groupes d&#039;utilisateurs appropriés (facultatif)&lt;br /&gt;
# Créer le the nouveau &amp;quot;flux de travail&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
# Créez l&#039;(es) état(s) pour ce flux de travail avec la(les) condition(s).&lt;br /&gt;
# Créer la(les) &#039;&#039;&#039;Transition(s)&#039;&#039;&#039; du flux de travail&lt;br /&gt;
# Ajoutez ou modifiez la &#039;&#039;&#039;Catégorie&#039;&#039;&#039; applicable pour ajouter le &#039;&#039;&#039;Flux de travail&#039;&#039;&#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
# Modifier les &#039;&#039;Permissions&#039;&#039;&#039; de la &#039;&#039;Catégorie&#039;&#039; de sorte que les nouveaux&#039;&#039;Groupes d&#039;utilisateurs&#039;&#039; aient les permissions de faire seulement ce qu&#039;ils sont en droit de faire&lt;br /&gt;
# Paramétrer les notifications si nécessaire&lt;br /&gt;
# Configurer l&#039;accès de connexion pour les &#039;&#039;&#039;Utilisateurs&#039;&#039;&#039; sur le frontend (ou le backend : non inclus dans ce tutoriel) (facultatif)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Planification ==&lt;br /&gt;
Planifiez ce que votre flux de travail fera. La planification est toujours la partie la plus importante. Répondez à ces questions pour vous aider à planifier :&lt;br /&gt;
* Combien de groupes d&#039;utilisateurs (même s&#039;il n&#039;y a qu&#039;un seul utilisateur dans le groupe) doivent intervenir?&lt;br /&gt;
* Combien d&#039;actions y aura-t-il dans le flux de travail?&lt;br /&gt;
* L&#039;un ou l&#039;autre des groupes aura-t-il besoin de recevoir des notifications pour prendre les mesures qui s&#039;imposent ?&lt;br /&gt;
* Les groupes effectueront-ils leurs actions à partir du frontend ou du backend ou de la combinaison des deux ?&lt;br /&gt;
* Quelles &amp;quot;Catégories&amp;quot; se verront attribuer un/ce flux de travail ?&lt;br /&gt;
* Les différentes catégories auront-elles des flux de travail différents ?&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Scénario #1 ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*Un groupe d&#039;utilisateurs ajoute des messages de blog mais ne peut pas les publier&lt;br /&gt;
*Le deuxième groupe d&#039;utilisateurs approuve les messages du blog et les publie.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Créer de nouveaux groupes d&#039;utilisateurs ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
# Allez dans &#039;&#039;&#039;Utilisateurs&#039;&#039;&#039; {{rarr}} &#039;&#039;&#039;Groupes&#039;&#039;&#039; {{rarr}} Nouveau&lt;br /&gt;
# Saisissez le &#039;&#039;&#039;Titre du groupe&#039;&#039;&#039;:&#039;&#039;Affiches du Blog&#039;&#039;&#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
# Sélectionnez le &#039;&#039;&#039;Group Parent&#039;&#039;&#039; : Enregistré&lt;br /&gt;
# Cliquez sur Enregistrer &amp;amp; Nouveau.&lt;br /&gt;
# Saisissez le &#039;&#039;&#039;Titre du groupe&#039;&#039;&#039;:&#039;&#039;Modérateur de Blog&#039;&#039;&#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
# Sélectionnez le &#039;&#039;&#039;Group Parent&#039;&#039;&#039; : Enregistré&lt;br /&gt;
# Cliquez sur Enregistrer &amp;amp; Fermer.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Créer de nouveaux utilisateurs (ou modifier des utilisateurs existants) ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Using the directions on [[S:MyLanguage/Adding_a_new_user|create your new &#039;&#039;&#039;Users&#039;&#039;&#039;]].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
# Create &#039;&#039;&#039;User(s)&#039;&#039;&#039; and assign them to the &#039;&#039;Blog Posters&#039;&#039; &#039;&#039;&#039;User Group&#039;&#039;&#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
# Create &#039;&#039;&#039;User(s)&#039;&#039;&#039; and assign them to the &#039;&#039;Blog Approvers&#039;&#039; &#039;&#039;&#039;User Group&#039;&#039;&#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;quot;REMARQUE&amp;quot; : Si vous voulez que vos &amp;quot;Utilisateurs&amp;quot; reçoivent des notifications pour une &amp;quot;Transition&amp;quot; (voir plus bas), sélectionnez Oui pour &amp;quot;Recevoir des courriels du système&amp;quot; pour chaque &amp;quot;Utilisateur&amp;quot; devant recevoir des notifications.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Créer le flux de travail ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
# Allez dans &#039;&#039;&#039;Contenu&#039;&#039;&#039; {{rarr}} &#039;&#039;&#039;Flux de Travail&#039;&#039;&#039; {{rarr}} Nouveau&lt;br /&gt;
# Entrer le &#039;&#039;&#039;Titre&#039;&#039;&#039; : &#039;&#039;Flux de Travail du Blog&#039;&#039;&#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
# Cliquez sur Enregistrer &amp;amp; fermer.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;quot;REMARQUE&#039;&#039; : Ne cochez cette case par défaut que s&#039;il s&#039;agit du Flux de travail par défaut pour TOUS les nouveaux articles créés dans les catégories &#039;&#039;sans&#039;&#039; un flux de travail attribué. Les articles existants ne seront pas modifiés.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Créer le(s) statut(s) du flux de travail ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
# A partir de la vue en liste &#039;&#039;&#039;Workflows&#039;&#039;&#039;, cliquez sur le lien &amp;quot;&#039;&#039;&#039;gérer&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039; dans la colonne &#039;&#039;Etats&#039;&#039; à côté du &#039;&#039;Flux de Travail de Blog&#039;&#039;. Vous verrez l&#039;état par défaut &amp;quot;Publié&amp;quot;.&lt;br /&gt;
# Click the &#039;&#039;&#039;Default State&#039;&#039;&#039; for Published and change the &#039;&#039;&#039;Title&#039;&#039;&#039; to: &#039;&#039;Publish new blog post&#039;&#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
# &#039;&#039;&#039;L&#039;état des articles déjà marqués comme : Publiés&#039;&#039;&#039; restera inchangé.&lt;br /&gt;
# Cliquez sur Enregistrer &amp;amp; nouveau.&lt;br /&gt;
# Enter the &#039;&#039;&#039;Title&#039;&#039;&#039;: &#039;&#039;New blog post, unpublished&#039;&#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
# Modifiez &#039;&#039;&#039;le Statut&#039;&#039;&#039; des éléments dans cet &#039;&#039;&#039;État&#039;&#039;&#039; en &amp;quot;Non publié&amp;quot;.&lt;br /&gt;
# Change the &#039;&#039;&#039;Default&#039;&#039;&#039; to Yes (Green) since this is the &#039;&#039;&#039;Default State&#039;&#039;&#039; for Articles in this Workflow.&lt;br /&gt;
# Cliquez sur Enregistrer &amp;amp; fermer.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Créer la transition pour le flux de travail ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
There are two ways to access &#039;&#039;&#039;Transitions&#039;&#039;&#039;:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
# Click &#039;&#039;&#039;Transitions&#039;&#039;&#039; from the sidebar while in the States list view.&lt;br /&gt;
# Click the blue line with arrows in both directions from the &#039;&#039;&#039;Workflow&#039;&#039;&#039; list view.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
# Go to &#039;&#039;&#039;Transitions&#039;&#039;&#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
# Cliquez sur Nouveau&lt;br /&gt;
# Add the &#039;&#039;&#039;Title&#039;&#039;&#039;: &#039;&#039;Approve/Publish&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
# Select the &#039;&#039;&#039;State&#039;&#039;&#039; &#039;&#039;New blog post – unpublished&#039;&#039; in the &#039;&#039;&#039;From state&#039;&#039;&#039; field drop-down.&lt;br /&gt;
# Select the &#039;&#039;&#039;State&#039;&#039;&#039; &#039;&#039;Publish new blog post&#039;&#039; in the &#039;&#039;&#039;To state&#039;&#039;&#039; field drop-down.&lt;br /&gt;
# Click Save and remain in this &#039;&#039;&#039;Transition&#039;&#039;&#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
# Click the &#039;&#039;&#039;Permissions&#039;&#039;&#039; tab of the &#039;&#039;&#039;Transition&#039;&#039;&#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
# Select the &#039;&#039;&#039;User Group&#039;&#039;&#039; &#039;&#039;Blog Approvers&#039;&#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
# For the &#039;&#039;&#039;Action&#039;&#039;&#039; &#039;&#039;&#039;Execute transition&#039;&#039;&#039;, select &#039;&#039;&#039;Allowed&#039;&#039;&#039; from the &#039;&#039;&#039;Select New Setting&#039;&#039;&#039; drop-down.&lt;br /&gt;
# Cliquez sur Enregistrer &amp;amp; fermer.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;NOTE&#039;&#039;&#039;: You can quickly access your &#039;&#039;&#039;States&#039;&#039;&#039; and &#039;&#039;&#039;Transitions&#039;&#039;&#039; from the &#039;&#039;&#039;Workflow&#039;&#039;&#039; list view. The orange circle is the States and has the quantity of States listed next to the Workflow Title. The blue line with arrows in both directions is for Transitions and shows the quantity of Transitions for the Workflow.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Assign Workflow &amp;amp; User Group Permissions to the Category ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
# Allez dans &#039;&#039;&#039;Contenu&#039;&#039;&#039; {{rarr}} &#039;&#039;&#039;Catégories&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
# Access the &#039;&#039;Blog&#039;&#039; &#039;&#039;&#039;Category&#039;&#039;&#039; (or create it if necessary) and click the &#039;&#039;&#039;Workflow&#039;&#039;&#039; tab.&lt;br /&gt;
# Click the drop-down and select &#039;&#039;Blog Workflow&#039;&#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
# Cliquez sur l&#039;onglet &#039;&#039;&#039;Droits&#039;&#039;&#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
# Click on the &#039;&#039;Blog Poster&#039;&#039; &#039;&#039;&#039;User Group&#039;&#039;&#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
# For the &#039;&#039;&#039;Action&#039;&#039;&#039; Create and Edit, change the &#039;&#039;&#039;Select New Setting&#039;&#039;&#039; drop-down to Allowed.&lt;br /&gt;
# Click on the &#039;&#039;Blog Approvers&#039;&#039; &#039;&#039;&#039;User Group&#039;&#039;&#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
# For the &#039;&#039;&#039;Action&#039;&#039;&#039; Delete, Edit, Edit State and Edit Own, change the &#039;&#039;&#039;Select New Setting&#039;&#039;&#039; drop-down to Allowed.&lt;br /&gt;
# Cliquez sur Enregistrer &amp;amp; fermer.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
For more information on ACL and assigning permissions to User Groups, see the [[S:MyLanguage/J3.x:Access_Control_List_Tutorial|ACL Tutorial]].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Paramétrer les notifications ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Notifications use the Joomla core Messaging component. It is very basic. When enabled for Workflows, it will send a message to the User associated with the Group assigned to the Transition. The message simply states that they have a message in the site. It will then be their responsibility to login and check the articles that need approval and publish them.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;To set up notifications for the Workgroup Transitions:&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
# Allez dans &#039;&#039;&#039;Extensions&#039;&#039;&#039; {{rarr}} &#039;&#039;&#039;Plug-ins&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
# Click the &#039;&#039;&#039;Table Options&#039;&#039;&#039; button and &#039;&#039;&#039;Select Type&#039;&#039;&#039; of content&lt;br /&gt;
# Click on &#039;&#039;&#039;Content – Joomla&#039;&#039;&#039; and then toggle Yes for &#039;&#039;&#039;Email on transition execution&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
# Then make sure that the &#039;&#039;&#039;Users&#039;&#039;&#039; themselves have &#039;&#039;&#039;Receive System Emails&#039;&#039;&#039; toggled to Yes in &#039;&#039;&#039;Users&#039;&#039;&#039; {{rarr}} &#039;&#039;&#039;Manage&#039;&#039;&#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== To set it up so that Users can Post and Approve from the frontend ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
# Create a &#039;&#039;&#039;Menu Item&#039;&#039;&#039; for the &#039;&#039;&#039;Menu Item Type&#039;&#039;&#039; Login so that your Blog Posters can login.&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;&#039;&#039;&#039;Menus&#039;&#039;&#039; {{rarr}} &#039;&#039;Choose or create a menu&#039;&#039; {{rarr}} New {{rarr}} &#039;&#039;&#039;Users&#039;&#039;&#039; {{rarr}} &#039;&#039;&#039;Login&#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;OR&lt;br /&gt;
# Create a module for Login so that your Blog Posters can login.&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;&#039;&#039;&#039;Extensions&#039;&#039;&#039; {{rarr}} &#039;&#039;&#039;Modules&#039;&#039;&#039; {{rarr}} New {{rarr}} &#039;&#039;&#039;Login&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
# Add a &#039;&#039;&#039;Menu Item&#039;&#039;&#039; to a Menu that displays only for the &#039;&#039;&#039;Registered User Group&#039;&#039;&#039; to Add an article&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;&#039;&#039;&#039;Menu Item Type Articles&#039;&#039;&#039; {{rarr}} &#039;&#039;&#039;Create Article&#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;&#039;&#039;&#039;NOTE&#039;&#039;&#039;: this will display for all Registered Users unless you create an Access Level for your Blog Poster User Group and select this in the Menu Item under Access.&lt;br /&gt;
# When your &#039;&#039;&#039;User&#039;&#039;&#039; logs in, they add an &#039;&#039;&#039;Article&#039;&#039;&#039;, enter the content and Save.&lt;br /&gt;
# This will trigger a notification to the Blog Approvers Users that there is a new private message on the site. It doesn’t get more specific than that. Approvers should just come to the site and approve the Article. It will also send a message to Super Admins.&lt;br /&gt;
# When the Blog Approver logs in, they can navigate to where the new article will appear. They will be able to see the unpublished article and edit it/approve it/publish it. Then they can Save &amp;amp; Close and logout.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Admin note&#039;&#039;&#039;: Super Admins can use Batch to move existing Articles to a different workflow than it is currently assigned. It won’t make a difference if the Articles are already published.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Scénario #2 ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Ajoutez ici un autre scénario pour aider les autres à voir la puissance des flux de travail. Les documents peuvent être modifiés ou ajoutés par quiconque possèdant un compte.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Related Information==&lt;br /&gt;
See also:&lt;br /&gt;
* [[S:MyLanguage/Publishing_Workflow_Implementation|Publishing Workflow Implementation]]&lt;br /&gt;
* [[S:MyLanguage/Publishing_Workflow|Publishing Workflow]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;noinclude&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[Category:Google Summer of Code 2017{{#translation:}}]]&lt;br /&gt;
[[Category:Development{{#translation:}}]]&lt;br /&gt;
[[Category:Joomla! 4.x{{#translation:}}]]&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/noinclude&amp;gt;&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Wisgar</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://docs.sandbox.joomla.org/index.php?title=Translations:Publishing_Workflow/Scenarios/47/fr&amp;diff=639441</id>
		<title>Translations:Publishing Workflow/Scenarios/47/fr</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://docs.sandbox.joomla.org/index.php?title=Translations:Publishing_Workflow/Scenarios/47/fr&amp;diff=639441"/>
		<updated>2019-10-20T13:42:03Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Wisgar: Created page with &amp;quot;Modifiez &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;le Statut&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; des éléments dans cet &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;État&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; en &amp;quot;Non publié&amp;quot;.&amp;quot;&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;Modifiez &#039;&#039;&#039;le Statut&#039;&#039;&#039; des éléments dans cet &#039;&#039;&#039;État&#039;&#039;&#039; en &amp;quot;Non publié&amp;quot;.&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Wisgar</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://docs.sandbox.joomla.org/index.php?title=Publishing_Workflow/Scenarios/fr&amp;diff=639440</id>
		<title>Publishing Workflow/Scenarios/fr</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://docs.sandbox.joomla.org/index.php?title=Publishing_Workflow/Scenarios/fr&amp;diff=639440"/>
		<updated>2019-10-20T13:39:51Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Wisgar: Created page with &amp;quot;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;L&amp;#039;état des articles déjà marqués comme : Publiés&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; restera inchangé.&amp;quot;&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;&amp;lt;noinclude&amp;gt;&amp;lt;languages /&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/noinclude&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
==Implémentation des flux de travail ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
L&#039;ordre général des tâches pour créer un nouveau flux de travail est :&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
# Planifier&lt;br /&gt;
# Ajouter un nouveau &#039;&#039;&#039;Groupes d&#039;utilisateurs&#039;&#039;&#039; (facultatif)&lt;br /&gt;
# Ajouter de nouveaux &#039;&#039;&#039;Utilisateurs&#039;&#039;&#039; et les assigner aux groupes d&#039;utilisateurs appropriés (facultatif)&lt;br /&gt;
# Créer le the nouveau &amp;quot;flux de travail&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
# Créez l&#039;(es) état(s) pour ce flux de travail avec la(les) condition(s).&lt;br /&gt;
# Créer la(les) &#039;&#039;&#039;Transition(s)&#039;&#039;&#039; du flux de travail&lt;br /&gt;
# Ajoutez ou modifiez la &#039;&#039;&#039;Catégorie&#039;&#039;&#039; applicable pour ajouter le &#039;&#039;&#039;Flux de travail&#039;&#039;&#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
# Modifier les &#039;&#039;Permissions&#039;&#039;&#039; de la &#039;&#039;Catégorie&#039;&#039; de sorte que les nouveaux&#039;&#039;Groupes d&#039;utilisateurs&#039;&#039; aient les permissions de faire seulement ce qu&#039;ils sont en droit de faire&lt;br /&gt;
# Paramétrer les notifications si nécessaire&lt;br /&gt;
# Configurer l&#039;accès de connexion pour les &#039;&#039;&#039;Utilisateurs&#039;&#039;&#039; sur le frontend (ou le backend : non inclus dans ce tutoriel) (facultatif)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Planification ==&lt;br /&gt;
Planifiez ce que votre flux de travail fera. La planification est toujours la partie la plus importante. Répondez à ces questions pour vous aider à planifier :&lt;br /&gt;
* Combien de groupes d&#039;utilisateurs (même s&#039;il n&#039;y a qu&#039;un seul utilisateur dans le groupe) doivent intervenir?&lt;br /&gt;
* Combien d&#039;actions y aura-t-il dans le flux de travail?&lt;br /&gt;
* L&#039;un ou l&#039;autre des groupes aura-t-il besoin de recevoir des notifications pour prendre les mesures qui s&#039;imposent ?&lt;br /&gt;
* Les groupes effectueront-ils leurs actions à partir du frontend ou du backend ou de la combinaison des deux ?&lt;br /&gt;
* Quelles &amp;quot;Catégories&amp;quot; se verront attribuer un/ce flux de travail ?&lt;br /&gt;
* Les différentes catégories auront-elles des flux de travail différents ?&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Scénario #1 ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*Un groupe d&#039;utilisateurs ajoute des messages de blog mais ne peut pas les publier&lt;br /&gt;
*Le deuxième groupe d&#039;utilisateurs approuve les messages du blog et les publie.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Créer de nouveaux groupes d&#039;utilisateurs ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
# Allez dans &#039;&#039;&#039;Utilisateurs&#039;&#039;&#039; {{rarr}} &#039;&#039;&#039;Groupes&#039;&#039;&#039; {{rarr}} Nouveau&lt;br /&gt;
# Saisissez le &#039;&#039;&#039;Titre du groupe&#039;&#039;&#039;:&#039;&#039;Affiches du Blog&#039;&#039;&#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
# Sélectionnez le &#039;&#039;&#039;Group Parent&#039;&#039;&#039; : Enregistré&lt;br /&gt;
# Cliquez sur Enregistrer &amp;amp; Nouveau.&lt;br /&gt;
# Saisissez le &#039;&#039;&#039;Titre du groupe&#039;&#039;&#039;:&#039;&#039;Modérateur de Blog&#039;&#039;&#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
# Sélectionnez le &#039;&#039;&#039;Group Parent&#039;&#039;&#039; : Enregistré&lt;br /&gt;
# Cliquez sur Enregistrer &amp;amp; Fermer.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Créer de nouveaux utilisateurs (ou modifier des utilisateurs existants) ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Using the directions on [[S:MyLanguage/Adding_a_new_user|create your new &#039;&#039;&#039;Users&#039;&#039;&#039;]].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
# Create &#039;&#039;&#039;User(s)&#039;&#039;&#039; and assign them to the &#039;&#039;Blog Posters&#039;&#039; &#039;&#039;&#039;User Group&#039;&#039;&#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
# Create &#039;&#039;&#039;User(s)&#039;&#039;&#039; and assign them to the &#039;&#039;Blog Approvers&#039;&#039; &#039;&#039;&#039;User Group&#039;&#039;&#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;quot;REMARQUE&amp;quot; : Si vous voulez que vos &amp;quot;Utilisateurs&amp;quot; reçoivent des notifications pour une &amp;quot;Transition&amp;quot; (voir plus bas), sélectionnez Oui pour &amp;quot;Recevoir des courriels du système&amp;quot; pour chaque &amp;quot;Utilisateur&amp;quot; devant recevoir des notifications.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Créer le flux de travail ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
# Allez dans &#039;&#039;&#039;Contenu&#039;&#039;&#039; {{rarr}} &#039;&#039;&#039;Flux de Travail&#039;&#039;&#039; {{rarr}} Nouveau&lt;br /&gt;
# Entrer le &#039;&#039;&#039;Titre&#039;&#039;&#039; : &#039;&#039;Flux de Travail du Blog&#039;&#039;&#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
# Cliquez sur Enregistrer &amp;amp; fermer.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;quot;REMARQUE&#039;&#039; : Ne cochez cette case par défaut que s&#039;il s&#039;agit du Flux de travail par défaut pour TOUS les nouveaux articles créés dans les catégories &#039;&#039;sans&#039;&#039; un flux de travail attribué. Les articles existants ne seront pas modifiés.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Créer le(s) statut(s) du flux de travail ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
# A partir de la vue en liste &#039;&#039;&#039;Workflows&#039;&#039;&#039;, cliquez sur le lien &amp;quot;&#039;&#039;&#039;gérer&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039; dans la colonne &#039;&#039;Etats&#039;&#039; à côté du &#039;&#039;Flux de Travail de Blog&#039;&#039;. Vous verrez l&#039;état par défaut &amp;quot;Publié&amp;quot;.&lt;br /&gt;
# Click the &#039;&#039;&#039;Default State&#039;&#039;&#039; for Published and change the &#039;&#039;&#039;Title&#039;&#039;&#039; to: &#039;&#039;Publish new blog post&#039;&#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
# &#039;&#039;&#039;L&#039;état des articles déjà marqués comme : Publiés&#039;&#039;&#039; restera inchangé.&lt;br /&gt;
# Cliquez sur Enregistrer &amp;amp; nouveau.&lt;br /&gt;
# Enter the &#039;&#039;&#039;Title&#039;&#039;&#039;: &#039;&#039;New blog post, unpublished&#039;&#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
# Change the &#039;&#039;&#039;Condition&#039;&#039;&#039; of items in this &#039;&#039;&#039;State&#039;&#039;&#039; to Unpublished.&lt;br /&gt;
# Change the &#039;&#039;&#039;Default&#039;&#039;&#039; to Yes (Green) since this is the &#039;&#039;&#039;Default State&#039;&#039;&#039; for Articles in this Workflow.&lt;br /&gt;
# Cliquez sur Enregistrer &amp;amp; fermer.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Créer la transition pour le flux de travail ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
There are two ways to access &#039;&#039;&#039;Transitions&#039;&#039;&#039;:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
# Click &#039;&#039;&#039;Transitions&#039;&#039;&#039; from the sidebar while in the States list view.&lt;br /&gt;
# Click the blue line with arrows in both directions from the &#039;&#039;&#039;Workflow&#039;&#039;&#039; list view.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
# Go to &#039;&#039;&#039;Transitions&#039;&#039;&#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
# Cliquez sur Nouveau&lt;br /&gt;
# Add the &#039;&#039;&#039;Title&#039;&#039;&#039;: &#039;&#039;Approve/Publish&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
# Select the &#039;&#039;&#039;State&#039;&#039;&#039; &#039;&#039;New blog post – unpublished&#039;&#039; in the &#039;&#039;&#039;From state&#039;&#039;&#039; field drop-down.&lt;br /&gt;
# Select the &#039;&#039;&#039;State&#039;&#039;&#039; &#039;&#039;Publish new blog post&#039;&#039; in the &#039;&#039;&#039;To state&#039;&#039;&#039; field drop-down.&lt;br /&gt;
# Click Save and remain in this &#039;&#039;&#039;Transition&#039;&#039;&#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
# Click the &#039;&#039;&#039;Permissions&#039;&#039;&#039; tab of the &#039;&#039;&#039;Transition&#039;&#039;&#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
# Select the &#039;&#039;&#039;User Group&#039;&#039;&#039; &#039;&#039;Blog Approvers&#039;&#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
# For the &#039;&#039;&#039;Action&#039;&#039;&#039; &#039;&#039;&#039;Execute transition&#039;&#039;&#039;, select &#039;&#039;&#039;Allowed&#039;&#039;&#039; from the &#039;&#039;&#039;Select New Setting&#039;&#039;&#039; drop-down.&lt;br /&gt;
# Cliquez sur Enregistrer &amp;amp; fermer.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;NOTE&#039;&#039;&#039;: You can quickly access your &#039;&#039;&#039;States&#039;&#039;&#039; and &#039;&#039;&#039;Transitions&#039;&#039;&#039; from the &#039;&#039;&#039;Workflow&#039;&#039;&#039; list view. The orange circle is the States and has the quantity of States listed next to the Workflow Title. The blue line with arrows in both directions is for Transitions and shows the quantity of Transitions for the Workflow.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Assign Workflow &amp;amp; User Group Permissions to the Category ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
# Allez dans &#039;&#039;&#039;Contenu&#039;&#039;&#039; {{rarr}} &#039;&#039;&#039;Catégories&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
# Access the &#039;&#039;Blog&#039;&#039; &#039;&#039;&#039;Category&#039;&#039;&#039; (or create it if necessary) and click the &#039;&#039;&#039;Workflow&#039;&#039;&#039; tab.&lt;br /&gt;
# Click the drop-down and select &#039;&#039;Blog Workflow&#039;&#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
# Cliquez sur l&#039;onglet &#039;&#039;&#039;Droits&#039;&#039;&#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
# Click on the &#039;&#039;Blog Poster&#039;&#039; &#039;&#039;&#039;User Group&#039;&#039;&#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
# For the &#039;&#039;&#039;Action&#039;&#039;&#039; Create and Edit, change the &#039;&#039;&#039;Select New Setting&#039;&#039;&#039; drop-down to Allowed.&lt;br /&gt;
# Click on the &#039;&#039;Blog Approvers&#039;&#039; &#039;&#039;&#039;User Group&#039;&#039;&#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
# For the &#039;&#039;&#039;Action&#039;&#039;&#039; Delete, Edit, Edit State and Edit Own, change the &#039;&#039;&#039;Select New Setting&#039;&#039;&#039; drop-down to Allowed.&lt;br /&gt;
# Cliquez sur Enregistrer &amp;amp; fermer.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
For more information on ACL and assigning permissions to User Groups, see the [[S:MyLanguage/J3.x:Access_Control_List_Tutorial|ACL Tutorial]].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Paramétrer les notifications ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Notifications use the Joomla core Messaging component. It is very basic. When enabled for Workflows, it will send a message to the User associated with the Group assigned to the Transition. The message simply states that they have a message in the site. It will then be their responsibility to login and check the articles that need approval and publish them.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;To set up notifications for the Workgroup Transitions:&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
# Allez dans &#039;&#039;&#039;Extensions&#039;&#039;&#039; {{rarr}} &#039;&#039;&#039;Plug-ins&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
# Click the &#039;&#039;&#039;Table Options&#039;&#039;&#039; button and &#039;&#039;&#039;Select Type&#039;&#039;&#039; of content&lt;br /&gt;
# Click on &#039;&#039;&#039;Content – Joomla&#039;&#039;&#039; and then toggle Yes for &#039;&#039;&#039;Email on transition execution&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
# Then make sure that the &#039;&#039;&#039;Users&#039;&#039;&#039; themselves have &#039;&#039;&#039;Receive System Emails&#039;&#039;&#039; toggled to Yes in &#039;&#039;&#039;Users&#039;&#039;&#039; {{rarr}} &#039;&#039;&#039;Manage&#039;&#039;&#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== To set it up so that Users can Post and Approve from the frontend ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
# Create a &#039;&#039;&#039;Menu Item&#039;&#039;&#039; for the &#039;&#039;&#039;Menu Item Type&#039;&#039;&#039; Login so that your Blog Posters can login.&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;&#039;&#039;&#039;Menus&#039;&#039;&#039; {{rarr}} &#039;&#039;Choose or create a menu&#039;&#039; {{rarr}} New {{rarr}} &#039;&#039;&#039;Users&#039;&#039;&#039; {{rarr}} &#039;&#039;&#039;Login&#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;OR&lt;br /&gt;
# Create a module for Login so that your Blog Posters can login.&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;&#039;&#039;&#039;Extensions&#039;&#039;&#039; {{rarr}} &#039;&#039;&#039;Modules&#039;&#039;&#039; {{rarr}} New {{rarr}} &#039;&#039;&#039;Login&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
# Add a &#039;&#039;&#039;Menu Item&#039;&#039;&#039; to a Menu that displays only for the &#039;&#039;&#039;Registered User Group&#039;&#039;&#039; to Add an article&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;&#039;&#039;&#039;Menu Item Type Articles&#039;&#039;&#039; {{rarr}} &#039;&#039;&#039;Create Article&#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;&#039;&#039;&#039;NOTE&#039;&#039;&#039;: this will display for all Registered Users unless you create an Access Level for your Blog Poster User Group and select this in the Menu Item under Access.&lt;br /&gt;
# When your &#039;&#039;&#039;User&#039;&#039;&#039; logs in, they add an &#039;&#039;&#039;Article&#039;&#039;&#039;, enter the content and Save.&lt;br /&gt;
# This will trigger a notification to the Blog Approvers Users that there is a new private message on the site. It doesn’t get more specific than that. Approvers should just come to the site and approve the Article. It will also send a message to Super Admins.&lt;br /&gt;
# When the Blog Approver logs in, they can navigate to where the new article will appear. They will be able to see the unpublished article and edit it/approve it/publish it. Then they can Save &amp;amp; Close and logout.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Admin note&#039;&#039;&#039;: Super Admins can use Batch to move existing Articles to a different workflow than it is currently assigned. It won’t make a difference if the Articles are already published.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Scénario #2 ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Ajoutez ici un autre scénario pour aider les autres à voir la puissance des flux de travail. Les documents peuvent être modifiés ou ajoutés par quiconque possèdant un compte.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Related Information==&lt;br /&gt;
See also:&lt;br /&gt;
* [[S:MyLanguage/Publishing_Workflow_Implementation|Publishing Workflow Implementation]]&lt;br /&gt;
* [[S:MyLanguage/Publishing_Workflow|Publishing Workflow]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;noinclude&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[Category:Google Summer of Code 2017{{#translation:}}]]&lt;br /&gt;
[[Category:Development{{#translation:}}]]&lt;br /&gt;
[[Category:Joomla! 4.x{{#translation:}}]]&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/noinclude&amp;gt;&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Wisgar</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://docs.sandbox.joomla.org/index.php?title=Translations:Publishing_Workflow/Scenarios/44/fr&amp;diff=639439</id>
		<title>Translations:Publishing Workflow/Scenarios/44/fr</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://docs.sandbox.joomla.org/index.php?title=Translations:Publishing_Workflow/Scenarios/44/fr&amp;diff=639439"/>
		<updated>2019-10-20T13:39:51Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Wisgar: Created page with &amp;quot;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;L&amp;#039;état des articles déjà marqués comme : Publiés&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; restera inchangé.&amp;quot;&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;&#039;&#039;&#039;L&#039;état des articles déjà marqués comme : Publiés&#039;&#039;&#039; restera inchangé.&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Wisgar</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://docs.sandbox.joomla.org/index.php?title=Publishing_Workflow/Scenarios/fr&amp;diff=639438</id>
		<title>Publishing Workflow/Scenarios/fr</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://docs.sandbox.joomla.org/index.php?title=Publishing_Workflow/Scenarios/fr&amp;diff=639438"/>
		<updated>2019-10-20T13:37:00Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Wisgar: Created page with &amp;quot;A partir de la vue en liste &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Workflows&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;, cliquez sur le lien &amp;quot;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;gérer&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; dans la colonne &amp;#039;&amp;#039;Etats&amp;#039;&amp;#039; à côté du &amp;#039;&amp;#039;Flux de Travail de Blog&amp;#039;&amp;#039;. Vous verrez l&amp;#039;état par dé...&amp;quot;&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;&amp;lt;noinclude&amp;gt;&amp;lt;languages /&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/noinclude&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
==Implémentation des flux de travail ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
L&#039;ordre général des tâches pour créer un nouveau flux de travail est :&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
# Planifier&lt;br /&gt;
# Ajouter un nouveau &#039;&#039;&#039;Groupes d&#039;utilisateurs&#039;&#039;&#039; (facultatif)&lt;br /&gt;
# Ajouter de nouveaux &#039;&#039;&#039;Utilisateurs&#039;&#039;&#039; et les assigner aux groupes d&#039;utilisateurs appropriés (facultatif)&lt;br /&gt;
# Créer le the nouveau &amp;quot;flux de travail&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
# Créez l&#039;(es) état(s) pour ce flux de travail avec la(les) condition(s).&lt;br /&gt;
# Créer la(les) &#039;&#039;&#039;Transition(s)&#039;&#039;&#039; du flux de travail&lt;br /&gt;
# Ajoutez ou modifiez la &#039;&#039;&#039;Catégorie&#039;&#039;&#039; applicable pour ajouter le &#039;&#039;&#039;Flux de travail&#039;&#039;&#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
# Modifier les &#039;&#039;Permissions&#039;&#039;&#039; de la &#039;&#039;Catégorie&#039;&#039; de sorte que les nouveaux&#039;&#039;Groupes d&#039;utilisateurs&#039;&#039; aient les permissions de faire seulement ce qu&#039;ils sont en droit de faire&lt;br /&gt;
# Paramétrer les notifications si nécessaire&lt;br /&gt;
# Configurer l&#039;accès de connexion pour les &#039;&#039;&#039;Utilisateurs&#039;&#039;&#039; sur le frontend (ou le backend : non inclus dans ce tutoriel) (facultatif)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Planification ==&lt;br /&gt;
Planifiez ce que votre flux de travail fera. La planification est toujours la partie la plus importante. Répondez à ces questions pour vous aider à planifier :&lt;br /&gt;
* Combien de groupes d&#039;utilisateurs (même s&#039;il n&#039;y a qu&#039;un seul utilisateur dans le groupe) doivent intervenir?&lt;br /&gt;
* Combien d&#039;actions y aura-t-il dans le flux de travail?&lt;br /&gt;
* L&#039;un ou l&#039;autre des groupes aura-t-il besoin de recevoir des notifications pour prendre les mesures qui s&#039;imposent ?&lt;br /&gt;
* Les groupes effectueront-ils leurs actions à partir du frontend ou du backend ou de la combinaison des deux ?&lt;br /&gt;
* Quelles &amp;quot;Catégories&amp;quot; se verront attribuer un/ce flux de travail ?&lt;br /&gt;
* Les différentes catégories auront-elles des flux de travail différents ?&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Scénario #1 ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*Un groupe d&#039;utilisateurs ajoute des messages de blog mais ne peut pas les publier&lt;br /&gt;
*Le deuxième groupe d&#039;utilisateurs approuve les messages du blog et les publie.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Créer de nouveaux groupes d&#039;utilisateurs ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
# Allez dans &#039;&#039;&#039;Utilisateurs&#039;&#039;&#039; {{rarr}} &#039;&#039;&#039;Groupes&#039;&#039;&#039; {{rarr}} Nouveau&lt;br /&gt;
# Saisissez le &#039;&#039;&#039;Titre du groupe&#039;&#039;&#039;:&#039;&#039;Affiches du Blog&#039;&#039;&#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
# Sélectionnez le &#039;&#039;&#039;Group Parent&#039;&#039;&#039; : Enregistré&lt;br /&gt;
# Cliquez sur Enregistrer &amp;amp; Nouveau.&lt;br /&gt;
# Saisissez le &#039;&#039;&#039;Titre du groupe&#039;&#039;&#039;:&#039;&#039;Modérateur de Blog&#039;&#039;&#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
# Sélectionnez le &#039;&#039;&#039;Group Parent&#039;&#039;&#039; : Enregistré&lt;br /&gt;
# Cliquez sur Enregistrer &amp;amp; Fermer.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Créer de nouveaux utilisateurs (ou modifier des utilisateurs existants) ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Using the directions on [[S:MyLanguage/Adding_a_new_user|create your new &#039;&#039;&#039;Users&#039;&#039;&#039;]].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
# Create &#039;&#039;&#039;User(s)&#039;&#039;&#039; and assign them to the &#039;&#039;Blog Posters&#039;&#039; &#039;&#039;&#039;User Group&#039;&#039;&#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
# Create &#039;&#039;&#039;User(s)&#039;&#039;&#039; and assign them to the &#039;&#039;Blog Approvers&#039;&#039; &#039;&#039;&#039;User Group&#039;&#039;&#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;quot;REMARQUE&amp;quot; : Si vous voulez que vos &amp;quot;Utilisateurs&amp;quot; reçoivent des notifications pour une &amp;quot;Transition&amp;quot; (voir plus bas), sélectionnez Oui pour &amp;quot;Recevoir des courriels du système&amp;quot; pour chaque &amp;quot;Utilisateur&amp;quot; devant recevoir des notifications.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Créer le flux de travail ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
# Allez dans &#039;&#039;&#039;Contenu&#039;&#039;&#039; {{rarr}} &#039;&#039;&#039;Flux de Travail&#039;&#039;&#039; {{rarr}} Nouveau&lt;br /&gt;
# Entrer le &#039;&#039;&#039;Titre&#039;&#039;&#039; : &#039;&#039;Flux de Travail du Blog&#039;&#039;&#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
# Cliquez sur Enregistrer &amp;amp; fermer.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;quot;REMARQUE&#039;&#039; : Ne cochez cette case par défaut que s&#039;il s&#039;agit du Flux de travail par défaut pour TOUS les nouveaux articles créés dans les catégories &#039;&#039;sans&#039;&#039; un flux de travail attribué. Les articles existants ne seront pas modifiés.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Créer le(s) statut(s) du flux de travail ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
# A partir de la vue en liste &#039;&#039;&#039;Workflows&#039;&#039;&#039;, cliquez sur le lien &amp;quot;&#039;&#039;&#039;gérer&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039; dans la colonne &#039;&#039;Etats&#039;&#039; à côté du &#039;&#039;Flux de Travail de Blog&#039;&#039;. Vous verrez l&#039;état par défaut &amp;quot;Publié&amp;quot;.&lt;br /&gt;
# Click the &#039;&#039;&#039;Default State&#039;&#039;&#039; for Published and change the &#039;&#039;&#039;Title&#039;&#039;&#039; to: &#039;&#039;Publish new blog post&#039;&#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
# The &#039;&#039;&#039;Condition of items in this state: Published&#039;&#039;&#039; will remain unchanged.&lt;br /&gt;
# Cliquez sur Enregistrer &amp;amp; nouveau.&lt;br /&gt;
# Enter the &#039;&#039;&#039;Title&#039;&#039;&#039;: &#039;&#039;New blog post, unpublished&#039;&#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
# Change the &#039;&#039;&#039;Condition&#039;&#039;&#039; of items in this &#039;&#039;&#039;State&#039;&#039;&#039; to Unpublished.&lt;br /&gt;
# Change the &#039;&#039;&#039;Default&#039;&#039;&#039; to Yes (Green) since this is the &#039;&#039;&#039;Default State&#039;&#039;&#039; for Articles in this Workflow.&lt;br /&gt;
# Cliquez sur Enregistrer &amp;amp; fermer.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Créer la transition pour le flux de travail ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
There are two ways to access &#039;&#039;&#039;Transitions&#039;&#039;&#039;:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
# Click &#039;&#039;&#039;Transitions&#039;&#039;&#039; from the sidebar while in the States list view.&lt;br /&gt;
# Click the blue line with arrows in both directions from the &#039;&#039;&#039;Workflow&#039;&#039;&#039; list view.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
# Go to &#039;&#039;&#039;Transitions&#039;&#039;&#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
# Cliquez sur Nouveau&lt;br /&gt;
# Add the &#039;&#039;&#039;Title&#039;&#039;&#039;: &#039;&#039;Approve/Publish&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
# Select the &#039;&#039;&#039;State&#039;&#039;&#039; &#039;&#039;New blog post – unpublished&#039;&#039; in the &#039;&#039;&#039;From state&#039;&#039;&#039; field drop-down.&lt;br /&gt;
# Select the &#039;&#039;&#039;State&#039;&#039;&#039; &#039;&#039;Publish new blog post&#039;&#039; in the &#039;&#039;&#039;To state&#039;&#039;&#039; field drop-down.&lt;br /&gt;
# Click Save and remain in this &#039;&#039;&#039;Transition&#039;&#039;&#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
# Click the &#039;&#039;&#039;Permissions&#039;&#039;&#039; tab of the &#039;&#039;&#039;Transition&#039;&#039;&#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
# Select the &#039;&#039;&#039;User Group&#039;&#039;&#039; &#039;&#039;Blog Approvers&#039;&#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
# For the &#039;&#039;&#039;Action&#039;&#039;&#039; &#039;&#039;&#039;Execute transition&#039;&#039;&#039;, select &#039;&#039;&#039;Allowed&#039;&#039;&#039; from the &#039;&#039;&#039;Select New Setting&#039;&#039;&#039; drop-down.&lt;br /&gt;
# Cliquez sur Enregistrer &amp;amp; fermer.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;NOTE&#039;&#039;&#039;: You can quickly access your &#039;&#039;&#039;States&#039;&#039;&#039; and &#039;&#039;&#039;Transitions&#039;&#039;&#039; from the &#039;&#039;&#039;Workflow&#039;&#039;&#039; list view. The orange circle is the States and has the quantity of States listed next to the Workflow Title. The blue line with arrows in both directions is for Transitions and shows the quantity of Transitions for the Workflow.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Assign Workflow &amp;amp; User Group Permissions to the Category ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
# Allez dans &#039;&#039;&#039;Contenu&#039;&#039;&#039; {{rarr}} &#039;&#039;&#039;Catégories&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
# Access the &#039;&#039;Blog&#039;&#039; &#039;&#039;&#039;Category&#039;&#039;&#039; (or create it if necessary) and click the &#039;&#039;&#039;Workflow&#039;&#039;&#039; tab.&lt;br /&gt;
# Click the drop-down and select &#039;&#039;Blog Workflow&#039;&#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
# Cliquez sur l&#039;onglet &#039;&#039;&#039;Droits&#039;&#039;&#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
# Click on the &#039;&#039;Blog Poster&#039;&#039; &#039;&#039;&#039;User Group&#039;&#039;&#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
# For the &#039;&#039;&#039;Action&#039;&#039;&#039; Create and Edit, change the &#039;&#039;&#039;Select New Setting&#039;&#039;&#039; drop-down to Allowed.&lt;br /&gt;
# Click on the &#039;&#039;Blog Approvers&#039;&#039; &#039;&#039;&#039;User Group&#039;&#039;&#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
# For the &#039;&#039;&#039;Action&#039;&#039;&#039; Delete, Edit, Edit State and Edit Own, change the &#039;&#039;&#039;Select New Setting&#039;&#039;&#039; drop-down to Allowed.&lt;br /&gt;
# Cliquez sur Enregistrer &amp;amp; fermer.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
For more information on ACL and assigning permissions to User Groups, see the [[S:MyLanguage/J3.x:Access_Control_List_Tutorial|ACL Tutorial]].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Paramétrer les notifications ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Notifications use the Joomla core Messaging component. It is very basic. When enabled for Workflows, it will send a message to the User associated with the Group assigned to the Transition. The message simply states that they have a message in the site. It will then be their responsibility to login and check the articles that need approval and publish them.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;To set up notifications for the Workgroup Transitions:&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
# Allez dans &#039;&#039;&#039;Extensions&#039;&#039;&#039; {{rarr}} &#039;&#039;&#039;Plug-ins&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
# Click the &#039;&#039;&#039;Table Options&#039;&#039;&#039; button and &#039;&#039;&#039;Select Type&#039;&#039;&#039; of content&lt;br /&gt;
# Click on &#039;&#039;&#039;Content – Joomla&#039;&#039;&#039; and then toggle Yes for &#039;&#039;&#039;Email on transition execution&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
# Then make sure that the &#039;&#039;&#039;Users&#039;&#039;&#039; themselves have &#039;&#039;&#039;Receive System Emails&#039;&#039;&#039; toggled to Yes in &#039;&#039;&#039;Users&#039;&#039;&#039; {{rarr}} &#039;&#039;&#039;Manage&#039;&#039;&#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== To set it up so that Users can Post and Approve from the frontend ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
# Create a &#039;&#039;&#039;Menu Item&#039;&#039;&#039; for the &#039;&#039;&#039;Menu Item Type&#039;&#039;&#039; Login so that your Blog Posters can login.&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;&#039;&#039;&#039;Menus&#039;&#039;&#039; {{rarr}} &#039;&#039;Choose or create a menu&#039;&#039; {{rarr}} New {{rarr}} &#039;&#039;&#039;Users&#039;&#039;&#039; {{rarr}} &#039;&#039;&#039;Login&#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;OR&lt;br /&gt;
# Create a module for Login so that your Blog Posters can login.&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;&#039;&#039;&#039;Extensions&#039;&#039;&#039; {{rarr}} &#039;&#039;&#039;Modules&#039;&#039;&#039; {{rarr}} New {{rarr}} &#039;&#039;&#039;Login&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
# Add a &#039;&#039;&#039;Menu Item&#039;&#039;&#039; to a Menu that displays only for the &#039;&#039;&#039;Registered User Group&#039;&#039;&#039; to Add an article&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;&#039;&#039;&#039;Menu Item Type Articles&#039;&#039;&#039; {{rarr}} &#039;&#039;&#039;Create Article&#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;&#039;&#039;&#039;NOTE&#039;&#039;&#039;: this will display for all Registered Users unless you create an Access Level for your Blog Poster User Group and select this in the Menu Item under Access.&lt;br /&gt;
# When your &#039;&#039;&#039;User&#039;&#039;&#039; logs in, they add an &#039;&#039;&#039;Article&#039;&#039;&#039;, enter the content and Save.&lt;br /&gt;
# This will trigger a notification to the Blog Approvers Users that there is a new private message on the site. It doesn’t get more specific than that. Approvers should just come to the site and approve the Article. It will also send a message to Super Admins.&lt;br /&gt;
# When the Blog Approver logs in, they can navigate to where the new article will appear. They will be able to see the unpublished article and edit it/approve it/publish it. Then they can Save &amp;amp; Close and logout.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Admin note&#039;&#039;&#039;: Super Admins can use Batch to move existing Articles to a different workflow than it is currently assigned. It won’t make a difference if the Articles are already published.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Scénario #2 ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Ajoutez ici un autre scénario pour aider les autres à voir la puissance des flux de travail. Les documents peuvent être modifiés ou ajoutés par quiconque possèdant un compte.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Related Information==&lt;br /&gt;
See also:&lt;br /&gt;
* [[S:MyLanguage/Publishing_Workflow_Implementation|Publishing Workflow Implementation]]&lt;br /&gt;
* [[S:MyLanguage/Publishing_Workflow|Publishing Workflow]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;noinclude&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[Category:Google Summer of Code 2017{{#translation:}}]]&lt;br /&gt;
[[Category:Development{{#translation:}}]]&lt;br /&gt;
[[Category:Joomla! 4.x{{#translation:}}]]&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/noinclude&amp;gt;&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Wisgar</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://docs.sandbox.joomla.org/index.php?title=Translations:Publishing_Workflow/Scenarios/42/fr&amp;diff=639437</id>
		<title>Translations:Publishing Workflow/Scenarios/42/fr</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://docs.sandbox.joomla.org/index.php?title=Translations:Publishing_Workflow/Scenarios/42/fr&amp;diff=639437"/>
		<updated>2019-10-20T13:37:00Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Wisgar: Created page with &amp;quot;A partir de la vue en liste &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Workflows&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;, cliquez sur le lien &amp;quot;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;gérer&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; dans la colonne &amp;#039;&amp;#039;Etats&amp;#039;&amp;#039; à côté du &amp;#039;&amp;#039;Flux de Travail de Blog&amp;#039;&amp;#039;. Vous verrez l&amp;#039;état par dé...&amp;quot;&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;A partir de la vue en liste &#039;&#039;&#039;Workflows&#039;&#039;&#039;, cliquez sur le lien &amp;quot;&#039;&#039;&#039;gérer&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039; dans la colonne &#039;&#039;Etats&#039;&#039; à côté du &#039;&#039;Flux de Travail de Blog&#039;&#039;. Vous verrez l&#039;état par défaut &amp;quot;Publié&amp;quot;.&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Wisgar</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://docs.sandbox.joomla.org/index.php?title=Publishing_Workflow/Scenarios/fr&amp;diff=639436</id>
		<title>Publishing Workflow/Scenarios/fr</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://docs.sandbox.joomla.org/index.php?title=Publishing_Workflow/Scenarios/fr&amp;diff=639436"/>
		<updated>2019-10-20T13:30:38Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Wisgar: Created page with &amp;quot;&amp;quot;REMARQUE&amp;#039;&amp;#039; : Ne cochez cette case par défaut que s&amp;#039;il s&amp;#039;agit du Flux de travail par défaut pour TOUS les nouveaux articles créés dans les catégories &amp;#039;&amp;#039;sans&amp;#039;&amp;#039; un flux de...&amp;quot;&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;&amp;lt;noinclude&amp;gt;&amp;lt;languages /&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/noinclude&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
==Implémentation des flux de travail ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
L&#039;ordre général des tâches pour créer un nouveau flux de travail est :&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
# Planifier&lt;br /&gt;
# Ajouter un nouveau &#039;&#039;&#039;Groupes d&#039;utilisateurs&#039;&#039;&#039; (facultatif)&lt;br /&gt;
# Ajouter de nouveaux &#039;&#039;&#039;Utilisateurs&#039;&#039;&#039; et les assigner aux groupes d&#039;utilisateurs appropriés (facultatif)&lt;br /&gt;
# Créer le the nouveau &amp;quot;flux de travail&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
# Créez l&#039;(es) état(s) pour ce flux de travail avec la(les) condition(s).&lt;br /&gt;
# Créer la(les) &#039;&#039;&#039;Transition(s)&#039;&#039;&#039; du flux de travail&lt;br /&gt;
# Ajoutez ou modifiez la &#039;&#039;&#039;Catégorie&#039;&#039;&#039; applicable pour ajouter le &#039;&#039;&#039;Flux de travail&#039;&#039;&#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
# Modifier les &#039;&#039;Permissions&#039;&#039;&#039; de la &#039;&#039;Catégorie&#039;&#039; de sorte que les nouveaux&#039;&#039;Groupes d&#039;utilisateurs&#039;&#039; aient les permissions de faire seulement ce qu&#039;ils sont en droit de faire&lt;br /&gt;
# Paramétrer les notifications si nécessaire&lt;br /&gt;
# Configurer l&#039;accès de connexion pour les &#039;&#039;&#039;Utilisateurs&#039;&#039;&#039; sur le frontend (ou le backend : non inclus dans ce tutoriel) (facultatif)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Planification ==&lt;br /&gt;
Planifiez ce que votre flux de travail fera. La planification est toujours la partie la plus importante. Répondez à ces questions pour vous aider à planifier :&lt;br /&gt;
* Combien de groupes d&#039;utilisateurs (même s&#039;il n&#039;y a qu&#039;un seul utilisateur dans le groupe) doivent intervenir?&lt;br /&gt;
* Combien d&#039;actions y aura-t-il dans le flux de travail?&lt;br /&gt;
* L&#039;un ou l&#039;autre des groupes aura-t-il besoin de recevoir des notifications pour prendre les mesures qui s&#039;imposent ?&lt;br /&gt;
* Les groupes effectueront-ils leurs actions à partir du frontend ou du backend ou de la combinaison des deux ?&lt;br /&gt;
* Quelles &amp;quot;Catégories&amp;quot; se verront attribuer un/ce flux de travail ?&lt;br /&gt;
* Les différentes catégories auront-elles des flux de travail différents ?&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Scénario #1 ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*Un groupe d&#039;utilisateurs ajoute des messages de blog mais ne peut pas les publier&lt;br /&gt;
*Le deuxième groupe d&#039;utilisateurs approuve les messages du blog et les publie.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Créer de nouveaux groupes d&#039;utilisateurs ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
# Allez dans &#039;&#039;&#039;Utilisateurs&#039;&#039;&#039; {{rarr}} &#039;&#039;&#039;Groupes&#039;&#039;&#039; {{rarr}} Nouveau&lt;br /&gt;
# Saisissez le &#039;&#039;&#039;Titre du groupe&#039;&#039;&#039;:&#039;&#039;Affiches du Blog&#039;&#039;&#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
# Sélectionnez le &#039;&#039;&#039;Group Parent&#039;&#039;&#039; : Enregistré&lt;br /&gt;
# Cliquez sur Enregistrer &amp;amp; Nouveau.&lt;br /&gt;
# Saisissez le &#039;&#039;&#039;Titre du groupe&#039;&#039;&#039;:&#039;&#039;Modérateur de Blog&#039;&#039;&#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
# Sélectionnez le &#039;&#039;&#039;Group Parent&#039;&#039;&#039; : Enregistré&lt;br /&gt;
# Cliquez sur Enregistrer &amp;amp; Fermer.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Créer de nouveaux utilisateurs (ou modifier des utilisateurs existants) ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Using the directions on [[S:MyLanguage/Adding_a_new_user|create your new &#039;&#039;&#039;Users&#039;&#039;&#039;]].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
# Create &#039;&#039;&#039;User(s)&#039;&#039;&#039; and assign them to the &#039;&#039;Blog Posters&#039;&#039; &#039;&#039;&#039;User Group&#039;&#039;&#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
# Create &#039;&#039;&#039;User(s)&#039;&#039;&#039; and assign them to the &#039;&#039;Blog Approvers&#039;&#039; &#039;&#039;&#039;User Group&#039;&#039;&#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;quot;REMARQUE&amp;quot; : Si vous voulez que vos &amp;quot;Utilisateurs&amp;quot; reçoivent des notifications pour une &amp;quot;Transition&amp;quot; (voir plus bas), sélectionnez Oui pour &amp;quot;Recevoir des courriels du système&amp;quot; pour chaque &amp;quot;Utilisateur&amp;quot; devant recevoir des notifications.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Créer le flux de travail ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
# Allez dans &#039;&#039;&#039;Contenu&#039;&#039;&#039; {{rarr}} &#039;&#039;&#039;Flux de Travail&#039;&#039;&#039; {{rarr}} Nouveau&lt;br /&gt;
# Entrer le &#039;&#039;&#039;Titre&#039;&#039;&#039; : &#039;&#039;Flux de Travail du Blog&#039;&#039;&#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
# Cliquez sur Enregistrer &amp;amp; fermer.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;quot;REMARQUE&#039;&#039; : Ne cochez cette case par défaut que s&#039;il s&#039;agit du Flux de travail par défaut pour TOUS les nouveaux articles créés dans les catégories &#039;&#039;sans&#039;&#039; un flux de travail attribué. Les articles existants ne seront pas modifiés.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Créer le(s) statut(s) du flux de travail ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
# From the &#039;&#039;&#039;Workflows&#039;&#039;&#039; list view, click the “&#039;&#039;&#039;manage&#039;&#039;&#039;” link in the &#039;&#039;&#039;States&#039;&#039;&#039; column next to the &#039;&#039;Blog Workflow&#039;&#039;. You will see the default &#039;&#039;&#039;State&#039;&#039;&#039; of Published.&lt;br /&gt;
# Click the &#039;&#039;&#039;Default State&#039;&#039;&#039; for Published and change the &#039;&#039;&#039;Title&#039;&#039;&#039; to: &#039;&#039;Publish new blog post&#039;&#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
# The &#039;&#039;&#039;Condition of items in this state: Published&#039;&#039;&#039; will remain unchanged.&lt;br /&gt;
# Cliquez sur Enregistrer &amp;amp; nouveau.&lt;br /&gt;
# Enter the &#039;&#039;&#039;Title&#039;&#039;&#039;: &#039;&#039;New blog post, unpublished&#039;&#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
# Change the &#039;&#039;&#039;Condition&#039;&#039;&#039; of items in this &#039;&#039;&#039;State&#039;&#039;&#039; to Unpublished.&lt;br /&gt;
# Change the &#039;&#039;&#039;Default&#039;&#039;&#039; to Yes (Green) since this is the &#039;&#039;&#039;Default State&#039;&#039;&#039; for Articles in this Workflow.&lt;br /&gt;
# Cliquez sur Enregistrer &amp;amp; fermer.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Créer la transition pour le flux de travail ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
There are two ways to access &#039;&#039;&#039;Transitions&#039;&#039;&#039;:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
# Click &#039;&#039;&#039;Transitions&#039;&#039;&#039; from the sidebar while in the States list view.&lt;br /&gt;
# Click the blue line with arrows in both directions from the &#039;&#039;&#039;Workflow&#039;&#039;&#039; list view.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
# Go to &#039;&#039;&#039;Transitions&#039;&#039;&#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
# Cliquez sur Nouveau&lt;br /&gt;
# Add the &#039;&#039;&#039;Title&#039;&#039;&#039;: &#039;&#039;Approve/Publish&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
# Select the &#039;&#039;&#039;State&#039;&#039;&#039; &#039;&#039;New blog post – unpublished&#039;&#039; in the &#039;&#039;&#039;From state&#039;&#039;&#039; field drop-down.&lt;br /&gt;
# Select the &#039;&#039;&#039;State&#039;&#039;&#039; &#039;&#039;Publish new blog post&#039;&#039; in the &#039;&#039;&#039;To state&#039;&#039;&#039; field drop-down.&lt;br /&gt;
# Click Save and remain in this &#039;&#039;&#039;Transition&#039;&#039;&#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
# Click the &#039;&#039;&#039;Permissions&#039;&#039;&#039; tab of the &#039;&#039;&#039;Transition&#039;&#039;&#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
# Select the &#039;&#039;&#039;User Group&#039;&#039;&#039; &#039;&#039;Blog Approvers&#039;&#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
# For the &#039;&#039;&#039;Action&#039;&#039;&#039; &#039;&#039;&#039;Execute transition&#039;&#039;&#039;, select &#039;&#039;&#039;Allowed&#039;&#039;&#039; from the &#039;&#039;&#039;Select New Setting&#039;&#039;&#039; drop-down.&lt;br /&gt;
# Cliquez sur Enregistrer &amp;amp; fermer.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;NOTE&#039;&#039;&#039;: You can quickly access your &#039;&#039;&#039;States&#039;&#039;&#039; and &#039;&#039;&#039;Transitions&#039;&#039;&#039; from the &#039;&#039;&#039;Workflow&#039;&#039;&#039; list view. The orange circle is the States and has the quantity of States listed next to the Workflow Title. The blue line with arrows in both directions is for Transitions and shows the quantity of Transitions for the Workflow.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Assign Workflow &amp;amp; User Group Permissions to the Category ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
# Allez dans &#039;&#039;&#039;Contenu&#039;&#039;&#039; {{rarr}} &#039;&#039;&#039;Catégories&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
# Access the &#039;&#039;Blog&#039;&#039; &#039;&#039;&#039;Category&#039;&#039;&#039; (or create it if necessary) and click the &#039;&#039;&#039;Workflow&#039;&#039;&#039; tab.&lt;br /&gt;
# Click the drop-down and select &#039;&#039;Blog Workflow&#039;&#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
# Cliquez sur l&#039;onglet &#039;&#039;&#039;Droits&#039;&#039;&#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
# Click on the &#039;&#039;Blog Poster&#039;&#039; &#039;&#039;&#039;User Group&#039;&#039;&#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
# For the &#039;&#039;&#039;Action&#039;&#039;&#039; Create and Edit, change the &#039;&#039;&#039;Select New Setting&#039;&#039;&#039; drop-down to Allowed.&lt;br /&gt;
# Click on the &#039;&#039;Blog Approvers&#039;&#039; &#039;&#039;&#039;User Group&#039;&#039;&#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
# For the &#039;&#039;&#039;Action&#039;&#039;&#039; Delete, Edit, Edit State and Edit Own, change the &#039;&#039;&#039;Select New Setting&#039;&#039;&#039; drop-down to Allowed.&lt;br /&gt;
# Cliquez sur Enregistrer &amp;amp; fermer.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
For more information on ACL and assigning permissions to User Groups, see the [[S:MyLanguage/J3.x:Access_Control_List_Tutorial|ACL Tutorial]].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Paramétrer les notifications ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Notifications use the Joomla core Messaging component. It is very basic. When enabled for Workflows, it will send a message to the User associated with the Group assigned to the Transition. The message simply states that they have a message in the site. It will then be their responsibility to login and check the articles that need approval and publish them.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;To set up notifications for the Workgroup Transitions:&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
# Allez dans &#039;&#039;&#039;Extensions&#039;&#039;&#039; {{rarr}} &#039;&#039;&#039;Plug-ins&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
# Click the &#039;&#039;&#039;Table Options&#039;&#039;&#039; button and &#039;&#039;&#039;Select Type&#039;&#039;&#039; of content&lt;br /&gt;
# Click on &#039;&#039;&#039;Content – Joomla&#039;&#039;&#039; and then toggle Yes for &#039;&#039;&#039;Email on transition execution&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
# Then make sure that the &#039;&#039;&#039;Users&#039;&#039;&#039; themselves have &#039;&#039;&#039;Receive System Emails&#039;&#039;&#039; toggled to Yes in &#039;&#039;&#039;Users&#039;&#039;&#039; {{rarr}} &#039;&#039;&#039;Manage&#039;&#039;&#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== To set it up so that Users can Post and Approve from the frontend ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
# Create a &#039;&#039;&#039;Menu Item&#039;&#039;&#039; for the &#039;&#039;&#039;Menu Item Type&#039;&#039;&#039; Login so that your Blog Posters can login.&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;&#039;&#039;&#039;Menus&#039;&#039;&#039; {{rarr}} &#039;&#039;Choose or create a menu&#039;&#039; {{rarr}} New {{rarr}} &#039;&#039;&#039;Users&#039;&#039;&#039; {{rarr}} &#039;&#039;&#039;Login&#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;OR&lt;br /&gt;
# Create a module for Login so that your Blog Posters can login.&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;&#039;&#039;&#039;Extensions&#039;&#039;&#039; {{rarr}} &#039;&#039;&#039;Modules&#039;&#039;&#039; {{rarr}} New {{rarr}} &#039;&#039;&#039;Login&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
# Add a &#039;&#039;&#039;Menu Item&#039;&#039;&#039; to a Menu that displays only for the &#039;&#039;&#039;Registered User Group&#039;&#039;&#039; to Add an article&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;&#039;&#039;&#039;Menu Item Type Articles&#039;&#039;&#039; {{rarr}} &#039;&#039;&#039;Create Article&#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;&#039;&#039;&#039;NOTE&#039;&#039;&#039;: this will display for all Registered Users unless you create an Access Level for your Blog Poster User Group and select this in the Menu Item under Access.&lt;br /&gt;
# When your &#039;&#039;&#039;User&#039;&#039;&#039; logs in, they add an &#039;&#039;&#039;Article&#039;&#039;&#039;, enter the content and Save.&lt;br /&gt;
# This will trigger a notification to the Blog Approvers Users that there is a new private message on the site. It doesn’t get more specific than that. Approvers should just come to the site and approve the Article. It will also send a message to Super Admins.&lt;br /&gt;
# When the Blog Approver logs in, they can navigate to where the new article will appear. They will be able to see the unpublished article and edit it/approve it/publish it. Then they can Save &amp;amp; Close and logout.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Admin note&#039;&#039;&#039;: Super Admins can use Batch to move existing Articles to a different workflow than it is currently assigned. It won’t make a difference if the Articles are already published.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Scénario #2 ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Ajoutez ici un autre scénario pour aider les autres à voir la puissance des flux de travail. Les documents peuvent être modifiés ou ajoutés par quiconque possèdant un compte.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Related Information==&lt;br /&gt;
See also:&lt;br /&gt;
* [[S:MyLanguage/Publishing_Workflow_Implementation|Publishing Workflow Implementation]]&lt;br /&gt;
* [[S:MyLanguage/Publishing_Workflow|Publishing Workflow]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;noinclude&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[Category:Google Summer of Code 2017{{#translation:}}]]&lt;br /&gt;
[[Category:Development{{#translation:}}]]&lt;br /&gt;
[[Category:Joomla! 4.x{{#translation:}}]]&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/noinclude&amp;gt;&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Wisgar</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://docs.sandbox.joomla.org/index.php?title=Translations:Publishing_Workflow/Scenarios/40/fr&amp;diff=639435</id>
		<title>Translations:Publishing Workflow/Scenarios/40/fr</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://docs.sandbox.joomla.org/index.php?title=Translations:Publishing_Workflow/Scenarios/40/fr&amp;diff=639435"/>
		<updated>2019-10-20T13:30:38Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Wisgar: Created page with &amp;quot;&amp;quot;REMARQUE&amp;#039;&amp;#039; : Ne cochez cette case par défaut que s&amp;#039;il s&amp;#039;agit du Flux de travail par défaut pour TOUS les nouveaux articles créés dans les catégories &amp;#039;&amp;#039;sans&amp;#039;&amp;#039; un flux de...&amp;quot;&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;&amp;quot;REMARQUE&#039;&#039; : Ne cochez cette case par défaut que s&#039;il s&#039;agit du Flux de travail par défaut pour TOUS les nouveaux articles créés dans les catégories &#039;&#039;sans&#039;&#039; un flux de travail attribué. Les articles existants ne seront pas modifiés.&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Wisgar</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://docs.sandbox.joomla.org/index.php?title=Publishing_Workflow/Scenarios/fr&amp;diff=639434</id>
		<title>Publishing Workflow/Scenarios/fr</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://docs.sandbox.joomla.org/index.php?title=Publishing_Workflow/Scenarios/fr&amp;diff=639434"/>
		<updated>2019-10-20T13:29:12Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Wisgar: Created page with &amp;quot;Entrer le &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Titre&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; : &amp;#039;&amp;#039;Flux de Travail du Blog&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;.&amp;quot;&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;&amp;lt;noinclude&amp;gt;&amp;lt;languages /&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/noinclude&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
==Implémentation des flux de travail ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
L&#039;ordre général des tâches pour créer un nouveau flux de travail est :&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
# Planifier&lt;br /&gt;
# Ajouter un nouveau &#039;&#039;&#039;Groupes d&#039;utilisateurs&#039;&#039;&#039; (facultatif)&lt;br /&gt;
# Ajouter de nouveaux &#039;&#039;&#039;Utilisateurs&#039;&#039;&#039; et les assigner aux groupes d&#039;utilisateurs appropriés (facultatif)&lt;br /&gt;
# Créer le the nouveau &amp;quot;flux de travail&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
# Créez l&#039;(es) état(s) pour ce flux de travail avec la(les) condition(s).&lt;br /&gt;
# Créer la(les) &#039;&#039;&#039;Transition(s)&#039;&#039;&#039; du flux de travail&lt;br /&gt;
# Ajoutez ou modifiez la &#039;&#039;&#039;Catégorie&#039;&#039;&#039; applicable pour ajouter le &#039;&#039;&#039;Flux de travail&#039;&#039;&#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
# Modifier les &#039;&#039;Permissions&#039;&#039;&#039; de la &#039;&#039;Catégorie&#039;&#039; de sorte que les nouveaux&#039;&#039;Groupes d&#039;utilisateurs&#039;&#039; aient les permissions de faire seulement ce qu&#039;ils sont en droit de faire&lt;br /&gt;
# Paramétrer les notifications si nécessaire&lt;br /&gt;
# Configurer l&#039;accès de connexion pour les &#039;&#039;&#039;Utilisateurs&#039;&#039;&#039; sur le frontend (ou le backend : non inclus dans ce tutoriel) (facultatif)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Planification ==&lt;br /&gt;
Planifiez ce que votre flux de travail fera. La planification est toujours la partie la plus importante. Répondez à ces questions pour vous aider à planifier :&lt;br /&gt;
* Combien de groupes d&#039;utilisateurs (même s&#039;il n&#039;y a qu&#039;un seul utilisateur dans le groupe) doivent intervenir?&lt;br /&gt;
* Combien d&#039;actions y aura-t-il dans le flux de travail?&lt;br /&gt;
* L&#039;un ou l&#039;autre des groupes aura-t-il besoin de recevoir des notifications pour prendre les mesures qui s&#039;imposent ?&lt;br /&gt;
* Les groupes effectueront-ils leurs actions à partir du frontend ou du backend ou de la combinaison des deux ?&lt;br /&gt;
* Quelles &amp;quot;Catégories&amp;quot; se verront attribuer un/ce flux de travail ?&lt;br /&gt;
* Les différentes catégories auront-elles des flux de travail différents ?&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Scénario #1 ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*Un groupe d&#039;utilisateurs ajoute des messages de blog mais ne peut pas les publier&lt;br /&gt;
*Le deuxième groupe d&#039;utilisateurs approuve les messages du blog et les publie.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Créer de nouveaux groupes d&#039;utilisateurs ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
# Allez dans &#039;&#039;&#039;Utilisateurs&#039;&#039;&#039; {{rarr}} &#039;&#039;&#039;Groupes&#039;&#039;&#039; {{rarr}} Nouveau&lt;br /&gt;
# Saisissez le &#039;&#039;&#039;Titre du groupe&#039;&#039;&#039;:&#039;&#039;Affiches du Blog&#039;&#039;&#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
# Sélectionnez le &#039;&#039;&#039;Group Parent&#039;&#039;&#039; : Enregistré&lt;br /&gt;
# Cliquez sur Enregistrer &amp;amp; Nouveau.&lt;br /&gt;
# Saisissez le &#039;&#039;&#039;Titre du groupe&#039;&#039;&#039;:&#039;&#039;Modérateur de Blog&#039;&#039;&#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
# Sélectionnez le &#039;&#039;&#039;Group Parent&#039;&#039;&#039; : Enregistré&lt;br /&gt;
# Cliquez sur Enregistrer &amp;amp; Fermer.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Créer de nouveaux utilisateurs (ou modifier des utilisateurs existants) ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Using the directions on [[S:MyLanguage/Adding_a_new_user|create your new &#039;&#039;&#039;Users&#039;&#039;&#039;]].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
# Create &#039;&#039;&#039;User(s)&#039;&#039;&#039; and assign them to the &#039;&#039;Blog Posters&#039;&#039; &#039;&#039;&#039;User Group&#039;&#039;&#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
# Create &#039;&#039;&#039;User(s)&#039;&#039;&#039; and assign them to the &#039;&#039;Blog Approvers&#039;&#039; &#039;&#039;&#039;User Group&#039;&#039;&#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;quot;REMARQUE&amp;quot; : Si vous voulez que vos &amp;quot;Utilisateurs&amp;quot; reçoivent des notifications pour une &amp;quot;Transition&amp;quot; (voir plus bas), sélectionnez Oui pour &amp;quot;Recevoir des courriels du système&amp;quot; pour chaque &amp;quot;Utilisateur&amp;quot; devant recevoir des notifications.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Créer le flux de travail ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
# Allez dans &#039;&#039;&#039;Contenu&#039;&#039;&#039; {{rarr}} &#039;&#039;&#039;Flux de Travail&#039;&#039;&#039; {{rarr}} Nouveau&lt;br /&gt;
# Entrer le &#039;&#039;&#039;Titre&#039;&#039;&#039; : &#039;&#039;Flux de Travail du Blog&#039;&#039;&#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
# Cliquez sur Enregistrer &amp;amp; fermer.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;NOTE&#039;&#039;&#039;: Only mark this Default if it will be the Default Workflow for ALL NEW Articles created in Categories &#039;&#039;&#039;without&#039;&#039;&#039; an assigned Workflow. Existing Articles will not be changed.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Créer le(s) statut(s) du flux de travail ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
# From the &#039;&#039;&#039;Workflows&#039;&#039;&#039; list view, click the “&#039;&#039;&#039;manage&#039;&#039;&#039;” link in the &#039;&#039;&#039;States&#039;&#039;&#039; column next to the &#039;&#039;Blog Workflow&#039;&#039;. You will see the default &#039;&#039;&#039;State&#039;&#039;&#039; of Published.&lt;br /&gt;
# Click the &#039;&#039;&#039;Default State&#039;&#039;&#039; for Published and change the &#039;&#039;&#039;Title&#039;&#039;&#039; to: &#039;&#039;Publish new blog post&#039;&#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
# The &#039;&#039;&#039;Condition of items in this state: Published&#039;&#039;&#039; will remain unchanged.&lt;br /&gt;
# Cliquez sur Enregistrer &amp;amp; nouveau.&lt;br /&gt;
# Enter the &#039;&#039;&#039;Title&#039;&#039;&#039;: &#039;&#039;New blog post, unpublished&#039;&#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
# Change the &#039;&#039;&#039;Condition&#039;&#039;&#039; of items in this &#039;&#039;&#039;State&#039;&#039;&#039; to Unpublished.&lt;br /&gt;
# Change the &#039;&#039;&#039;Default&#039;&#039;&#039; to Yes (Green) since this is the &#039;&#039;&#039;Default State&#039;&#039;&#039; for Articles in this Workflow.&lt;br /&gt;
# Cliquez sur Enregistrer &amp;amp; fermer.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Créer la transition pour le flux de travail ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
There are two ways to access &#039;&#039;&#039;Transitions&#039;&#039;&#039;:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
# Click &#039;&#039;&#039;Transitions&#039;&#039;&#039; from the sidebar while in the States list view.&lt;br /&gt;
# Click the blue line with arrows in both directions from the &#039;&#039;&#039;Workflow&#039;&#039;&#039; list view.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
# Go to &#039;&#039;&#039;Transitions&#039;&#039;&#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
# Cliquez sur Nouveau&lt;br /&gt;
# Add the &#039;&#039;&#039;Title&#039;&#039;&#039;: &#039;&#039;Approve/Publish&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
# Select the &#039;&#039;&#039;State&#039;&#039;&#039; &#039;&#039;New blog post – unpublished&#039;&#039; in the &#039;&#039;&#039;From state&#039;&#039;&#039; field drop-down.&lt;br /&gt;
# Select the &#039;&#039;&#039;State&#039;&#039;&#039; &#039;&#039;Publish new blog post&#039;&#039; in the &#039;&#039;&#039;To state&#039;&#039;&#039; field drop-down.&lt;br /&gt;
# Click Save and remain in this &#039;&#039;&#039;Transition&#039;&#039;&#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
# Click the &#039;&#039;&#039;Permissions&#039;&#039;&#039; tab of the &#039;&#039;&#039;Transition&#039;&#039;&#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
# Select the &#039;&#039;&#039;User Group&#039;&#039;&#039; &#039;&#039;Blog Approvers&#039;&#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
# For the &#039;&#039;&#039;Action&#039;&#039;&#039; &#039;&#039;&#039;Execute transition&#039;&#039;&#039;, select &#039;&#039;&#039;Allowed&#039;&#039;&#039; from the &#039;&#039;&#039;Select New Setting&#039;&#039;&#039; drop-down.&lt;br /&gt;
# Cliquez sur Enregistrer &amp;amp; fermer.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;NOTE&#039;&#039;&#039;: You can quickly access your &#039;&#039;&#039;States&#039;&#039;&#039; and &#039;&#039;&#039;Transitions&#039;&#039;&#039; from the &#039;&#039;&#039;Workflow&#039;&#039;&#039; list view. The orange circle is the States and has the quantity of States listed next to the Workflow Title. The blue line with arrows in both directions is for Transitions and shows the quantity of Transitions for the Workflow.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Assign Workflow &amp;amp; User Group Permissions to the Category ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
# Allez dans &#039;&#039;&#039;Contenu&#039;&#039;&#039; {{rarr}} &#039;&#039;&#039;Catégories&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
# Access the &#039;&#039;Blog&#039;&#039; &#039;&#039;&#039;Category&#039;&#039;&#039; (or create it if necessary) and click the &#039;&#039;&#039;Workflow&#039;&#039;&#039; tab.&lt;br /&gt;
# Click the drop-down and select &#039;&#039;Blog Workflow&#039;&#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
# Cliquez sur l&#039;onglet &#039;&#039;&#039;Droits&#039;&#039;&#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
# Click on the &#039;&#039;Blog Poster&#039;&#039; &#039;&#039;&#039;User Group&#039;&#039;&#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
# For the &#039;&#039;&#039;Action&#039;&#039;&#039; Create and Edit, change the &#039;&#039;&#039;Select New Setting&#039;&#039;&#039; drop-down to Allowed.&lt;br /&gt;
# Click on the &#039;&#039;Blog Approvers&#039;&#039; &#039;&#039;&#039;User Group&#039;&#039;&#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
# For the &#039;&#039;&#039;Action&#039;&#039;&#039; Delete, Edit, Edit State and Edit Own, change the &#039;&#039;&#039;Select New Setting&#039;&#039;&#039; drop-down to Allowed.&lt;br /&gt;
# Cliquez sur Enregistrer &amp;amp; fermer.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
For more information on ACL and assigning permissions to User Groups, see the [[S:MyLanguage/J3.x:Access_Control_List_Tutorial|ACL Tutorial]].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Paramétrer les notifications ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Notifications use the Joomla core Messaging component. It is very basic. When enabled for Workflows, it will send a message to the User associated with the Group assigned to the Transition. The message simply states that they have a message in the site. It will then be their responsibility to login and check the articles that need approval and publish them.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;To set up notifications for the Workgroup Transitions:&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
# Allez dans &#039;&#039;&#039;Extensions&#039;&#039;&#039; {{rarr}} &#039;&#039;&#039;Plug-ins&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
# Click the &#039;&#039;&#039;Table Options&#039;&#039;&#039; button and &#039;&#039;&#039;Select Type&#039;&#039;&#039; of content&lt;br /&gt;
# Click on &#039;&#039;&#039;Content – Joomla&#039;&#039;&#039; and then toggle Yes for &#039;&#039;&#039;Email on transition execution&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
# Then make sure that the &#039;&#039;&#039;Users&#039;&#039;&#039; themselves have &#039;&#039;&#039;Receive System Emails&#039;&#039;&#039; toggled to Yes in &#039;&#039;&#039;Users&#039;&#039;&#039; {{rarr}} &#039;&#039;&#039;Manage&#039;&#039;&#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== To set it up so that Users can Post and Approve from the frontend ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
# Create a &#039;&#039;&#039;Menu Item&#039;&#039;&#039; for the &#039;&#039;&#039;Menu Item Type&#039;&#039;&#039; Login so that your Blog Posters can login.&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;&#039;&#039;&#039;Menus&#039;&#039;&#039; {{rarr}} &#039;&#039;Choose or create a menu&#039;&#039; {{rarr}} New {{rarr}} &#039;&#039;&#039;Users&#039;&#039;&#039; {{rarr}} &#039;&#039;&#039;Login&#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;OR&lt;br /&gt;
# Create a module for Login so that your Blog Posters can login.&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;&#039;&#039;&#039;Extensions&#039;&#039;&#039; {{rarr}} &#039;&#039;&#039;Modules&#039;&#039;&#039; {{rarr}} New {{rarr}} &#039;&#039;&#039;Login&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
# Add a &#039;&#039;&#039;Menu Item&#039;&#039;&#039; to a Menu that displays only for the &#039;&#039;&#039;Registered User Group&#039;&#039;&#039; to Add an article&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;&#039;&#039;&#039;Menu Item Type Articles&#039;&#039;&#039; {{rarr}} &#039;&#039;&#039;Create Article&#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;&#039;&#039;&#039;NOTE&#039;&#039;&#039;: this will display for all Registered Users unless you create an Access Level for your Blog Poster User Group and select this in the Menu Item under Access.&lt;br /&gt;
# When your &#039;&#039;&#039;User&#039;&#039;&#039; logs in, they add an &#039;&#039;&#039;Article&#039;&#039;&#039;, enter the content and Save.&lt;br /&gt;
# This will trigger a notification to the Blog Approvers Users that there is a new private message on the site. It doesn’t get more specific than that. Approvers should just come to the site and approve the Article. It will also send a message to Super Admins.&lt;br /&gt;
# When the Blog Approver logs in, they can navigate to where the new article will appear. They will be able to see the unpublished article and edit it/approve it/publish it. Then they can Save &amp;amp; Close and logout.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Admin note&#039;&#039;&#039;: Super Admins can use Batch to move existing Articles to a different workflow than it is currently assigned. It won’t make a difference if the Articles are already published.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Scénario #2 ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Ajoutez ici un autre scénario pour aider les autres à voir la puissance des flux de travail. Les documents peuvent être modifiés ou ajoutés par quiconque possèdant un compte.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Related Information==&lt;br /&gt;
See also:&lt;br /&gt;
* [[S:MyLanguage/Publishing_Workflow_Implementation|Publishing Workflow Implementation]]&lt;br /&gt;
* [[S:MyLanguage/Publishing_Workflow|Publishing Workflow]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;noinclude&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[Category:Google Summer of Code 2017{{#translation:}}]]&lt;br /&gt;
[[Category:Development{{#translation:}}]]&lt;br /&gt;
[[Category:Joomla! 4.x{{#translation:}}]]&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/noinclude&amp;gt;&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Wisgar</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://docs.sandbox.joomla.org/index.php?title=Translations:Publishing_Workflow/Scenarios/38/fr&amp;diff=639433</id>
		<title>Translations:Publishing Workflow/Scenarios/38/fr</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://docs.sandbox.joomla.org/index.php?title=Translations:Publishing_Workflow/Scenarios/38/fr&amp;diff=639433"/>
		<updated>2019-10-20T13:29:12Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Wisgar: Created page with &amp;quot;Entrer le &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Titre&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; : &amp;#039;&amp;#039;Flux de Travail du Blog&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;.&amp;quot;&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;Entrer le &#039;&#039;&#039;Titre&#039;&#039;&#039; : &#039;&#039;Flux de Travail du Blog&#039;&#039;&#039;.&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Wisgar</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://docs.sandbox.joomla.org/index.php?title=Publishing_Workflow/Scenarios/fr&amp;diff=639432</id>
		<title>Publishing Workflow/Scenarios/fr</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://docs.sandbox.joomla.org/index.php?title=Publishing_Workflow/Scenarios/fr&amp;diff=639432"/>
		<updated>2019-10-20T13:28:21Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Wisgar: Created page with &amp;quot;Allez dans &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Contenu&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; {{rarr}} &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Flux de Travail&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; {{rarr}} Nouveau&amp;quot;&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;&amp;lt;noinclude&amp;gt;&amp;lt;languages /&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/noinclude&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
==Implémentation des flux de travail ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
L&#039;ordre général des tâches pour créer un nouveau flux de travail est :&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
# Planifier&lt;br /&gt;
# Ajouter un nouveau &#039;&#039;&#039;Groupes d&#039;utilisateurs&#039;&#039;&#039; (facultatif)&lt;br /&gt;
# Ajouter de nouveaux &#039;&#039;&#039;Utilisateurs&#039;&#039;&#039; et les assigner aux groupes d&#039;utilisateurs appropriés (facultatif)&lt;br /&gt;
# Créer le the nouveau &amp;quot;flux de travail&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
# Créez l&#039;(es) état(s) pour ce flux de travail avec la(les) condition(s).&lt;br /&gt;
# Créer la(les) &#039;&#039;&#039;Transition(s)&#039;&#039;&#039; du flux de travail&lt;br /&gt;
# Ajoutez ou modifiez la &#039;&#039;&#039;Catégorie&#039;&#039;&#039; applicable pour ajouter le &#039;&#039;&#039;Flux de travail&#039;&#039;&#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
# Modifier les &#039;&#039;Permissions&#039;&#039;&#039; de la &#039;&#039;Catégorie&#039;&#039; de sorte que les nouveaux&#039;&#039;Groupes d&#039;utilisateurs&#039;&#039; aient les permissions de faire seulement ce qu&#039;ils sont en droit de faire&lt;br /&gt;
# Paramétrer les notifications si nécessaire&lt;br /&gt;
# Configurer l&#039;accès de connexion pour les &#039;&#039;&#039;Utilisateurs&#039;&#039;&#039; sur le frontend (ou le backend : non inclus dans ce tutoriel) (facultatif)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Planification ==&lt;br /&gt;
Planifiez ce que votre flux de travail fera. La planification est toujours la partie la plus importante. Répondez à ces questions pour vous aider à planifier :&lt;br /&gt;
* Combien de groupes d&#039;utilisateurs (même s&#039;il n&#039;y a qu&#039;un seul utilisateur dans le groupe) doivent intervenir?&lt;br /&gt;
* Combien d&#039;actions y aura-t-il dans le flux de travail?&lt;br /&gt;
* L&#039;un ou l&#039;autre des groupes aura-t-il besoin de recevoir des notifications pour prendre les mesures qui s&#039;imposent ?&lt;br /&gt;
* Les groupes effectueront-ils leurs actions à partir du frontend ou du backend ou de la combinaison des deux ?&lt;br /&gt;
* Quelles &amp;quot;Catégories&amp;quot; se verront attribuer un/ce flux de travail ?&lt;br /&gt;
* Les différentes catégories auront-elles des flux de travail différents ?&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Scénario #1 ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*Un groupe d&#039;utilisateurs ajoute des messages de blog mais ne peut pas les publier&lt;br /&gt;
*Le deuxième groupe d&#039;utilisateurs approuve les messages du blog et les publie.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Créer de nouveaux groupes d&#039;utilisateurs ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
# Allez dans &#039;&#039;&#039;Utilisateurs&#039;&#039;&#039; {{rarr}} &#039;&#039;&#039;Groupes&#039;&#039;&#039; {{rarr}} Nouveau&lt;br /&gt;
# Saisissez le &#039;&#039;&#039;Titre du groupe&#039;&#039;&#039;:&#039;&#039;Affiches du Blog&#039;&#039;&#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
# Sélectionnez le &#039;&#039;&#039;Group Parent&#039;&#039;&#039; : Enregistré&lt;br /&gt;
# Cliquez sur Enregistrer &amp;amp; Nouveau.&lt;br /&gt;
# Saisissez le &#039;&#039;&#039;Titre du groupe&#039;&#039;&#039;:&#039;&#039;Modérateur de Blog&#039;&#039;&#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
# Sélectionnez le &#039;&#039;&#039;Group Parent&#039;&#039;&#039; : Enregistré&lt;br /&gt;
# Cliquez sur Enregistrer &amp;amp; Fermer.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Créer de nouveaux utilisateurs (ou modifier des utilisateurs existants) ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Using the directions on [[S:MyLanguage/Adding_a_new_user|create your new &#039;&#039;&#039;Users&#039;&#039;&#039;]].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
# Create &#039;&#039;&#039;User(s)&#039;&#039;&#039; and assign them to the &#039;&#039;Blog Posters&#039;&#039; &#039;&#039;&#039;User Group&#039;&#039;&#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
# Create &#039;&#039;&#039;User(s)&#039;&#039;&#039; and assign them to the &#039;&#039;Blog Approvers&#039;&#039; &#039;&#039;&#039;User Group&#039;&#039;&#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;quot;REMARQUE&amp;quot; : Si vous voulez que vos &amp;quot;Utilisateurs&amp;quot; reçoivent des notifications pour une &amp;quot;Transition&amp;quot; (voir plus bas), sélectionnez Oui pour &amp;quot;Recevoir des courriels du système&amp;quot; pour chaque &amp;quot;Utilisateur&amp;quot; devant recevoir des notifications.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Créer le flux de travail ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
# Allez dans &#039;&#039;&#039;Contenu&#039;&#039;&#039; {{rarr}} &#039;&#039;&#039;Flux de Travail&#039;&#039;&#039; {{rarr}} Nouveau&lt;br /&gt;
# Enter the &#039;&#039;&#039;Title&#039;&#039;&#039;: &#039;&#039;Blog Workflow&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
# Cliquez sur Enregistrer &amp;amp; fermer.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;NOTE&#039;&#039;&#039;: Only mark this Default if it will be the Default Workflow for ALL NEW Articles created in Categories &#039;&#039;&#039;without&#039;&#039;&#039; an assigned Workflow. Existing Articles will not be changed.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Créer le(s) statut(s) du flux de travail ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
# From the &#039;&#039;&#039;Workflows&#039;&#039;&#039; list view, click the “&#039;&#039;&#039;manage&#039;&#039;&#039;” link in the &#039;&#039;&#039;States&#039;&#039;&#039; column next to the &#039;&#039;Blog Workflow&#039;&#039;. You will see the default &#039;&#039;&#039;State&#039;&#039;&#039; of Published.&lt;br /&gt;
# Click the &#039;&#039;&#039;Default State&#039;&#039;&#039; for Published and change the &#039;&#039;&#039;Title&#039;&#039;&#039; to: &#039;&#039;Publish new blog post&#039;&#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
# The &#039;&#039;&#039;Condition of items in this state: Published&#039;&#039;&#039; will remain unchanged.&lt;br /&gt;
# Cliquez sur Enregistrer &amp;amp; nouveau.&lt;br /&gt;
# Enter the &#039;&#039;&#039;Title&#039;&#039;&#039;: &#039;&#039;New blog post, unpublished&#039;&#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
# Change the &#039;&#039;&#039;Condition&#039;&#039;&#039; of items in this &#039;&#039;&#039;State&#039;&#039;&#039; to Unpublished.&lt;br /&gt;
# Change the &#039;&#039;&#039;Default&#039;&#039;&#039; to Yes (Green) since this is the &#039;&#039;&#039;Default State&#039;&#039;&#039; for Articles in this Workflow.&lt;br /&gt;
# Cliquez sur Enregistrer &amp;amp; fermer.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Créer la transition pour le flux de travail ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
There are two ways to access &#039;&#039;&#039;Transitions&#039;&#039;&#039;:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
# Click &#039;&#039;&#039;Transitions&#039;&#039;&#039; from the sidebar while in the States list view.&lt;br /&gt;
# Click the blue line with arrows in both directions from the &#039;&#039;&#039;Workflow&#039;&#039;&#039; list view.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
# Go to &#039;&#039;&#039;Transitions&#039;&#039;&#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
# Cliquez sur Nouveau&lt;br /&gt;
# Add the &#039;&#039;&#039;Title&#039;&#039;&#039;: &#039;&#039;Approve/Publish&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
# Select the &#039;&#039;&#039;State&#039;&#039;&#039; &#039;&#039;New blog post – unpublished&#039;&#039; in the &#039;&#039;&#039;From state&#039;&#039;&#039; field drop-down.&lt;br /&gt;
# Select the &#039;&#039;&#039;State&#039;&#039;&#039; &#039;&#039;Publish new blog post&#039;&#039; in the &#039;&#039;&#039;To state&#039;&#039;&#039; field drop-down.&lt;br /&gt;
# Click Save and remain in this &#039;&#039;&#039;Transition&#039;&#039;&#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
# Click the &#039;&#039;&#039;Permissions&#039;&#039;&#039; tab of the &#039;&#039;&#039;Transition&#039;&#039;&#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
# Select the &#039;&#039;&#039;User Group&#039;&#039;&#039; &#039;&#039;Blog Approvers&#039;&#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
# For the &#039;&#039;&#039;Action&#039;&#039;&#039; &#039;&#039;&#039;Execute transition&#039;&#039;&#039;, select &#039;&#039;&#039;Allowed&#039;&#039;&#039; from the &#039;&#039;&#039;Select New Setting&#039;&#039;&#039; drop-down.&lt;br /&gt;
# Cliquez sur Enregistrer &amp;amp; fermer.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;NOTE&#039;&#039;&#039;: You can quickly access your &#039;&#039;&#039;States&#039;&#039;&#039; and &#039;&#039;&#039;Transitions&#039;&#039;&#039; from the &#039;&#039;&#039;Workflow&#039;&#039;&#039; list view. The orange circle is the States and has the quantity of States listed next to the Workflow Title. The blue line with arrows in both directions is for Transitions and shows the quantity of Transitions for the Workflow.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Assign Workflow &amp;amp; User Group Permissions to the Category ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
# Allez dans &#039;&#039;&#039;Contenu&#039;&#039;&#039; {{rarr}} &#039;&#039;&#039;Catégories&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
# Access the &#039;&#039;Blog&#039;&#039; &#039;&#039;&#039;Category&#039;&#039;&#039; (or create it if necessary) and click the &#039;&#039;&#039;Workflow&#039;&#039;&#039; tab.&lt;br /&gt;
# Click the drop-down and select &#039;&#039;Blog Workflow&#039;&#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
# Cliquez sur l&#039;onglet &#039;&#039;&#039;Droits&#039;&#039;&#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
# Click on the &#039;&#039;Blog Poster&#039;&#039; &#039;&#039;&#039;User Group&#039;&#039;&#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
# For the &#039;&#039;&#039;Action&#039;&#039;&#039; Create and Edit, change the &#039;&#039;&#039;Select New Setting&#039;&#039;&#039; drop-down to Allowed.&lt;br /&gt;
# Click on the &#039;&#039;Blog Approvers&#039;&#039; &#039;&#039;&#039;User Group&#039;&#039;&#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
# For the &#039;&#039;&#039;Action&#039;&#039;&#039; Delete, Edit, Edit State and Edit Own, change the &#039;&#039;&#039;Select New Setting&#039;&#039;&#039; drop-down to Allowed.&lt;br /&gt;
# Cliquez sur Enregistrer &amp;amp; fermer.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
For more information on ACL and assigning permissions to User Groups, see the [[S:MyLanguage/J3.x:Access_Control_List_Tutorial|ACL Tutorial]].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Paramétrer les notifications ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Notifications use the Joomla core Messaging component. It is very basic. When enabled for Workflows, it will send a message to the User associated with the Group assigned to the Transition. The message simply states that they have a message in the site. It will then be their responsibility to login and check the articles that need approval and publish them.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;To set up notifications for the Workgroup Transitions:&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
# Allez dans &#039;&#039;&#039;Extensions&#039;&#039;&#039; {{rarr}} &#039;&#039;&#039;Plug-ins&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
# Click the &#039;&#039;&#039;Table Options&#039;&#039;&#039; button and &#039;&#039;&#039;Select Type&#039;&#039;&#039; of content&lt;br /&gt;
# Click on &#039;&#039;&#039;Content – Joomla&#039;&#039;&#039; and then toggle Yes for &#039;&#039;&#039;Email on transition execution&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
# Then make sure that the &#039;&#039;&#039;Users&#039;&#039;&#039; themselves have &#039;&#039;&#039;Receive System Emails&#039;&#039;&#039; toggled to Yes in &#039;&#039;&#039;Users&#039;&#039;&#039; {{rarr}} &#039;&#039;&#039;Manage&#039;&#039;&#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== To set it up so that Users can Post and Approve from the frontend ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
# Create a &#039;&#039;&#039;Menu Item&#039;&#039;&#039; for the &#039;&#039;&#039;Menu Item Type&#039;&#039;&#039; Login so that your Blog Posters can login.&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;&#039;&#039;&#039;Menus&#039;&#039;&#039; {{rarr}} &#039;&#039;Choose or create a menu&#039;&#039; {{rarr}} New {{rarr}} &#039;&#039;&#039;Users&#039;&#039;&#039; {{rarr}} &#039;&#039;&#039;Login&#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;OR&lt;br /&gt;
# Create a module for Login so that your Blog Posters can login.&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;&#039;&#039;&#039;Extensions&#039;&#039;&#039; {{rarr}} &#039;&#039;&#039;Modules&#039;&#039;&#039; {{rarr}} New {{rarr}} &#039;&#039;&#039;Login&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
# Add a &#039;&#039;&#039;Menu Item&#039;&#039;&#039; to a Menu that displays only for the &#039;&#039;&#039;Registered User Group&#039;&#039;&#039; to Add an article&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;&#039;&#039;&#039;Menu Item Type Articles&#039;&#039;&#039; {{rarr}} &#039;&#039;&#039;Create Article&#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;&#039;&#039;&#039;NOTE&#039;&#039;&#039;: this will display for all Registered Users unless you create an Access Level for your Blog Poster User Group and select this in the Menu Item under Access.&lt;br /&gt;
# When your &#039;&#039;&#039;User&#039;&#039;&#039; logs in, they add an &#039;&#039;&#039;Article&#039;&#039;&#039;, enter the content and Save.&lt;br /&gt;
# This will trigger a notification to the Blog Approvers Users that there is a new private message on the site. It doesn’t get more specific than that. Approvers should just come to the site and approve the Article. It will also send a message to Super Admins.&lt;br /&gt;
# When the Blog Approver logs in, they can navigate to where the new article will appear. They will be able to see the unpublished article and edit it/approve it/publish it. Then they can Save &amp;amp; Close and logout.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Admin note&#039;&#039;&#039;: Super Admins can use Batch to move existing Articles to a different workflow than it is currently assigned. It won’t make a difference if the Articles are already published.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Scénario #2 ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Ajoutez ici un autre scénario pour aider les autres à voir la puissance des flux de travail. Les documents peuvent être modifiés ou ajoutés par quiconque possèdant un compte.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Related Information==&lt;br /&gt;
See also:&lt;br /&gt;
* [[S:MyLanguage/Publishing_Workflow_Implementation|Publishing Workflow Implementation]]&lt;br /&gt;
* [[S:MyLanguage/Publishing_Workflow|Publishing Workflow]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;noinclude&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[Category:Google Summer of Code 2017{{#translation:}}]]&lt;br /&gt;
[[Category:Development{{#translation:}}]]&lt;br /&gt;
[[Category:Joomla! 4.x{{#translation:}}]]&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/noinclude&amp;gt;&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Wisgar</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://docs.sandbox.joomla.org/index.php?title=Translations:Publishing_Workflow/Scenarios/37/fr&amp;diff=639431</id>
		<title>Translations:Publishing Workflow/Scenarios/37/fr</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://docs.sandbox.joomla.org/index.php?title=Translations:Publishing_Workflow/Scenarios/37/fr&amp;diff=639431"/>
		<updated>2019-10-20T13:28:21Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Wisgar: Created page with &amp;quot;Allez dans &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Contenu&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; {{rarr}} &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Flux de Travail&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; {{rarr}} Nouveau&amp;quot;&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;Allez dans &#039;&#039;&#039;Contenu&#039;&#039;&#039; {{rarr}} &#039;&#039;&#039;Flux de Travail&#039;&#039;&#039; {{rarr}} Nouveau&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Wisgar</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://docs.sandbox.joomla.org/index.php?title=Publishing_Workflow/Scenarios/fr&amp;diff=639430</id>
		<title>Publishing Workflow/Scenarios/fr</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://docs.sandbox.joomla.org/index.php?title=Publishing_Workflow/Scenarios/fr&amp;diff=639430"/>
		<updated>2019-10-20T13:27:28Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Wisgar: Created page with &amp;quot;&amp;quot;REMARQUE&amp;quot; : Si vous voulez que vos &amp;quot;Utilisateurs&amp;quot; reçoivent des notifications pour une &amp;quot;Transition&amp;quot; (voir plus bas), sélectionnez Oui pour &amp;quot;Recevoir des courriels du systè...&amp;quot;&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;&amp;lt;noinclude&amp;gt;&amp;lt;languages /&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/noinclude&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
==Implémentation des flux de travail ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
L&#039;ordre général des tâches pour créer un nouveau flux de travail est :&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
# Planifier&lt;br /&gt;
# Ajouter un nouveau &#039;&#039;&#039;Groupes d&#039;utilisateurs&#039;&#039;&#039; (facultatif)&lt;br /&gt;
# Ajouter de nouveaux &#039;&#039;&#039;Utilisateurs&#039;&#039;&#039; et les assigner aux groupes d&#039;utilisateurs appropriés (facultatif)&lt;br /&gt;
# Créer le the nouveau &amp;quot;flux de travail&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
# Créez l&#039;(es) état(s) pour ce flux de travail avec la(les) condition(s).&lt;br /&gt;
# Créer la(les) &#039;&#039;&#039;Transition(s)&#039;&#039;&#039; du flux de travail&lt;br /&gt;
# Ajoutez ou modifiez la &#039;&#039;&#039;Catégorie&#039;&#039;&#039; applicable pour ajouter le &#039;&#039;&#039;Flux de travail&#039;&#039;&#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
# Modifier les &#039;&#039;Permissions&#039;&#039;&#039; de la &#039;&#039;Catégorie&#039;&#039; de sorte que les nouveaux&#039;&#039;Groupes d&#039;utilisateurs&#039;&#039; aient les permissions de faire seulement ce qu&#039;ils sont en droit de faire&lt;br /&gt;
# Paramétrer les notifications si nécessaire&lt;br /&gt;
# Configurer l&#039;accès de connexion pour les &#039;&#039;&#039;Utilisateurs&#039;&#039;&#039; sur le frontend (ou le backend : non inclus dans ce tutoriel) (facultatif)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Planification ==&lt;br /&gt;
Planifiez ce que votre flux de travail fera. La planification est toujours la partie la plus importante. Répondez à ces questions pour vous aider à planifier :&lt;br /&gt;
* Combien de groupes d&#039;utilisateurs (même s&#039;il n&#039;y a qu&#039;un seul utilisateur dans le groupe) doivent intervenir?&lt;br /&gt;
* Combien d&#039;actions y aura-t-il dans le flux de travail?&lt;br /&gt;
* L&#039;un ou l&#039;autre des groupes aura-t-il besoin de recevoir des notifications pour prendre les mesures qui s&#039;imposent ?&lt;br /&gt;
* Les groupes effectueront-ils leurs actions à partir du frontend ou du backend ou de la combinaison des deux ?&lt;br /&gt;
* Quelles &amp;quot;Catégories&amp;quot; se verront attribuer un/ce flux de travail ?&lt;br /&gt;
* Les différentes catégories auront-elles des flux de travail différents ?&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Scénario #1 ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*Un groupe d&#039;utilisateurs ajoute des messages de blog mais ne peut pas les publier&lt;br /&gt;
*Le deuxième groupe d&#039;utilisateurs approuve les messages du blog et les publie.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Créer de nouveaux groupes d&#039;utilisateurs ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
# Allez dans &#039;&#039;&#039;Utilisateurs&#039;&#039;&#039; {{rarr}} &#039;&#039;&#039;Groupes&#039;&#039;&#039; {{rarr}} Nouveau&lt;br /&gt;
# Saisissez le &#039;&#039;&#039;Titre du groupe&#039;&#039;&#039;:&#039;&#039;Affiches du Blog&#039;&#039;&#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
# Sélectionnez le &#039;&#039;&#039;Group Parent&#039;&#039;&#039; : Enregistré&lt;br /&gt;
# Cliquez sur Enregistrer &amp;amp; Nouveau.&lt;br /&gt;
# Saisissez le &#039;&#039;&#039;Titre du groupe&#039;&#039;&#039;:&#039;&#039;Modérateur de Blog&#039;&#039;&#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
# Sélectionnez le &#039;&#039;&#039;Group Parent&#039;&#039;&#039; : Enregistré&lt;br /&gt;
# Cliquez sur Enregistrer &amp;amp; Fermer.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Créer de nouveaux utilisateurs (ou modifier des utilisateurs existants) ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Using the directions on [[S:MyLanguage/Adding_a_new_user|create your new &#039;&#039;&#039;Users&#039;&#039;&#039;]].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
# Create &#039;&#039;&#039;User(s)&#039;&#039;&#039; and assign them to the &#039;&#039;Blog Posters&#039;&#039; &#039;&#039;&#039;User Group&#039;&#039;&#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
# Create &#039;&#039;&#039;User(s)&#039;&#039;&#039; and assign them to the &#039;&#039;Blog Approvers&#039;&#039; &#039;&#039;&#039;User Group&#039;&#039;&#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;quot;REMARQUE&amp;quot; : Si vous voulez que vos &amp;quot;Utilisateurs&amp;quot; reçoivent des notifications pour une &amp;quot;Transition&amp;quot; (voir plus bas), sélectionnez Oui pour &amp;quot;Recevoir des courriels du système&amp;quot; pour chaque &amp;quot;Utilisateur&amp;quot; devant recevoir des notifications.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Créer le flux de travail ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
# Go to &#039;&#039;&#039;Content&#039;&#039;&#039; {{rarr}} &#039;&#039;&#039;Workflows&#039;&#039;&#039; {{rarr}} New&lt;br /&gt;
# Enter the &#039;&#039;&#039;Title&#039;&#039;&#039;: &#039;&#039;Blog Workflow&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
# Cliquez sur Enregistrer &amp;amp; fermer.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;NOTE&#039;&#039;&#039;: Only mark this Default if it will be the Default Workflow for ALL NEW Articles created in Categories &#039;&#039;&#039;without&#039;&#039;&#039; an assigned Workflow. Existing Articles will not be changed.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Créer le(s) statut(s) du flux de travail ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
# From the &#039;&#039;&#039;Workflows&#039;&#039;&#039; list view, click the “&#039;&#039;&#039;manage&#039;&#039;&#039;” link in the &#039;&#039;&#039;States&#039;&#039;&#039; column next to the &#039;&#039;Blog Workflow&#039;&#039;. You will see the default &#039;&#039;&#039;State&#039;&#039;&#039; of Published.&lt;br /&gt;
# Click the &#039;&#039;&#039;Default State&#039;&#039;&#039; for Published and change the &#039;&#039;&#039;Title&#039;&#039;&#039; to: &#039;&#039;Publish new blog post&#039;&#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
# The &#039;&#039;&#039;Condition of items in this state: Published&#039;&#039;&#039; will remain unchanged.&lt;br /&gt;
# Cliquez sur Enregistrer &amp;amp; nouveau.&lt;br /&gt;
# Enter the &#039;&#039;&#039;Title&#039;&#039;&#039;: &#039;&#039;New blog post, unpublished&#039;&#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
# Change the &#039;&#039;&#039;Condition&#039;&#039;&#039; of items in this &#039;&#039;&#039;State&#039;&#039;&#039; to Unpublished.&lt;br /&gt;
# Change the &#039;&#039;&#039;Default&#039;&#039;&#039; to Yes (Green) since this is the &#039;&#039;&#039;Default State&#039;&#039;&#039; for Articles in this Workflow.&lt;br /&gt;
# Cliquez sur Enregistrer &amp;amp; fermer.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Créer la transition pour le flux de travail ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
There are two ways to access &#039;&#039;&#039;Transitions&#039;&#039;&#039;:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
# Click &#039;&#039;&#039;Transitions&#039;&#039;&#039; from the sidebar while in the States list view.&lt;br /&gt;
# Click the blue line with arrows in both directions from the &#039;&#039;&#039;Workflow&#039;&#039;&#039; list view.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
# Go to &#039;&#039;&#039;Transitions&#039;&#039;&#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
# Cliquez sur Nouveau&lt;br /&gt;
# Add the &#039;&#039;&#039;Title&#039;&#039;&#039;: &#039;&#039;Approve/Publish&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
# Select the &#039;&#039;&#039;State&#039;&#039;&#039; &#039;&#039;New blog post – unpublished&#039;&#039; in the &#039;&#039;&#039;From state&#039;&#039;&#039; field drop-down.&lt;br /&gt;
# Select the &#039;&#039;&#039;State&#039;&#039;&#039; &#039;&#039;Publish new blog post&#039;&#039; in the &#039;&#039;&#039;To state&#039;&#039;&#039; field drop-down.&lt;br /&gt;
# Click Save and remain in this &#039;&#039;&#039;Transition&#039;&#039;&#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
# Click the &#039;&#039;&#039;Permissions&#039;&#039;&#039; tab of the &#039;&#039;&#039;Transition&#039;&#039;&#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
# Select the &#039;&#039;&#039;User Group&#039;&#039;&#039; &#039;&#039;Blog Approvers&#039;&#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
# For the &#039;&#039;&#039;Action&#039;&#039;&#039; &#039;&#039;&#039;Execute transition&#039;&#039;&#039;, select &#039;&#039;&#039;Allowed&#039;&#039;&#039; from the &#039;&#039;&#039;Select New Setting&#039;&#039;&#039; drop-down.&lt;br /&gt;
# Cliquez sur Enregistrer &amp;amp; fermer.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;NOTE&#039;&#039;&#039;: You can quickly access your &#039;&#039;&#039;States&#039;&#039;&#039; and &#039;&#039;&#039;Transitions&#039;&#039;&#039; from the &#039;&#039;&#039;Workflow&#039;&#039;&#039; list view. The orange circle is the States and has the quantity of States listed next to the Workflow Title. The blue line with arrows in both directions is for Transitions and shows the quantity of Transitions for the Workflow.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Assign Workflow &amp;amp; User Group Permissions to the Category ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
# Allez dans &#039;&#039;&#039;Contenu&#039;&#039;&#039; {{rarr}} &#039;&#039;&#039;Catégories&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
# Access the &#039;&#039;Blog&#039;&#039; &#039;&#039;&#039;Category&#039;&#039;&#039; (or create it if necessary) and click the &#039;&#039;&#039;Workflow&#039;&#039;&#039; tab.&lt;br /&gt;
# Click the drop-down and select &#039;&#039;Blog Workflow&#039;&#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
# Cliquez sur l&#039;onglet &#039;&#039;&#039;Droits&#039;&#039;&#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
# Click on the &#039;&#039;Blog Poster&#039;&#039; &#039;&#039;&#039;User Group&#039;&#039;&#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
# For the &#039;&#039;&#039;Action&#039;&#039;&#039; Create and Edit, change the &#039;&#039;&#039;Select New Setting&#039;&#039;&#039; drop-down to Allowed.&lt;br /&gt;
# Click on the &#039;&#039;Blog Approvers&#039;&#039; &#039;&#039;&#039;User Group&#039;&#039;&#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
# For the &#039;&#039;&#039;Action&#039;&#039;&#039; Delete, Edit, Edit State and Edit Own, change the &#039;&#039;&#039;Select New Setting&#039;&#039;&#039; drop-down to Allowed.&lt;br /&gt;
# Cliquez sur Enregistrer &amp;amp; fermer.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
For more information on ACL and assigning permissions to User Groups, see the [[S:MyLanguage/J3.x:Access_Control_List_Tutorial|ACL Tutorial]].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Paramétrer les notifications ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Notifications use the Joomla core Messaging component. It is very basic. When enabled for Workflows, it will send a message to the User associated with the Group assigned to the Transition. The message simply states that they have a message in the site. It will then be their responsibility to login and check the articles that need approval and publish them.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;To set up notifications for the Workgroup Transitions:&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
# Allez dans &#039;&#039;&#039;Extensions&#039;&#039;&#039; {{rarr}} &#039;&#039;&#039;Plug-ins&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
# Click the &#039;&#039;&#039;Table Options&#039;&#039;&#039; button and &#039;&#039;&#039;Select Type&#039;&#039;&#039; of content&lt;br /&gt;
# Click on &#039;&#039;&#039;Content – Joomla&#039;&#039;&#039; and then toggle Yes for &#039;&#039;&#039;Email on transition execution&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
# Then make sure that the &#039;&#039;&#039;Users&#039;&#039;&#039; themselves have &#039;&#039;&#039;Receive System Emails&#039;&#039;&#039; toggled to Yes in &#039;&#039;&#039;Users&#039;&#039;&#039; {{rarr}} &#039;&#039;&#039;Manage&#039;&#039;&#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== To set it up so that Users can Post and Approve from the frontend ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
# Create a &#039;&#039;&#039;Menu Item&#039;&#039;&#039; for the &#039;&#039;&#039;Menu Item Type&#039;&#039;&#039; Login so that your Blog Posters can login.&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;&#039;&#039;&#039;Menus&#039;&#039;&#039; {{rarr}} &#039;&#039;Choose or create a menu&#039;&#039; {{rarr}} New {{rarr}} &#039;&#039;&#039;Users&#039;&#039;&#039; {{rarr}} &#039;&#039;&#039;Login&#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;OR&lt;br /&gt;
# Create a module for Login so that your Blog Posters can login.&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;&#039;&#039;&#039;Extensions&#039;&#039;&#039; {{rarr}} &#039;&#039;&#039;Modules&#039;&#039;&#039; {{rarr}} New {{rarr}} &#039;&#039;&#039;Login&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
# Add a &#039;&#039;&#039;Menu Item&#039;&#039;&#039; to a Menu that displays only for the &#039;&#039;&#039;Registered User Group&#039;&#039;&#039; to Add an article&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;&#039;&#039;&#039;Menu Item Type Articles&#039;&#039;&#039; {{rarr}} &#039;&#039;&#039;Create Article&#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;&#039;&#039;&#039;NOTE&#039;&#039;&#039;: this will display for all Registered Users unless you create an Access Level for your Blog Poster User Group and select this in the Menu Item under Access.&lt;br /&gt;
# When your &#039;&#039;&#039;User&#039;&#039;&#039; logs in, they add an &#039;&#039;&#039;Article&#039;&#039;&#039;, enter the content and Save.&lt;br /&gt;
# This will trigger a notification to the Blog Approvers Users that there is a new private message on the site. It doesn’t get more specific than that. Approvers should just come to the site and approve the Article. It will also send a message to Super Admins.&lt;br /&gt;
# When the Blog Approver logs in, they can navigate to where the new article will appear. They will be able to see the unpublished article and edit it/approve it/publish it. Then they can Save &amp;amp; Close and logout.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Admin note&#039;&#039;&#039;: Super Admins can use Batch to move existing Articles to a different workflow than it is currently assigned. It won’t make a difference if the Articles are already published.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Scénario #2 ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Ajoutez ici un autre scénario pour aider les autres à voir la puissance des flux de travail. Les documents peuvent être modifiés ou ajoutés par quiconque possèdant un compte.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Related Information==&lt;br /&gt;
See also:&lt;br /&gt;
* [[S:MyLanguage/Publishing_Workflow_Implementation|Publishing Workflow Implementation]]&lt;br /&gt;
* [[S:MyLanguage/Publishing_Workflow|Publishing Workflow]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;noinclude&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[Category:Google Summer of Code 2017{{#translation:}}]]&lt;br /&gt;
[[Category:Development{{#translation:}}]]&lt;br /&gt;
[[Category:Joomla! 4.x{{#translation:}}]]&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/noinclude&amp;gt;&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Wisgar</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://docs.sandbox.joomla.org/index.php?title=Translations:Publishing_Workflow/Scenarios/35/fr&amp;diff=639429</id>
		<title>Translations:Publishing Workflow/Scenarios/35/fr</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://docs.sandbox.joomla.org/index.php?title=Translations:Publishing_Workflow/Scenarios/35/fr&amp;diff=639429"/>
		<updated>2019-10-20T13:27:27Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Wisgar: Created page with &amp;quot;&amp;quot;REMARQUE&amp;quot; : Si vous voulez que vos &amp;quot;Utilisateurs&amp;quot; reçoivent des notifications pour une &amp;quot;Transition&amp;quot; (voir plus bas), sélectionnez Oui pour &amp;quot;Recevoir des courriels du systè...&amp;quot;&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;&amp;quot;REMARQUE&amp;quot; : Si vous voulez que vos &amp;quot;Utilisateurs&amp;quot; reçoivent des notifications pour une &amp;quot;Transition&amp;quot; (voir plus bas), sélectionnez Oui pour &amp;quot;Recevoir des courriels du système&amp;quot; pour chaque &amp;quot;Utilisateur&amp;quot; devant recevoir des notifications.&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Wisgar</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://docs.sandbox.joomla.org/index.php?title=Publishing_Workflow/Scenarios/fr&amp;diff=636597</id>
		<title>Publishing Workflow/Scenarios/fr</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://docs.sandbox.joomla.org/index.php?title=Publishing_Workflow/Scenarios/fr&amp;diff=636597"/>
		<updated>2019-10-19T11:47:38Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Wisgar: &lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;&amp;lt;noinclude&amp;gt;&amp;lt;languages /&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/noinclude&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
==Implémentation des flux de travail ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
L&#039;ordre général des tâches pour créer un nouveau flux de travail est :&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
# Planifier&lt;br /&gt;
# Ajouter un nouveau &#039;&#039;&#039;Groupes d&#039;utilisateurs&#039;&#039;&#039; (facultatif)&lt;br /&gt;
# Ajouter de nouveaux &#039;&#039;&#039;Utilisateurs&#039;&#039;&#039; et les assigner aux groupes d&#039;utilisateurs appropriés (facultatif)&lt;br /&gt;
# Créer le the nouveau &amp;quot;flux de travail&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
# Créez l&#039;(es) état(s) pour ce flux de travail avec la(les) condition(s).&lt;br /&gt;
# Créer la(les) &#039;&#039;&#039;Transition(s)&#039;&#039;&#039; du flux de travail&lt;br /&gt;
# Ajoutez ou modifiez la &#039;&#039;&#039;Catégorie&#039;&#039;&#039; applicable pour ajouter le &#039;&#039;&#039;Flux de travail&#039;&#039;&#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
# Modifier les &#039;&#039;Permissions&#039;&#039;&#039; de la &#039;&#039;Catégorie&#039;&#039; de sorte que les nouveaux&#039;&#039;Groupes d&#039;utilisateurs&#039;&#039; aient les permissions de faire seulement ce qu&#039;ils sont en droit de faire&lt;br /&gt;
# Paramétrer les notifications si nécessaire&lt;br /&gt;
# Configurer l&#039;accès de connexion pour les &#039;&#039;&#039;Utilisateurs&#039;&#039;&#039; sur le frontend (ou le backend : non inclus dans ce tutoriel) (facultatif)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Planification ==&lt;br /&gt;
Planifiez ce que votre flux de travail fera. La planification est toujours la partie la plus importante. Répondez à ces questions pour vous aider à planifier :&lt;br /&gt;
* Combien de groupes d&#039;utilisateurs (même s&#039;il n&#039;y a qu&#039;un seul utilisateur dans le groupe) doivent intervenir?&lt;br /&gt;
* Combien d&#039;actions y aura-t-il dans le flux de travail?&lt;br /&gt;
* L&#039;un ou l&#039;autre des groupes aura-t-il besoin de recevoir des notifications pour prendre les mesures qui s&#039;imposent ?&lt;br /&gt;
* Les groupes effectueront-ils leurs actions à partir du frontend ou du backend ou de la combinaison des deux ?&lt;br /&gt;
* Quelles &amp;quot;Catégories&amp;quot; se verront attribuer un/ce flux de travail ?&lt;br /&gt;
* Les différentes catégories auront-elles des flux de travail différents ?&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Scénario #1 ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*Un groupe d&#039;utilisateurs ajoute des messages de blog mais ne peut pas les publier&lt;br /&gt;
*Le deuxième groupe d&#039;utilisateurs approuve les messages du blog et les publie.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Créer de nouveaux groupes d&#039;utilisateurs ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
# Allez dans &#039;&#039;&#039;Utilisateurs&#039;&#039;&#039; {{rarr}} &#039;&#039;&#039;Groupes&#039;&#039;&#039; {{rarr}} Nouveau&lt;br /&gt;
# Saisissez le &#039;&#039;&#039;Titre du groupe&#039;&#039;&#039;:&#039;&#039;Affiches du Blog&#039;&#039;&#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
# Sélectionnez le &#039;&#039;&#039;Group Parent&#039;&#039;&#039; : Enregistré&lt;br /&gt;
# Cliquez sur Enregistrer &amp;amp; Nouveau.&lt;br /&gt;
# Saisissez le &#039;&#039;&#039;Titre du groupe&#039;&#039;&#039;:&#039;&#039;Modérateur de Blog&#039;&#039;&#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
# Sélectionnez le &#039;&#039;&#039;Group Parent&#039;&#039;&#039; : Enregistré&lt;br /&gt;
# Cliquez sur Enregistrer &amp;amp; Fermer.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Créer de nouveaux utilisateurs (ou modifier des utilisateurs existants) ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Using the directions on [[S:MyLanguage/Adding_a_new_user|create your new &#039;&#039;&#039;Users&#039;&#039;&#039;]].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
# Create &#039;&#039;&#039;User(s)&#039;&#039;&#039; and assign them to the &#039;&#039;Blog Posters&#039;&#039; &#039;&#039;&#039;User Group&#039;&#039;&#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
# Create &#039;&#039;&#039;User(s)&#039;&#039;&#039; and assign them to the &#039;&#039;Blog Approvers&#039;&#039; &#039;&#039;&#039;User Group&#039;&#039;&#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;NOTE&#039;&#039;&#039;: If you want your &#039;&#039;&#039;Users&#039;&#039;&#039; to receive notifications for a &#039;&#039;&#039;Transition&#039;&#039;&#039; (see more below) then select Yes for &#039;&#039;&#039;Receives System Emails&#039;&#039;&#039; for each &#039;&#039;&#039;User&#039;&#039;&#039; to receive notifications.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Créer le flux de travail ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
# Go to &#039;&#039;&#039;Content&#039;&#039;&#039; {{rarr}} &#039;&#039;&#039;Workflows&#039;&#039;&#039; {{rarr}} New&lt;br /&gt;
# Enter the &#039;&#039;&#039;Title&#039;&#039;&#039;: &#039;&#039;Blog Workflow&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
# Cliquez sur Enregistrer &amp;amp; fermer.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;NOTE&#039;&#039;&#039;: Only mark this Default if it will be the Default Workflow for ALL NEW Articles created in Categories &#039;&#039;&#039;without&#039;&#039;&#039; an assigned Workflow. Existing Articles will not be changed.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Créer le(s) statut(s) du flux de travail ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
# From the &#039;&#039;&#039;Workflows&#039;&#039;&#039; list view, click the “&#039;&#039;&#039;manage&#039;&#039;&#039;” link in the &#039;&#039;&#039;States&#039;&#039;&#039; column next to the &#039;&#039;Blog Workflow&#039;&#039;. You will see the default &#039;&#039;&#039;State&#039;&#039;&#039; of Published.&lt;br /&gt;
# Click the &#039;&#039;&#039;Default State&#039;&#039;&#039; for Published and change the &#039;&#039;&#039;Title&#039;&#039;&#039; to: &#039;&#039;Publish new blog post&#039;&#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
# The &#039;&#039;&#039;Condition of items in this state: Published&#039;&#039;&#039; will remain unchanged.&lt;br /&gt;
# Cliquez sur Enregistrer &amp;amp; nouveau.&lt;br /&gt;
# Enter the &#039;&#039;&#039;Title&#039;&#039;&#039;: &#039;&#039;New blog post, unpublished&#039;&#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
# Change the &#039;&#039;&#039;Condition&#039;&#039;&#039; of items in this &#039;&#039;&#039;State&#039;&#039;&#039; to Unpublished.&lt;br /&gt;
# Change the &#039;&#039;&#039;Default&#039;&#039;&#039; to Yes (Green) since this is the &#039;&#039;&#039;Default State&#039;&#039;&#039; for Articles in this Workflow.&lt;br /&gt;
# Cliquez sur Enregistrer &amp;amp; fermer.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Créer la transition pour le flux de travail ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
There are two ways to access &#039;&#039;&#039;Transitions&#039;&#039;&#039;:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
# Click &#039;&#039;&#039;Transitions&#039;&#039;&#039; from the sidebar while in the States list view.&lt;br /&gt;
# Click the blue line with arrows in both directions from the &#039;&#039;&#039;Workflow&#039;&#039;&#039; list view.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
# Go to &#039;&#039;&#039;Transitions&#039;&#039;&#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
# Cliquez sur Nouveau&lt;br /&gt;
# Add the &#039;&#039;&#039;Title&#039;&#039;&#039;: &#039;&#039;Approve/Publish&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
# Select the &#039;&#039;&#039;State&#039;&#039;&#039; &#039;&#039;New blog post – unpublished&#039;&#039; in the &#039;&#039;&#039;From state&#039;&#039;&#039; field drop-down.&lt;br /&gt;
# Select the &#039;&#039;&#039;State&#039;&#039;&#039; &#039;&#039;Publish new blog post&#039;&#039; in the &#039;&#039;&#039;To state&#039;&#039;&#039; field drop-down.&lt;br /&gt;
# Click Save and remain in this &#039;&#039;&#039;Transition&#039;&#039;&#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
# Click the &#039;&#039;&#039;Permissions&#039;&#039;&#039; tab of the &#039;&#039;&#039;Transition&#039;&#039;&#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
# Select the &#039;&#039;&#039;User Group&#039;&#039;&#039; &#039;&#039;Blog Approvers&#039;&#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
# For the &#039;&#039;&#039;Action&#039;&#039;&#039; &#039;&#039;&#039;Execute transition&#039;&#039;&#039;, select &#039;&#039;&#039;Allowed&#039;&#039;&#039; from the &#039;&#039;&#039;Select New Setting&#039;&#039;&#039; drop-down.&lt;br /&gt;
# Cliquez sur Enregistrer &amp;amp; fermer.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;NOTE&#039;&#039;&#039;: You can quickly access your &#039;&#039;&#039;States&#039;&#039;&#039; and &#039;&#039;&#039;Transitions&#039;&#039;&#039; from the &#039;&#039;&#039;Workflow&#039;&#039;&#039; list view. The orange circle is the States and has the quantity of States listed next to the Workflow Title. The blue line with arrows in both directions is for Transitions and shows the quantity of Transitions for the Workflow.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Assign Workflow &amp;amp; User Group Permissions to the Category ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
# Allez dans &#039;&#039;&#039;Contenu&#039;&#039;&#039; {{rarr}} &#039;&#039;&#039;Catégories&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
# Access the &#039;&#039;Blog&#039;&#039; &#039;&#039;&#039;Category&#039;&#039;&#039; (or create it if necessary) and click the &#039;&#039;&#039;Workflow&#039;&#039;&#039; tab.&lt;br /&gt;
# Click the drop-down and select &#039;&#039;Blog Workflow&#039;&#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
# Cliquez sur l&#039;onglet &#039;&#039;&#039;Droits&#039;&#039;&#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
# Click on the &#039;&#039;Blog Poster&#039;&#039; &#039;&#039;&#039;User Group&#039;&#039;&#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
# For the &#039;&#039;&#039;Action&#039;&#039;&#039; Create and Edit, change the &#039;&#039;&#039;Select New Setting&#039;&#039;&#039; drop-down to Allowed.&lt;br /&gt;
# Click on the &#039;&#039;Blog Approvers&#039;&#039; &#039;&#039;&#039;User Group&#039;&#039;&#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
# For the &#039;&#039;&#039;Action&#039;&#039;&#039; Delete, Edit, Edit State and Edit Own, change the &#039;&#039;&#039;Select New Setting&#039;&#039;&#039; drop-down to Allowed.&lt;br /&gt;
# Cliquez sur Enregistrer &amp;amp; fermer.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
For more information on ACL and assigning permissions to User Groups, see the [[S:MyLanguage/J3.x:Access_Control_List_Tutorial|ACL Tutorial]].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Paramétrer les notifications ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Notifications use the Joomla core Messaging component. It is very basic. When enabled for Workflows, it will send a message to the User associated with the Group assigned to the Transition. The message simply states that they have a message in the site. It will then be their responsibility to login and check the articles that need approval and publish them.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;To set up notifications for the Workgroup Transitions:&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
# Allez dans &#039;&#039;&#039;Extensions&#039;&#039;&#039; {{rarr}} &#039;&#039;&#039;Plug-ins&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
# Click the &#039;&#039;&#039;Table Options&#039;&#039;&#039; button and &#039;&#039;&#039;Select Type&#039;&#039;&#039; of content&lt;br /&gt;
# Click on &#039;&#039;&#039;Content – Joomla&#039;&#039;&#039; and then toggle Yes for &#039;&#039;&#039;Email on transition execution&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
# Then make sure that the &#039;&#039;&#039;Users&#039;&#039;&#039; themselves have &#039;&#039;&#039;Receive System Emails&#039;&#039;&#039; toggled to Yes in &#039;&#039;&#039;Users&#039;&#039;&#039; {{rarr}} &#039;&#039;&#039;Manage&#039;&#039;&#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== To set it up so that Users can Post and Approve from the frontend ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
# Create a &#039;&#039;&#039;Menu Item&#039;&#039;&#039; for the &#039;&#039;&#039;Menu Item Type&#039;&#039;&#039; Login so that your Blog Posters can login.&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;&#039;&#039;&#039;Menus&#039;&#039;&#039; {{rarr}} &#039;&#039;Choose or create a menu&#039;&#039; {{rarr}} New {{rarr}} &#039;&#039;&#039;Users&#039;&#039;&#039; {{rarr}} &#039;&#039;&#039;Login&#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;OR&lt;br /&gt;
# Create a module for Login so that your Blog Posters can login.&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;&#039;&#039;&#039;Extensions&#039;&#039;&#039; {{rarr}} &#039;&#039;&#039;Modules&#039;&#039;&#039; {{rarr}} New {{rarr}} &#039;&#039;&#039;Login&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
# Add a &#039;&#039;&#039;Menu Item&#039;&#039;&#039; to a Menu that displays only for the &#039;&#039;&#039;Registered User Group&#039;&#039;&#039; to Add an article&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;&#039;&#039;&#039;Menu Item Type Articles&#039;&#039;&#039; {{rarr}} &#039;&#039;&#039;Create Article&#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;&#039;&#039;&#039;NOTE&#039;&#039;&#039;: this will display for all Registered Users unless you create an Access Level for your Blog Poster User Group and select this in the Menu Item under Access.&lt;br /&gt;
# When your &#039;&#039;&#039;User&#039;&#039;&#039; logs in, they add an &#039;&#039;&#039;Article&#039;&#039;&#039;, enter the content and Save.&lt;br /&gt;
# This will trigger a notification to the Blog Approvers Users that there is a new private message on the site. It doesn’t get more specific than that. Approvers should just come to the site and approve the Article. It will also send a message to Super Admins.&lt;br /&gt;
# When the Blog Approver logs in, they can navigate to where the new article will appear. They will be able to see the unpublished article and edit it/approve it/publish it. Then they can Save &amp;amp; Close and logout.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Admin note&#039;&#039;&#039;: Super Admins can use Batch to move existing Articles to a different workflow than it is currently assigned. It won’t make a difference if the Articles are already published.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Scénario #2 ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Ajoutez ici un autre scénario pour aider les autres à voir la puissance des flux de travail. Les documents peuvent être modifiés ou ajoutés par quiconque possèdant un compte.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Related Information==&lt;br /&gt;
See also:&lt;br /&gt;
* [[S:MyLanguage/Publishing_Workflow_Implementation|Publishing Workflow Implementation]]&lt;br /&gt;
* [[S:MyLanguage/Publishing_Workflow|Publishing Workflow]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;noinclude&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[Category:Google Summer of Code 2017{{#translation:}}]]&lt;br /&gt;
[[Category:Development{{#translation:}}]]&lt;br /&gt;
[[Category:Joomla! 4.x{{#translation:}}]]&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/noinclude&amp;gt;&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Wisgar</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://docs.sandbox.joomla.org/index.php?title=Translations:Publishing_Workflow/Scenarios/31/fr&amp;diff=636596</id>
		<title>Translations:Publishing Workflow/Scenarios/31/fr</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://docs.sandbox.joomla.org/index.php?title=Translations:Publishing_Workflow/Scenarios/31/fr&amp;diff=636596"/>
		<updated>2019-10-19T11:47:38Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Wisgar: &lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;Cliquez sur Enregistrer &amp;amp; Fermer.&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Wisgar</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://docs.sandbox.joomla.org/index.php?title=Publishing_Workflow/Scenarios/fr&amp;diff=636595</id>
		<title>Publishing Workflow/Scenarios/fr</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://docs.sandbox.joomla.org/index.php?title=Publishing_Workflow/Scenarios/fr&amp;diff=636595"/>
		<updated>2019-10-19T11:47:30Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Wisgar: Created page with &amp;quot;Sélectionnez le &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Group Parent&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; : Enregistré&amp;quot;&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;&amp;lt;noinclude&amp;gt;&amp;lt;languages /&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/noinclude&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
==Implémentation des flux de travail ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
L&#039;ordre général des tâches pour créer un nouveau flux de travail est :&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
# Planifier&lt;br /&gt;
# Ajouter un nouveau &#039;&#039;&#039;Groupes d&#039;utilisateurs&#039;&#039;&#039; (facultatif)&lt;br /&gt;
# Ajouter de nouveaux &#039;&#039;&#039;Utilisateurs&#039;&#039;&#039; et les assigner aux groupes d&#039;utilisateurs appropriés (facultatif)&lt;br /&gt;
# Créer le the nouveau &amp;quot;flux de travail&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
# Créez l&#039;(es) état(s) pour ce flux de travail avec la(les) condition(s).&lt;br /&gt;
# Créer la(les) &#039;&#039;&#039;Transition(s)&#039;&#039;&#039; du flux de travail&lt;br /&gt;
# Ajoutez ou modifiez la &#039;&#039;&#039;Catégorie&#039;&#039;&#039; applicable pour ajouter le &#039;&#039;&#039;Flux de travail&#039;&#039;&#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
# Modifier les &#039;&#039;Permissions&#039;&#039;&#039; de la &#039;&#039;Catégorie&#039;&#039; de sorte que les nouveaux&#039;&#039;Groupes d&#039;utilisateurs&#039;&#039; aient les permissions de faire seulement ce qu&#039;ils sont en droit de faire&lt;br /&gt;
# Paramétrer les notifications si nécessaire&lt;br /&gt;
# Configurer l&#039;accès de connexion pour les &#039;&#039;&#039;Utilisateurs&#039;&#039;&#039; sur le frontend (ou le backend : non inclus dans ce tutoriel) (facultatif)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Planification ==&lt;br /&gt;
Planifiez ce que votre flux de travail fera. La planification est toujours la partie la plus importante. Répondez à ces questions pour vous aider à planifier :&lt;br /&gt;
* Combien de groupes d&#039;utilisateurs (même s&#039;il n&#039;y a qu&#039;un seul utilisateur dans le groupe) doivent intervenir?&lt;br /&gt;
* Combien d&#039;actions y aura-t-il dans le flux de travail?&lt;br /&gt;
* L&#039;un ou l&#039;autre des groupes aura-t-il besoin de recevoir des notifications pour prendre les mesures qui s&#039;imposent ?&lt;br /&gt;
* Les groupes effectueront-ils leurs actions à partir du frontend ou du backend ou de la combinaison des deux ?&lt;br /&gt;
* Quelles &amp;quot;Catégories&amp;quot; se verront attribuer un/ce flux de travail ?&lt;br /&gt;
* Les différentes catégories auront-elles des flux de travail différents ?&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Scénario #1 ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*Un groupe d&#039;utilisateurs ajoute des messages de blog mais ne peut pas les publier&lt;br /&gt;
*Le deuxième groupe d&#039;utilisateurs approuve les messages du blog et les publie.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Créer de nouveaux groupes d&#039;utilisateurs ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
# Allez dans &#039;&#039;&#039;Utilisateurs&#039;&#039;&#039; {{rarr}} &#039;&#039;&#039;Groupes&#039;&#039;&#039; {{rarr}} Nouveau&lt;br /&gt;
# Saisissez le &#039;&#039;&#039;Titre du groupe&#039;&#039;&#039;:&#039;&#039;Affiches du Blog&#039;&#039;&#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
# Sélectionnez le &#039;&#039;&#039;Group Parent&#039;&#039;&#039; : Enregistré&lt;br /&gt;
# Cliquez sur Enregistrer &amp;amp; Nouveau.&lt;br /&gt;
# Saisissez le &#039;&#039;&#039;Titre du groupe&#039;&#039;&#039;:&#039;&#039;Modérateur de Blog&#039;&#039;&#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
# Sélectionnez le &#039;&#039;&#039;Group Parent&#039;&#039;&#039; : Enregistré&lt;br /&gt;
# Cliquez sur Enregistrer &amp;amp; fermer.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Créer de nouveaux utilisateurs (ou modifier des utilisateurs existants) ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Using the directions on [[S:MyLanguage/Adding_a_new_user|create your new &#039;&#039;&#039;Users&#039;&#039;&#039;]].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
# Create &#039;&#039;&#039;User(s)&#039;&#039;&#039; and assign them to the &#039;&#039;Blog Posters&#039;&#039; &#039;&#039;&#039;User Group&#039;&#039;&#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
# Create &#039;&#039;&#039;User(s)&#039;&#039;&#039; and assign them to the &#039;&#039;Blog Approvers&#039;&#039; &#039;&#039;&#039;User Group&#039;&#039;&#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;NOTE&#039;&#039;&#039;: If you want your &#039;&#039;&#039;Users&#039;&#039;&#039; to receive notifications for a &#039;&#039;&#039;Transition&#039;&#039;&#039; (see more below) then select Yes for &#039;&#039;&#039;Receives System Emails&#039;&#039;&#039; for each &#039;&#039;&#039;User&#039;&#039;&#039; to receive notifications.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Créer le flux de travail ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
# Go to &#039;&#039;&#039;Content&#039;&#039;&#039; {{rarr}} &#039;&#039;&#039;Workflows&#039;&#039;&#039; {{rarr}} New&lt;br /&gt;
# Enter the &#039;&#039;&#039;Title&#039;&#039;&#039;: &#039;&#039;Blog Workflow&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
# Cliquez sur Enregistrer &amp;amp; fermer.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;NOTE&#039;&#039;&#039;: Only mark this Default if it will be the Default Workflow for ALL NEW Articles created in Categories &#039;&#039;&#039;without&#039;&#039;&#039; an assigned Workflow. Existing Articles will not be changed.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Créer le(s) statut(s) du flux de travail ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
# From the &#039;&#039;&#039;Workflows&#039;&#039;&#039; list view, click the “&#039;&#039;&#039;manage&#039;&#039;&#039;” link in the &#039;&#039;&#039;States&#039;&#039;&#039; column next to the &#039;&#039;Blog Workflow&#039;&#039;. You will see the default &#039;&#039;&#039;State&#039;&#039;&#039; of Published.&lt;br /&gt;
# Click the &#039;&#039;&#039;Default State&#039;&#039;&#039; for Published and change the &#039;&#039;&#039;Title&#039;&#039;&#039; to: &#039;&#039;Publish new blog post&#039;&#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
# The &#039;&#039;&#039;Condition of items in this state: Published&#039;&#039;&#039; will remain unchanged.&lt;br /&gt;
# Cliquez sur Enregistrer &amp;amp; nouveau.&lt;br /&gt;
# Enter the &#039;&#039;&#039;Title&#039;&#039;&#039;: &#039;&#039;New blog post, unpublished&#039;&#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
# Change the &#039;&#039;&#039;Condition&#039;&#039;&#039; of items in this &#039;&#039;&#039;State&#039;&#039;&#039; to Unpublished.&lt;br /&gt;
# Change the &#039;&#039;&#039;Default&#039;&#039;&#039; to Yes (Green) since this is the &#039;&#039;&#039;Default State&#039;&#039;&#039; for Articles in this Workflow.&lt;br /&gt;
# Cliquez sur Enregistrer &amp;amp; fermer.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Créer la transition pour le flux de travail ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
There are two ways to access &#039;&#039;&#039;Transitions&#039;&#039;&#039;:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
# Click &#039;&#039;&#039;Transitions&#039;&#039;&#039; from the sidebar while in the States list view.&lt;br /&gt;
# Click the blue line with arrows in both directions from the &#039;&#039;&#039;Workflow&#039;&#039;&#039; list view.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
# Go to &#039;&#039;&#039;Transitions&#039;&#039;&#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
# Cliquez sur Nouveau&lt;br /&gt;
# Add the &#039;&#039;&#039;Title&#039;&#039;&#039;: &#039;&#039;Approve/Publish&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
# Select the &#039;&#039;&#039;State&#039;&#039;&#039; &#039;&#039;New blog post – unpublished&#039;&#039; in the &#039;&#039;&#039;From state&#039;&#039;&#039; field drop-down.&lt;br /&gt;
# Select the &#039;&#039;&#039;State&#039;&#039;&#039; &#039;&#039;Publish new blog post&#039;&#039; in the &#039;&#039;&#039;To state&#039;&#039;&#039; field drop-down.&lt;br /&gt;
# Click Save and remain in this &#039;&#039;&#039;Transition&#039;&#039;&#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
# Click the &#039;&#039;&#039;Permissions&#039;&#039;&#039; tab of the &#039;&#039;&#039;Transition&#039;&#039;&#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
# Select the &#039;&#039;&#039;User Group&#039;&#039;&#039; &#039;&#039;Blog Approvers&#039;&#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
# For the &#039;&#039;&#039;Action&#039;&#039;&#039; &#039;&#039;&#039;Execute transition&#039;&#039;&#039;, select &#039;&#039;&#039;Allowed&#039;&#039;&#039; from the &#039;&#039;&#039;Select New Setting&#039;&#039;&#039; drop-down.&lt;br /&gt;
# Cliquez sur Enregistrer &amp;amp; fermer.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;NOTE&#039;&#039;&#039;: You can quickly access your &#039;&#039;&#039;States&#039;&#039;&#039; and &#039;&#039;&#039;Transitions&#039;&#039;&#039; from the &#039;&#039;&#039;Workflow&#039;&#039;&#039; list view. The orange circle is the States and has the quantity of States listed next to the Workflow Title. The blue line with arrows in both directions is for Transitions and shows the quantity of Transitions for the Workflow.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Assign Workflow &amp;amp; User Group Permissions to the Category ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
# Allez dans &#039;&#039;&#039;Contenu&#039;&#039;&#039; {{rarr}} &#039;&#039;&#039;Catégories&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
# Access the &#039;&#039;Blog&#039;&#039; &#039;&#039;&#039;Category&#039;&#039;&#039; (or create it if necessary) and click the &#039;&#039;&#039;Workflow&#039;&#039;&#039; tab.&lt;br /&gt;
# Click the drop-down and select &#039;&#039;Blog Workflow&#039;&#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
# Cliquez sur l&#039;onglet &#039;&#039;&#039;Droits&#039;&#039;&#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
# Click on the &#039;&#039;Blog Poster&#039;&#039; &#039;&#039;&#039;User Group&#039;&#039;&#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
# For the &#039;&#039;&#039;Action&#039;&#039;&#039; Create and Edit, change the &#039;&#039;&#039;Select New Setting&#039;&#039;&#039; drop-down to Allowed.&lt;br /&gt;
# Click on the &#039;&#039;Blog Approvers&#039;&#039; &#039;&#039;&#039;User Group&#039;&#039;&#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
# For the &#039;&#039;&#039;Action&#039;&#039;&#039; Delete, Edit, Edit State and Edit Own, change the &#039;&#039;&#039;Select New Setting&#039;&#039;&#039; drop-down to Allowed.&lt;br /&gt;
# Cliquez sur Enregistrer &amp;amp; fermer.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
For more information on ACL and assigning permissions to User Groups, see the [[S:MyLanguage/J3.x:Access_Control_List_Tutorial|ACL Tutorial]].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Paramétrer les notifications ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Notifications use the Joomla core Messaging component. It is very basic. When enabled for Workflows, it will send a message to the User associated with the Group assigned to the Transition. The message simply states that they have a message in the site. It will then be their responsibility to login and check the articles that need approval and publish them.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;To set up notifications for the Workgroup Transitions:&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
# Allez dans &#039;&#039;&#039;Extensions&#039;&#039;&#039; {{rarr}} &#039;&#039;&#039;Plug-ins&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
# Click the &#039;&#039;&#039;Table Options&#039;&#039;&#039; button and &#039;&#039;&#039;Select Type&#039;&#039;&#039; of content&lt;br /&gt;
# Click on &#039;&#039;&#039;Content – Joomla&#039;&#039;&#039; and then toggle Yes for &#039;&#039;&#039;Email on transition execution&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
# Then make sure that the &#039;&#039;&#039;Users&#039;&#039;&#039; themselves have &#039;&#039;&#039;Receive System Emails&#039;&#039;&#039; toggled to Yes in &#039;&#039;&#039;Users&#039;&#039;&#039; {{rarr}} &#039;&#039;&#039;Manage&#039;&#039;&#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== To set it up so that Users can Post and Approve from the frontend ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
# Create a &#039;&#039;&#039;Menu Item&#039;&#039;&#039; for the &#039;&#039;&#039;Menu Item Type&#039;&#039;&#039; Login so that your Blog Posters can login.&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;&#039;&#039;&#039;Menus&#039;&#039;&#039; {{rarr}} &#039;&#039;Choose or create a menu&#039;&#039; {{rarr}} New {{rarr}} &#039;&#039;&#039;Users&#039;&#039;&#039; {{rarr}} &#039;&#039;&#039;Login&#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;OR&lt;br /&gt;
# Create a module for Login so that your Blog Posters can login.&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;&#039;&#039;&#039;Extensions&#039;&#039;&#039; {{rarr}} &#039;&#039;&#039;Modules&#039;&#039;&#039; {{rarr}} New {{rarr}} &#039;&#039;&#039;Login&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
# Add a &#039;&#039;&#039;Menu Item&#039;&#039;&#039; to a Menu that displays only for the &#039;&#039;&#039;Registered User Group&#039;&#039;&#039; to Add an article&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;&#039;&#039;&#039;Menu Item Type Articles&#039;&#039;&#039; {{rarr}} &#039;&#039;&#039;Create Article&#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;&#039;&#039;&#039;NOTE&#039;&#039;&#039;: this will display for all Registered Users unless you create an Access Level for your Blog Poster User Group and select this in the Menu Item under Access.&lt;br /&gt;
# When your &#039;&#039;&#039;User&#039;&#039;&#039; logs in, they add an &#039;&#039;&#039;Article&#039;&#039;&#039;, enter the content and Save.&lt;br /&gt;
# This will trigger a notification to the Blog Approvers Users that there is a new private message on the site. It doesn’t get more specific than that. Approvers should just come to the site and approve the Article. It will also send a message to Super Admins.&lt;br /&gt;
# When the Blog Approver logs in, they can navigate to where the new article will appear. They will be able to see the unpublished article and edit it/approve it/publish it. Then they can Save &amp;amp; Close and logout.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Admin note&#039;&#039;&#039;: Super Admins can use Batch to move existing Articles to a different workflow than it is currently assigned. It won’t make a difference if the Articles are already published.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Scénario #2 ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Ajoutez ici un autre scénario pour aider les autres à voir la puissance des flux de travail. Les documents peuvent être modifiés ou ajoutés par quiconque possèdant un compte.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Related Information==&lt;br /&gt;
See also:&lt;br /&gt;
* [[S:MyLanguage/Publishing_Workflow_Implementation|Publishing Workflow Implementation]]&lt;br /&gt;
* [[S:MyLanguage/Publishing_Workflow|Publishing Workflow]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;noinclude&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[Category:Google Summer of Code 2017{{#translation:}}]]&lt;br /&gt;
[[Category:Development{{#translation:}}]]&lt;br /&gt;
[[Category:Joomla! 4.x{{#translation:}}]]&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/noinclude&amp;gt;&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Wisgar</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://docs.sandbox.joomla.org/index.php?title=Translations:Publishing_Workflow/Scenarios/30/fr&amp;diff=636594</id>
		<title>Translations:Publishing Workflow/Scenarios/30/fr</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://docs.sandbox.joomla.org/index.php?title=Translations:Publishing_Workflow/Scenarios/30/fr&amp;diff=636594"/>
		<updated>2019-10-19T11:47:30Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Wisgar: Created page with &amp;quot;Sélectionnez le &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Group Parent&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; : Enregistré&amp;quot;&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;Sélectionnez le &#039;&#039;&#039;Group Parent&#039;&#039;&#039; : Enregistré&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Wisgar</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://docs.sandbox.joomla.org/index.php?title=Publishing_Workflow/Scenarios/fr&amp;diff=636589</id>
		<title>Publishing Workflow/Scenarios/fr</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://docs.sandbox.joomla.org/index.php?title=Publishing_Workflow/Scenarios/fr&amp;diff=636589"/>
		<updated>2019-10-19T11:47:22Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Wisgar: Created page with &amp;quot;Saisissez le &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Titre du groupe&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;:&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Modérateur de Blog&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;.&amp;quot;&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;&amp;lt;noinclude&amp;gt;&amp;lt;languages /&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/noinclude&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
==Implémentation des flux de travail ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
L&#039;ordre général des tâches pour créer un nouveau flux de travail est :&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
# Planifier&lt;br /&gt;
# Ajouter un nouveau &#039;&#039;&#039;Groupes d&#039;utilisateurs&#039;&#039;&#039; (facultatif)&lt;br /&gt;
# Ajouter de nouveaux &#039;&#039;&#039;Utilisateurs&#039;&#039;&#039; et les assigner aux groupes d&#039;utilisateurs appropriés (facultatif)&lt;br /&gt;
# Créer le the nouveau &amp;quot;flux de travail&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
# Créez l&#039;(es) état(s) pour ce flux de travail avec la(les) condition(s).&lt;br /&gt;
# Créer la(les) &#039;&#039;&#039;Transition(s)&#039;&#039;&#039; du flux de travail&lt;br /&gt;
# Ajoutez ou modifiez la &#039;&#039;&#039;Catégorie&#039;&#039;&#039; applicable pour ajouter le &#039;&#039;&#039;Flux de travail&#039;&#039;&#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
# Modifier les &#039;&#039;Permissions&#039;&#039;&#039; de la &#039;&#039;Catégorie&#039;&#039; de sorte que les nouveaux&#039;&#039;Groupes d&#039;utilisateurs&#039;&#039; aient les permissions de faire seulement ce qu&#039;ils sont en droit de faire&lt;br /&gt;
# Paramétrer les notifications si nécessaire&lt;br /&gt;
# Configurer l&#039;accès de connexion pour les &#039;&#039;&#039;Utilisateurs&#039;&#039;&#039; sur le frontend (ou le backend : non inclus dans ce tutoriel) (facultatif)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Planification ==&lt;br /&gt;
Planifiez ce que votre flux de travail fera. La planification est toujours la partie la plus importante. Répondez à ces questions pour vous aider à planifier :&lt;br /&gt;
* Combien de groupes d&#039;utilisateurs (même s&#039;il n&#039;y a qu&#039;un seul utilisateur dans le groupe) doivent intervenir?&lt;br /&gt;
* Combien d&#039;actions y aura-t-il dans le flux de travail?&lt;br /&gt;
* L&#039;un ou l&#039;autre des groupes aura-t-il besoin de recevoir des notifications pour prendre les mesures qui s&#039;imposent ?&lt;br /&gt;
* Les groupes effectueront-ils leurs actions à partir du frontend ou du backend ou de la combinaison des deux ?&lt;br /&gt;
* Quelles &amp;quot;Catégories&amp;quot; se verront attribuer un/ce flux de travail ?&lt;br /&gt;
* Les différentes catégories auront-elles des flux de travail différents ?&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Scénario #1 ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*Un groupe d&#039;utilisateurs ajoute des messages de blog mais ne peut pas les publier&lt;br /&gt;
*Le deuxième groupe d&#039;utilisateurs approuve les messages du blog et les publie.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Créer de nouveaux groupes d&#039;utilisateurs ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
# Allez dans &#039;&#039;&#039;Utilisateurs&#039;&#039;&#039; {{rarr}} &#039;&#039;&#039;Groupes&#039;&#039;&#039; {{rarr}} Nouveau&lt;br /&gt;
# Saisissez le &#039;&#039;&#039;Titre du groupe&#039;&#039;&#039;:&#039;&#039;Affiches du Blog&#039;&#039;&#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
# Sélectionnez le &#039;&#039;&#039;Group Parent&#039;&#039;&#039; : Enregistré&lt;br /&gt;
# Cliquez sur Enregistrer &amp;amp; Nouveau.&lt;br /&gt;
# Saisissez le &#039;&#039;&#039;Titre du groupe&#039;&#039;&#039;:&#039;&#039;Modérateur de Blog&#039;&#039;&#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
# Select the &#039;&#039;&#039;Group Parent&#039;&#039;&#039;: Registered&lt;br /&gt;
# Cliquez sur Enregistrer &amp;amp; fermer.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Créer de nouveaux utilisateurs (ou modifier des utilisateurs existants) ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Using the directions on [[S:MyLanguage/Adding_a_new_user|create your new &#039;&#039;&#039;Users&#039;&#039;&#039;]].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
# Create &#039;&#039;&#039;User(s)&#039;&#039;&#039; and assign them to the &#039;&#039;Blog Posters&#039;&#039; &#039;&#039;&#039;User Group&#039;&#039;&#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
# Create &#039;&#039;&#039;User(s)&#039;&#039;&#039; and assign them to the &#039;&#039;Blog Approvers&#039;&#039; &#039;&#039;&#039;User Group&#039;&#039;&#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;NOTE&#039;&#039;&#039;: If you want your &#039;&#039;&#039;Users&#039;&#039;&#039; to receive notifications for a &#039;&#039;&#039;Transition&#039;&#039;&#039; (see more below) then select Yes for &#039;&#039;&#039;Receives System Emails&#039;&#039;&#039; for each &#039;&#039;&#039;User&#039;&#039;&#039; to receive notifications.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Créer le flux de travail ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
# Go to &#039;&#039;&#039;Content&#039;&#039;&#039; {{rarr}} &#039;&#039;&#039;Workflows&#039;&#039;&#039; {{rarr}} New&lt;br /&gt;
# Enter the &#039;&#039;&#039;Title&#039;&#039;&#039;: &#039;&#039;Blog Workflow&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
# Cliquez sur Enregistrer &amp;amp; fermer.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;NOTE&#039;&#039;&#039;: Only mark this Default if it will be the Default Workflow for ALL NEW Articles created in Categories &#039;&#039;&#039;without&#039;&#039;&#039; an assigned Workflow. Existing Articles will not be changed.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Créer le(s) statut(s) du flux de travail ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
# From the &#039;&#039;&#039;Workflows&#039;&#039;&#039; list view, click the “&#039;&#039;&#039;manage&#039;&#039;&#039;” link in the &#039;&#039;&#039;States&#039;&#039;&#039; column next to the &#039;&#039;Blog Workflow&#039;&#039;. You will see the default &#039;&#039;&#039;State&#039;&#039;&#039; of Published.&lt;br /&gt;
# Click the &#039;&#039;&#039;Default State&#039;&#039;&#039; for Published and change the &#039;&#039;&#039;Title&#039;&#039;&#039; to: &#039;&#039;Publish new blog post&#039;&#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
# The &#039;&#039;&#039;Condition of items in this state: Published&#039;&#039;&#039; will remain unchanged.&lt;br /&gt;
# Cliquez sur Enregistrer &amp;amp; nouveau.&lt;br /&gt;
# Enter the &#039;&#039;&#039;Title&#039;&#039;&#039;: &#039;&#039;New blog post, unpublished&#039;&#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
# Change the &#039;&#039;&#039;Condition&#039;&#039;&#039; of items in this &#039;&#039;&#039;State&#039;&#039;&#039; to Unpublished.&lt;br /&gt;
# Change the &#039;&#039;&#039;Default&#039;&#039;&#039; to Yes (Green) since this is the &#039;&#039;&#039;Default State&#039;&#039;&#039; for Articles in this Workflow.&lt;br /&gt;
# Cliquez sur Enregistrer &amp;amp; fermer.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Créer la transition pour le flux de travail ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
There are two ways to access &#039;&#039;&#039;Transitions&#039;&#039;&#039;:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
# Click &#039;&#039;&#039;Transitions&#039;&#039;&#039; from the sidebar while in the States list view.&lt;br /&gt;
# Click the blue line with arrows in both directions from the &#039;&#039;&#039;Workflow&#039;&#039;&#039; list view.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
# Go to &#039;&#039;&#039;Transitions&#039;&#039;&#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
# Cliquez sur Nouveau&lt;br /&gt;
# Add the &#039;&#039;&#039;Title&#039;&#039;&#039;: &#039;&#039;Approve/Publish&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
# Select the &#039;&#039;&#039;State&#039;&#039;&#039; &#039;&#039;New blog post – unpublished&#039;&#039; in the &#039;&#039;&#039;From state&#039;&#039;&#039; field drop-down.&lt;br /&gt;
# Select the &#039;&#039;&#039;State&#039;&#039;&#039; &#039;&#039;Publish new blog post&#039;&#039; in the &#039;&#039;&#039;To state&#039;&#039;&#039; field drop-down.&lt;br /&gt;
# Click Save and remain in this &#039;&#039;&#039;Transition&#039;&#039;&#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
# Click the &#039;&#039;&#039;Permissions&#039;&#039;&#039; tab of the &#039;&#039;&#039;Transition&#039;&#039;&#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
# Select the &#039;&#039;&#039;User Group&#039;&#039;&#039; &#039;&#039;Blog Approvers&#039;&#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
# For the &#039;&#039;&#039;Action&#039;&#039;&#039; &#039;&#039;&#039;Execute transition&#039;&#039;&#039;, select &#039;&#039;&#039;Allowed&#039;&#039;&#039; from the &#039;&#039;&#039;Select New Setting&#039;&#039;&#039; drop-down.&lt;br /&gt;
# Cliquez sur Enregistrer &amp;amp; fermer.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;NOTE&#039;&#039;&#039;: You can quickly access your &#039;&#039;&#039;States&#039;&#039;&#039; and &#039;&#039;&#039;Transitions&#039;&#039;&#039; from the &#039;&#039;&#039;Workflow&#039;&#039;&#039; list view. The orange circle is the States and has the quantity of States listed next to the Workflow Title. The blue line with arrows in both directions is for Transitions and shows the quantity of Transitions for the Workflow.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Assign Workflow &amp;amp; User Group Permissions to the Category ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
# Allez dans &#039;&#039;&#039;Contenu&#039;&#039;&#039; {{rarr}} &#039;&#039;&#039;Catégories&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
# Access the &#039;&#039;Blog&#039;&#039; &#039;&#039;&#039;Category&#039;&#039;&#039; (or create it if necessary) and click the &#039;&#039;&#039;Workflow&#039;&#039;&#039; tab.&lt;br /&gt;
# Click the drop-down and select &#039;&#039;Blog Workflow&#039;&#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
# Cliquez sur l&#039;onglet &#039;&#039;&#039;Droits&#039;&#039;&#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
# Click on the &#039;&#039;Blog Poster&#039;&#039; &#039;&#039;&#039;User Group&#039;&#039;&#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
# For the &#039;&#039;&#039;Action&#039;&#039;&#039; Create and Edit, change the &#039;&#039;&#039;Select New Setting&#039;&#039;&#039; drop-down to Allowed.&lt;br /&gt;
# Click on the &#039;&#039;Blog Approvers&#039;&#039; &#039;&#039;&#039;User Group&#039;&#039;&#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
# For the &#039;&#039;&#039;Action&#039;&#039;&#039; Delete, Edit, Edit State and Edit Own, change the &#039;&#039;&#039;Select New Setting&#039;&#039;&#039; drop-down to Allowed.&lt;br /&gt;
# Cliquez sur Enregistrer &amp;amp; fermer.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
For more information on ACL and assigning permissions to User Groups, see the [[S:MyLanguage/J3.x:Access_Control_List_Tutorial|ACL Tutorial]].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Paramétrer les notifications ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Notifications use the Joomla core Messaging component. It is very basic. When enabled for Workflows, it will send a message to the User associated with the Group assigned to the Transition. The message simply states that they have a message in the site. It will then be their responsibility to login and check the articles that need approval and publish them.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;To set up notifications for the Workgroup Transitions:&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
# Allez dans &#039;&#039;&#039;Extensions&#039;&#039;&#039; {{rarr}} &#039;&#039;&#039;Plug-ins&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
# Click the &#039;&#039;&#039;Table Options&#039;&#039;&#039; button and &#039;&#039;&#039;Select Type&#039;&#039;&#039; of content&lt;br /&gt;
# Click on &#039;&#039;&#039;Content – Joomla&#039;&#039;&#039; and then toggle Yes for &#039;&#039;&#039;Email on transition execution&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
# Then make sure that the &#039;&#039;&#039;Users&#039;&#039;&#039; themselves have &#039;&#039;&#039;Receive System Emails&#039;&#039;&#039; toggled to Yes in &#039;&#039;&#039;Users&#039;&#039;&#039; {{rarr}} &#039;&#039;&#039;Manage&#039;&#039;&#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== To set it up so that Users can Post and Approve from the frontend ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
# Create a &#039;&#039;&#039;Menu Item&#039;&#039;&#039; for the &#039;&#039;&#039;Menu Item Type&#039;&#039;&#039; Login so that your Blog Posters can login.&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;&#039;&#039;&#039;Menus&#039;&#039;&#039; {{rarr}} &#039;&#039;Choose or create a menu&#039;&#039; {{rarr}} New {{rarr}} &#039;&#039;&#039;Users&#039;&#039;&#039; {{rarr}} &#039;&#039;&#039;Login&#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;OR&lt;br /&gt;
# Create a module for Login so that your Blog Posters can login.&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;&#039;&#039;&#039;Extensions&#039;&#039;&#039; {{rarr}} &#039;&#039;&#039;Modules&#039;&#039;&#039; {{rarr}} New {{rarr}} &#039;&#039;&#039;Login&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
# Add a &#039;&#039;&#039;Menu Item&#039;&#039;&#039; to a Menu that displays only for the &#039;&#039;&#039;Registered User Group&#039;&#039;&#039; to Add an article&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;&#039;&#039;&#039;Menu Item Type Articles&#039;&#039;&#039; {{rarr}} &#039;&#039;&#039;Create Article&#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;&#039;&#039;&#039;NOTE&#039;&#039;&#039;: this will display for all Registered Users unless you create an Access Level for your Blog Poster User Group and select this in the Menu Item under Access.&lt;br /&gt;
# When your &#039;&#039;&#039;User&#039;&#039;&#039; logs in, they add an &#039;&#039;&#039;Article&#039;&#039;&#039;, enter the content and Save.&lt;br /&gt;
# This will trigger a notification to the Blog Approvers Users that there is a new private message on the site. It doesn’t get more specific than that. Approvers should just come to the site and approve the Article. It will also send a message to Super Admins.&lt;br /&gt;
# When the Blog Approver logs in, they can navigate to where the new article will appear. They will be able to see the unpublished article and edit it/approve it/publish it. Then they can Save &amp;amp; Close and logout.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Admin note&#039;&#039;&#039;: Super Admins can use Batch to move existing Articles to a different workflow than it is currently assigned. It won’t make a difference if the Articles are already published.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Scénario #2 ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Ajoutez ici un autre scénario pour aider les autres à voir la puissance des flux de travail. Les documents peuvent être modifiés ou ajoutés par quiconque possèdant un compte.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Related Information==&lt;br /&gt;
See also:&lt;br /&gt;
* [[S:MyLanguage/Publishing_Workflow_Implementation|Publishing Workflow Implementation]]&lt;br /&gt;
* [[S:MyLanguage/Publishing_Workflow|Publishing Workflow]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;noinclude&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[Category:Google Summer of Code 2017{{#translation:}}]]&lt;br /&gt;
[[Category:Development{{#translation:}}]]&lt;br /&gt;
[[Category:Joomla! 4.x{{#translation:}}]]&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/noinclude&amp;gt;&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Wisgar</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://docs.sandbox.joomla.org/index.php?title=Translations:Publishing_Workflow/Scenarios/29/fr&amp;diff=636588</id>
		<title>Translations:Publishing Workflow/Scenarios/29/fr</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://docs.sandbox.joomla.org/index.php?title=Translations:Publishing_Workflow/Scenarios/29/fr&amp;diff=636588"/>
		<updated>2019-10-19T11:47:22Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Wisgar: Created page with &amp;quot;Saisissez le &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Titre du groupe&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;:&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Modérateur de Blog&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;.&amp;quot;&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;Saisissez le &#039;&#039;&#039;Titre du groupe&#039;&#039;&#039;:&#039;&#039;Modérateur de Blog&#039;&#039;&#039;.&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Wisgar</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://docs.sandbox.joomla.org/index.php?title=Publishing_Workflow/Scenarios/fr&amp;diff=636554</id>
		<title>Publishing Workflow/Scenarios/fr</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://docs.sandbox.joomla.org/index.php?title=Publishing_Workflow/Scenarios/fr&amp;diff=636554"/>
		<updated>2019-10-19T11:43:16Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Wisgar: &lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;&amp;lt;noinclude&amp;gt;&amp;lt;languages /&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/noinclude&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
==Implémentation des flux de travail ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
L&#039;ordre général des tâches pour créer un nouveau flux de travail est :&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
# Planifier&lt;br /&gt;
# Ajouter un nouveau &#039;&#039;&#039;Groupes d&#039;utilisateurs&#039;&#039;&#039; (facultatif)&lt;br /&gt;
# Ajouter de nouveaux &#039;&#039;&#039;Utilisateurs&#039;&#039;&#039; et les assigner aux groupes d&#039;utilisateurs appropriés (facultatif)&lt;br /&gt;
# Créer le the nouveau &amp;quot;flux de travail&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
# Créez l&#039;(es) état(s) pour ce flux de travail avec la(les) condition(s).&lt;br /&gt;
# Créer la(les) &#039;&#039;&#039;Transition(s)&#039;&#039;&#039; du flux de travail&lt;br /&gt;
# Ajoutez ou modifiez la &#039;&#039;&#039;Catégorie&#039;&#039;&#039; applicable pour ajouter le &#039;&#039;&#039;Flux de travail&#039;&#039;&#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
# Modifier les &#039;&#039;Permissions&#039;&#039;&#039; de la &#039;&#039;Catégorie&#039;&#039; de sorte que les nouveaux&#039;&#039;Groupes d&#039;utilisateurs&#039;&#039; aient les permissions de faire seulement ce qu&#039;ils sont en droit de faire&lt;br /&gt;
# Paramétrer les notifications si nécessaire&lt;br /&gt;
# Configurer l&#039;accès de connexion pour les &#039;&#039;&#039;Utilisateurs&#039;&#039;&#039; sur le frontend (ou le backend : non inclus dans ce tutoriel) (facultatif)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Planification ==&lt;br /&gt;
Planifiez ce que votre flux de travail fera. La planification est toujours la partie la plus importante. Répondez à ces questions pour vous aider à planifier :&lt;br /&gt;
* Combien de groupes d&#039;utilisateurs (même s&#039;il n&#039;y a qu&#039;un seul utilisateur dans le groupe) doivent intervenir?&lt;br /&gt;
* Combien d&#039;actions y aura-t-il dans le flux de travail?&lt;br /&gt;
* L&#039;un ou l&#039;autre des groupes aura-t-il besoin de recevoir des notifications pour prendre les mesures qui s&#039;imposent ?&lt;br /&gt;
* Les groupes effectueront-ils leurs actions à partir du frontend ou du backend ou de la combinaison des deux ?&lt;br /&gt;
* Quelles &amp;quot;Catégories&amp;quot; se verront attribuer un/ce flux de travail ?&lt;br /&gt;
* Les différentes catégories auront-elles des flux de travail différents ?&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Scénario #1 ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*Un groupe d&#039;utilisateurs ajoute des messages de blog mais ne peut pas les publier&lt;br /&gt;
*Le deuxième groupe d&#039;utilisateurs approuve les messages du blog et les publie.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Créer de nouveaux groupes d&#039;utilisateurs ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
# Allez dans &#039;&#039;&#039;Utilisateurs&#039;&#039;&#039; {{rarr}} &#039;&#039;&#039;Groupes&#039;&#039;&#039; {{rarr}} Nouveau&lt;br /&gt;
# Saisissez le &#039;&#039;&#039;Titre du groupe&#039;&#039;&#039;:&#039;&#039;Affiches du Blog&#039;&#039;&#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
# Sélectionnez le &#039;&#039;&#039;Group Parent&#039;&#039;&#039; : Enregistré&lt;br /&gt;
# Cliquez sur Enregistrer &amp;amp; Nouveau.&lt;br /&gt;
# Enter the &#039;&#039;&#039;Group Title&#039;&#039;&#039;: &#039;&#039;Blog Approvers&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
# Select the &#039;&#039;&#039;Group Parent&#039;&#039;&#039;: Registered&lt;br /&gt;
# Cliquez sur Enregistrer &amp;amp; fermer.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Créer de nouveaux utilisateurs (ou modifier des utilisateurs existants) ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Using the directions on [[S:MyLanguage/Adding_a_new_user|create your new &#039;&#039;&#039;Users&#039;&#039;&#039;]].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
# Create &#039;&#039;&#039;User(s)&#039;&#039;&#039; and assign them to the &#039;&#039;Blog Posters&#039;&#039; &#039;&#039;&#039;User Group&#039;&#039;&#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
# Create &#039;&#039;&#039;User(s)&#039;&#039;&#039; and assign them to the &#039;&#039;Blog Approvers&#039;&#039; &#039;&#039;&#039;User Group&#039;&#039;&#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;NOTE&#039;&#039;&#039;: If you want your &#039;&#039;&#039;Users&#039;&#039;&#039; to receive notifications for a &#039;&#039;&#039;Transition&#039;&#039;&#039; (see more below) then select Yes for &#039;&#039;&#039;Receives System Emails&#039;&#039;&#039; for each &#039;&#039;&#039;User&#039;&#039;&#039; to receive notifications.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Créer le flux de travail ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
# Go to &#039;&#039;&#039;Content&#039;&#039;&#039; {{rarr}} &#039;&#039;&#039;Workflows&#039;&#039;&#039; {{rarr}} New&lt;br /&gt;
# Enter the &#039;&#039;&#039;Title&#039;&#039;&#039;: &#039;&#039;Blog Workflow&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
# Cliquez sur Enregistrer &amp;amp; fermer.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;NOTE&#039;&#039;&#039;: Only mark this Default if it will be the Default Workflow for ALL NEW Articles created in Categories &#039;&#039;&#039;without&#039;&#039;&#039; an assigned Workflow. Existing Articles will not be changed.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Créer le(s) statut(s) du flux de travail ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
# From the &#039;&#039;&#039;Workflows&#039;&#039;&#039; list view, click the “&#039;&#039;&#039;manage&#039;&#039;&#039;” link in the &#039;&#039;&#039;States&#039;&#039;&#039; column next to the &#039;&#039;Blog Workflow&#039;&#039;. You will see the default &#039;&#039;&#039;State&#039;&#039;&#039; of Published.&lt;br /&gt;
# Click the &#039;&#039;&#039;Default State&#039;&#039;&#039; for Published and change the &#039;&#039;&#039;Title&#039;&#039;&#039; to: &#039;&#039;Publish new blog post&#039;&#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
# The &#039;&#039;&#039;Condition of items in this state: Published&#039;&#039;&#039; will remain unchanged.&lt;br /&gt;
# Cliquez sur Enregistrer &amp;amp; nouveau.&lt;br /&gt;
# Enter the &#039;&#039;&#039;Title&#039;&#039;&#039;: &#039;&#039;New blog post, unpublished&#039;&#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
# Change the &#039;&#039;&#039;Condition&#039;&#039;&#039; of items in this &#039;&#039;&#039;State&#039;&#039;&#039; to Unpublished.&lt;br /&gt;
# Change the &#039;&#039;&#039;Default&#039;&#039;&#039; to Yes (Green) since this is the &#039;&#039;&#039;Default State&#039;&#039;&#039; for Articles in this Workflow.&lt;br /&gt;
# Cliquez sur Enregistrer &amp;amp; fermer.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Créer la transition pour le flux de travail ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
There are two ways to access &#039;&#039;&#039;Transitions&#039;&#039;&#039;:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
# Click &#039;&#039;&#039;Transitions&#039;&#039;&#039; from the sidebar while in the States list view.&lt;br /&gt;
# Click the blue line with arrows in both directions from the &#039;&#039;&#039;Workflow&#039;&#039;&#039; list view.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
# Go to &#039;&#039;&#039;Transitions&#039;&#039;&#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
# Cliquez sur Nouveau&lt;br /&gt;
# Add the &#039;&#039;&#039;Title&#039;&#039;&#039;: &#039;&#039;Approve/Publish&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
# Select the &#039;&#039;&#039;State&#039;&#039;&#039; &#039;&#039;New blog post – unpublished&#039;&#039; in the &#039;&#039;&#039;From state&#039;&#039;&#039; field drop-down.&lt;br /&gt;
# Select the &#039;&#039;&#039;State&#039;&#039;&#039; &#039;&#039;Publish new blog post&#039;&#039; in the &#039;&#039;&#039;To state&#039;&#039;&#039; field drop-down.&lt;br /&gt;
# Click Save and remain in this &#039;&#039;&#039;Transition&#039;&#039;&#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
# Click the &#039;&#039;&#039;Permissions&#039;&#039;&#039; tab of the &#039;&#039;&#039;Transition&#039;&#039;&#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
# Select the &#039;&#039;&#039;User Group&#039;&#039;&#039; &#039;&#039;Blog Approvers&#039;&#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
# For the &#039;&#039;&#039;Action&#039;&#039;&#039; &#039;&#039;&#039;Execute transition&#039;&#039;&#039;, select &#039;&#039;&#039;Allowed&#039;&#039;&#039; from the &#039;&#039;&#039;Select New Setting&#039;&#039;&#039; drop-down.&lt;br /&gt;
# Cliquez sur Enregistrer &amp;amp; fermer.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;NOTE&#039;&#039;&#039;: You can quickly access your &#039;&#039;&#039;States&#039;&#039;&#039; and &#039;&#039;&#039;Transitions&#039;&#039;&#039; from the &#039;&#039;&#039;Workflow&#039;&#039;&#039; list view. The orange circle is the States and has the quantity of States listed next to the Workflow Title. The blue line with arrows in both directions is for Transitions and shows the quantity of Transitions for the Workflow.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Assign Workflow &amp;amp; User Group Permissions to the Category ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
# Allez dans &#039;&#039;&#039;Contenu&#039;&#039;&#039; {{rarr}} &#039;&#039;&#039;Catégories&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
# Access the &#039;&#039;Blog&#039;&#039; &#039;&#039;&#039;Category&#039;&#039;&#039; (or create it if necessary) and click the &#039;&#039;&#039;Workflow&#039;&#039;&#039; tab.&lt;br /&gt;
# Click the drop-down and select &#039;&#039;Blog Workflow&#039;&#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
# Cliquez sur l&#039;onglet &#039;&#039;&#039;Droits&#039;&#039;&#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
# Click on the &#039;&#039;Blog Poster&#039;&#039; &#039;&#039;&#039;User Group&#039;&#039;&#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
# For the &#039;&#039;&#039;Action&#039;&#039;&#039; Create and Edit, change the &#039;&#039;&#039;Select New Setting&#039;&#039;&#039; drop-down to Allowed.&lt;br /&gt;
# Click on the &#039;&#039;Blog Approvers&#039;&#039; &#039;&#039;&#039;User Group&#039;&#039;&#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
# For the &#039;&#039;&#039;Action&#039;&#039;&#039; Delete, Edit, Edit State and Edit Own, change the &#039;&#039;&#039;Select New Setting&#039;&#039;&#039; drop-down to Allowed.&lt;br /&gt;
# Cliquez sur Enregistrer &amp;amp; fermer.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
For more information on ACL and assigning permissions to User Groups, see the [[S:MyLanguage/J3.x:Access_Control_List_Tutorial|ACL Tutorial]].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Paramétrer les notifications ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Notifications use the Joomla core Messaging component. It is very basic. When enabled for Workflows, it will send a message to the User associated with the Group assigned to the Transition. The message simply states that they have a message in the site. It will then be their responsibility to login and check the articles that need approval and publish them.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;To set up notifications for the Workgroup Transitions:&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
# Allez dans &#039;&#039;&#039;Extensions&#039;&#039;&#039; {{rarr}} &#039;&#039;&#039;Plug-ins&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
# Click the &#039;&#039;&#039;Table Options&#039;&#039;&#039; button and &#039;&#039;&#039;Select Type&#039;&#039;&#039; of content&lt;br /&gt;
# Click on &#039;&#039;&#039;Content – Joomla&#039;&#039;&#039; and then toggle Yes for &#039;&#039;&#039;Email on transition execution&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
# Then make sure that the &#039;&#039;&#039;Users&#039;&#039;&#039; themselves have &#039;&#039;&#039;Receive System Emails&#039;&#039;&#039; toggled to Yes in &#039;&#039;&#039;Users&#039;&#039;&#039; {{rarr}} &#039;&#039;&#039;Manage&#039;&#039;&#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== To set it up so that Users can Post and Approve from the frontend ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
# Create a &#039;&#039;&#039;Menu Item&#039;&#039;&#039; for the &#039;&#039;&#039;Menu Item Type&#039;&#039;&#039; Login so that your Blog Posters can login.&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;&#039;&#039;&#039;Menus&#039;&#039;&#039; {{rarr}} &#039;&#039;Choose or create a menu&#039;&#039; {{rarr}} New {{rarr}} &#039;&#039;&#039;Users&#039;&#039;&#039; {{rarr}} &#039;&#039;&#039;Login&#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;OR&lt;br /&gt;
# Create a module for Login so that your Blog Posters can login.&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;&#039;&#039;&#039;Extensions&#039;&#039;&#039; {{rarr}} &#039;&#039;&#039;Modules&#039;&#039;&#039; {{rarr}} New {{rarr}} &#039;&#039;&#039;Login&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
# Add a &#039;&#039;&#039;Menu Item&#039;&#039;&#039; to a Menu that displays only for the &#039;&#039;&#039;Registered User Group&#039;&#039;&#039; to Add an article&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;&#039;&#039;&#039;Menu Item Type Articles&#039;&#039;&#039; {{rarr}} &#039;&#039;&#039;Create Article&#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;&#039;&#039;&#039;NOTE&#039;&#039;&#039;: this will display for all Registered Users unless you create an Access Level for your Blog Poster User Group and select this in the Menu Item under Access.&lt;br /&gt;
# When your &#039;&#039;&#039;User&#039;&#039;&#039; logs in, they add an &#039;&#039;&#039;Article&#039;&#039;&#039;, enter the content and Save.&lt;br /&gt;
# This will trigger a notification to the Blog Approvers Users that there is a new private message on the site. It doesn’t get more specific than that. Approvers should just come to the site and approve the Article. It will also send a message to Super Admins.&lt;br /&gt;
# When the Blog Approver logs in, they can navigate to where the new article will appear. They will be able to see the unpublished article and edit it/approve it/publish it. Then they can Save &amp;amp; Close and logout.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Admin note&#039;&#039;&#039;: Super Admins can use Batch to move existing Articles to a different workflow than it is currently assigned. It won’t make a difference if the Articles are already published.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Scénario #2 ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Ajoutez ici un autre scénario pour aider les autres à voir la puissance des flux de travail. Les documents peuvent être modifiés ou ajoutés par quiconque possèdant un compte.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Related Information==&lt;br /&gt;
See also:&lt;br /&gt;
* [[S:MyLanguage/Publishing_Workflow_Implementation|Publishing Workflow Implementation]]&lt;br /&gt;
* [[S:MyLanguage/Publishing_Workflow|Publishing Workflow]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;noinclude&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[Category:Google Summer of Code 2017{{#translation:}}]]&lt;br /&gt;
[[Category:Development{{#translation:}}]]&lt;br /&gt;
[[Category:Joomla! 4.x{{#translation:}}]]&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/noinclude&amp;gt;&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Wisgar</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://docs.sandbox.joomla.org/index.php?title=Translations:Publishing_Workflow/Scenarios/28/fr&amp;diff=636552</id>
		<title>Translations:Publishing Workflow/Scenarios/28/fr</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://docs.sandbox.joomla.org/index.php?title=Translations:Publishing_Workflow/Scenarios/28/fr&amp;diff=636552"/>
		<updated>2019-10-19T11:43:15Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Wisgar: &lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;Cliquez sur Enregistrer &amp;amp; Nouveau.&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Wisgar</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://docs.sandbox.joomla.org/index.php?title=Publishing_Workflow/Scenarios/fr&amp;diff=636547</id>
		<title>Publishing Workflow/Scenarios/fr</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://docs.sandbox.joomla.org/index.php?title=Publishing_Workflow/Scenarios/fr&amp;diff=636547"/>
		<updated>2019-10-19T11:42:50Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Wisgar: Created page with &amp;quot;Sélectionnez le &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Group Parent&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; : Enregistré&amp;quot;&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;&amp;lt;noinclude&amp;gt;&amp;lt;languages /&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/noinclude&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
==Implémentation des flux de travail ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
L&#039;ordre général des tâches pour créer un nouveau flux de travail est :&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
# Planifier&lt;br /&gt;
# Ajouter un nouveau &#039;&#039;&#039;Groupes d&#039;utilisateurs&#039;&#039;&#039; (facultatif)&lt;br /&gt;
# Ajouter de nouveaux &#039;&#039;&#039;Utilisateurs&#039;&#039;&#039; et les assigner aux groupes d&#039;utilisateurs appropriés (facultatif)&lt;br /&gt;
# Créer le the nouveau &amp;quot;flux de travail&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
# Créez l&#039;(es) état(s) pour ce flux de travail avec la(les) condition(s).&lt;br /&gt;
# Créer la(les) &#039;&#039;&#039;Transition(s)&#039;&#039;&#039; du flux de travail&lt;br /&gt;
# Ajoutez ou modifiez la &#039;&#039;&#039;Catégorie&#039;&#039;&#039; applicable pour ajouter le &#039;&#039;&#039;Flux de travail&#039;&#039;&#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
# Modifier les &#039;&#039;Permissions&#039;&#039;&#039; de la &#039;&#039;Catégorie&#039;&#039; de sorte que les nouveaux&#039;&#039;Groupes d&#039;utilisateurs&#039;&#039; aient les permissions de faire seulement ce qu&#039;ils sont en droit de faire&lt;br /&gt;
# Paramétrer les notifications si nécessaire&lt;br /&gt;
# Configurer l&#039;accès de connexion pour les &#039;&#039;&#039;Utilisateurs&#039;&#039;&#039; sur le frontend (ou le backend : non inclus dans ce tutoriel) (facultatif)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Planification ==&lt;br /&gt;
Planifiez ce que votre flux de travail fera. La planification est toujours la partie la plus importante. Répondez à ces questions pour vous aider à planifier :&lt;br /&gt;
* Combien de groupes d&#039;utilisateurs (même s&#039;il n&#039;y a qu&#039;un seul utilisateur dans le groupe) doivent intervenir?&lt;br /&gt;
* Combien d&#039;actions y aura-t-il dans le flux de travail?&lt;br /&gt;
* L&#039;un ou l&#039;autre des groupes aura-t-il besoin de recevoir des notifications pour prendre les mesures qui s&#039;imposent ?&lt;br /&gt;
* Les groupes effectueront-ils leurs actions à partir du frontend ou du backend ou de la combinaison des deux ?&lt;br /&gt;
* Quelles &amp;quot;Catégories&amp;quot; se verront attribuer un/ce flux de travail ?&lt;br /&gt;
* Les différentes catégories auront-elles des flux de travail différents ?&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Scénario #1 ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*Un groupe d&#039;utilisateurs ajoute des messages de blog mais ne peut pas les publier&lt;br /&gt;
*Le deuxième groupe d&#039;utilisateurs approuve les messages du blog et les publie.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Créer de nouveaux groupes d&#039;utilisateurs ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
# Allez dans &#039;&#039;&#039;Utilisateurs&#039;&#039;&#039; {{rarr}} &#039;&#039;&#039;Groupes&#039;&#039;&#039; {{rarr}} Nouveau&lt;br /&gt;
# Saisissez le &#039;&#039;&#039;Titre du groupe&#039;&#039;&#039;:&#039;&#039;Affiches du Blog&#039;&#039;&#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
# Sélectionnez le &#039;&#039;&#039;Group Parent&#039;&#039;&#039; : Enregistré&lt;br /&gt;
# Cliquez sur Enregistrer &amp;amp; nouveau.&lt;br /&gt;
# Enter the &#039;&#039;&#039;Group Title&#039;&#039;&#039;: &#039;&#039;Blog Approvers&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
# Select the &#039;&#039;&#039;Group Parent&#039;&#039;&#039;: Registered&lt;br /&gt;
# Cliquez sur Enregistrer &amp;amp; fermer.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Créer de nouveaux utilisateurs (ou modifier des utilisateurs existants) ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Using the directions on [[S:MyLanguage/Adding_a_new_user|create your new &#039;&#039;&#039;Users&#039;&#039;&#039;]].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
# Create &#039;&#039;&#039;User(s)&#039;&#039;&#039; and assign them to the &#039;&#039;Blog Posters&#039;&#039; &#039;&#039;&#039;User Group&#039;&#039;&#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
# Create &#039;&#039;&#039;User(s)&#039;&#039;&#039; and assign them to the &#039;&#039;Blog Approvers&#039;&#039; &#039;&#039;&#039;User Group&#039;&#039;&#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;NOTE&#039;&#039;&#039;: If you want your &#039;&#039;&#039;Users&#039;&#039;&#039; to receive notifications for a &#039;&#039;&#039;Transition&#039;&#039;&#039; (see more below) then select Yes for &#039;&#039;&#039;Receives System Emails&#039;&#039;&#039; for each &#039;&#039;&#039;User&#039;&#039;&#039; to receive notifications.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Créer le flux de travail ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
# Go to &#039;&#039;&#039;Content&#039;&#039;&#039; {{rarr}} &#039;&#039;&#039;Workflows&#039;&#039;&#039; {{rarr}} New&lt;br /&gt;
# Enter the &#039;&#039;&#039;Title&#039;&#039;&#039;: &#039;&#039;Blog Workflow&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
# Cliquez sur Enregistrer &amp;amp; fermer.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;NOTE&#039;&#039;&#039;: Only mark this Default if it will be the Default Workflow for ALL NEW Articles created in Categories &#039;&#039;&#039;without&#039;&#039;&#039; an assigned Workflow. Existing Articles will not be changed.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Créer le(s) statut(s) du flux de travail ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
# From the &#039;&#039;&#039;Workflows&#039;&#039;&#039; list view, click the “&#039;&#039;&#039;manage&#039;&#039;&#039;” link in the &#039;&#039;&#039;States&#039;&#039;&#039; column next to the &#039;&#039;Blog Workflow&#039;&#039;. You will see the default &#039;&#039;&#039;State&#039;&#039;&#039; of Published.&lt;br /&gt;
# Click the &#039;&#039;&#039;Default State&#039;&#039;&#039; for Published and change the &#039;&#039;&#039;Title&#039;&#039;&#039; to: &#039;&#039;Publish new blog post&#039;&#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
# The &#039;&#039;&#039;Condition of items in this state: Published&#039;&#039;&#039; will remain unchanged.&lt;br /&gt;
# Cliquez sur Enregistrer &amp;amp; nouveau.&lt;br /&gt;
# Enter the &#039;&#039;&#039;Title&#039;&#039;&#039;: &#039;&#039;New blog post, unpublished&#039;&#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
# Change the &#039;&#039;&#039;Condition&#039;&#039;&#039; of items in this &#039;&#039;&#039;State&#039;&#039;&#039; to Unpublished.&lt;br /&gt;
# Change the &#039;&#039;&#039;Default&#039;&#039;&#039; to Yes (Green) since this is the &#039;&#039;&#039;Default State&#039;&#039;&#039; for Articles in this Workflow.&lt;br /&gt;
# Cliquez sur Enregistrer &amp;amp; fermer.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Créer la transition pour le flux de travail ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
There are two ways to access &#039;&#039;&#039;Transitions&#039;&#039;&#039;:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
# Click &#039;&#039;&#039;Transitions&#039;&#039;&#039; from the sidebar while in the States list view.&lt;br /&gt;
# Click the blue line with arrows in both directions from the &#039;&#039;&#039;Workflow&#039;&#039;&#039; list view.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
# Go to &#039;&#039;&#039;Transitions&#039;&#039;&#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
# Cliquez sur Nouveau&lt;br /&gt;
# Add the &#039;&#039;&#039;Title&#039;&#039;&#039;: &#039;&#039;Approve/Publish&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
# Select the &#039;&#039;&#039;State&#039;&#039;&#039; &#039;&#039;New blog post – unpublished&#039;&#039; in the &#039;&#039;&#039;From state&#039;&#039;&#039; field drop-down.&lt;br /&gt;
# Select the &#039;&#039;&#039;State&#039;&#039;&#039; &#039;&#039;Publish new blog post&#039;&#039; in the &#039;&#039;&#039;To state&#039;&#039;&#039; field drop-down.&lt;br /&gt;
# Click Save and remain in this &#039;&#039;&#039;Transition&#039;&#039;&#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
# Click the &#039;&#039;&#039;Permissions&#039;&#039;&#039; tab of the &#039;&#039;&#039;Transition&#039;&#039;&#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
# Select the &#039;&#039;&#039;User Group&#039;&#039;&#039; &#039;&#039;Blog Approvers&#039;&#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
# For the &#039;&#039;&#039;Action&#039;&#039;&#039; &#039;&#039;&#039;Execute transition&#039;&#039;&#039;, select &#039;&#039;&#039;Allowed&#039;&#039;&#039; from the &#039;&#039;&#039;Select New Setting&#039;&#039;&#039; drop-down.&lt;br /&gt;
# Cliquez sur Enregistrer &amp;amp; fermer.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;NOTE&#039;&#039;&#039;: You can quickly access your &#039;&#039;&#039;States&#039;&#039;&#039; and &#039;&#039;&#039;Transitions&#039;&#039;&#039; from the &#039;&#039;&#039;Workflow&#039;&#039;&#039; list view. The orange circle is the States and has the quantity of States listed next to the Workflow Title. The blue line with arrows in both directions is for Transitions and shows the quantity of Transitions for the Workflow.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Assign Workflow &amp;amp; User Group Permissions to the Category ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
# Allez dans &#039;&#039;&#039;Contenu&#039;&#039;&#039; {{rarr}} &#039;&#039;&#039;Catégories&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
# Access the &#039;&#039;Blog&#039;&#039; &#039;&#039;&#039;Category&#039;&#039;&#039; (or create it if necessary) and click the &#039;&#039;&#039;Workflow&#039;&#039;&#039; tab.&lt;br /&gt;
# Click the drop-down and select &#039;&#039;Blog Workflow&#039;&#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
# Cliquez sur l&#039;onglet &#039;&#039;&#039;Droits&#039;&#039;&#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
# Click on the &#039;&#039;Blog Poster&#039;&#039; &#039;&#039;&#039;User Group&#039;&#039;&#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
# For the &#039;&#039;&#039;Action&#039;&#039;&#039; Create and Edit, change the &#039;&#039;&#039;Select New Setting&#039;&#039;&#039; drop-down to Allowed.&lt;br /&gt;
# Click on the &#039;&#039;Blog Approvers&#039;&#039; &#039;&#039;&#039;User Group&#039;&#039;&#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
# For the &#039;&#039;&#039;Action&#039;&#039;&#039; Delete, Edit, Edit State and Edit Own, change the &#039;&#039;&#039;Select New Setting&#039;&#039;&#039; drop-down to Allowed.&lt;br /&gt;
# Cliquez sur Enregistrer &amp;amp; fermer.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
For more information on ACL and assigning permissions to User Groups, see the [[S:MyLanguage/J3.x:Access_Control_List_Tutorial|ACL Tutorial]].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Paramétrer les notifications ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Notifications use the Joomla core Messaging component. It is very basic. When enabled for Workflows, it will send a message to the User associated with the Group assigned to the Transition. The message simply states that they have a message in the site. It will then be their responsibility to login and check the articles that need approval and publish them.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;To set up notifications for the Workgroup Transitions:&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
# Allez dans &#039;&#039;&#039;Extensions&#039;&#039;&#039; {{rarr}} &#039;&#039;&#039;Plug-ins&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
# Click the &#039;&#039;&#039;Table Options&#039;&#039;&#039; button and &#039;&#039;&#039;Select Type&#039;&#039;&#039; of content&lt;br /&gt;
# Click on &#039;&#039;&#039;Content – Joomla&#039;&#039;&#039; and then toggle Yes for &#039;&#039;&#039;Email on transition execution&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
# Then make sure that the &#039;&#039;&#039;Users&#039;&#039;&#039; themselves have &#039;&#039;&#039;Receive System Emails&#039;&#039;&#039; toggled to Yes in &#039;&#039;&#039;Users&#039;&#039;&#039; {{rarr}} &#039;&#039;&#039;Manage&#039;&#039;&#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== To set it up so that Users can Post and Approve from the frontend ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
# Create a &#039;&#039;&#039;Menu Item&#039;&#039;&#039; for the &#039;&#039;&#039;Menu Item Type&#039;&#039;&#039; Login so that your Blog Posters can login.&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;&#039;&#039;&#039;Menus&#039;&#039;&#039; {{rarr}} &#039;&#039;Choose or create a menu&#039;&#039; {{rarr}} New {{rarr}} &#039;&#039;&#039;Users&#039;&#039;&#039; {{rarr}} &#039;&#039;&#039;Login&#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;OR&lt;br /&gt;
# Create a module for Login so that your Blog Posters can login.&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;&#039;&#039;&#039;Extensions&#039;&#039;&#039; {{rarr}} &#039;&#039;&#039;Modules&#039;&#039;&#039; {{rarr}} New {{rarr}} &#039;&#039;&#039;Login&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
# Add a &#039;&#039;&#039;Menu Item&#039;&#039;&#039; to a Menu that displays only for the &#039;&#039;&#039;Registered User Group&#039;&#039;&#039; to Add an article&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;&#039;&#039;&#039;Menu Item Type Articles&#039;&#039;&#039; {{rarr}} &#039;&#039;&#039;Create Article&#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;&#039;&#039;&#039;NOTE&#039;&#039;&#039;: this will display for all Registered Users unless you create an Access Level for your Blog Poster User Group and select this in the Menu Item under Access.&lt;br /&gt;
# When your &#039;&#039;&#039;User&#039;&#039;&#039; logs in, they add an &#039;&#039;&#039;Article&#039;&#039;&#039;, enter the content and Save.&lt;br /&gt;
# This will trigger a notification to the Blog Approvers Users that there is a new private message on the site. It doesn’t get more specific than that. Approvers should just come to the site and approve the Article. It will also send a message to Super Admins.&lt;br /&gt;
# When the Blog Approver logs in, they can navigate to where the new article will appear. They will be able to see the unpublished article and edit it/approve it/publish it. Then they can Save &amp;amp; Close and logout.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Admin note&#039;&#039;&#039;: Super Admins can use Batch to move existing Articles to a different workflow than it is currently assigned. It won’t make a difference if the Articles are already published.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Scénario #2 ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Ajoutez ici un autre scénario pour aider les autres à voir la puissance des flux de travail. Les documents peuvent être modifiés ou ajoutés par quiconque possèdant un compte.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Related Information==&lt;br /&gt;
See also:&lt;br /&gt;
* [[S:MyLanguage/Publishing_Workflow_Implementation|Publishing Workflow Implementation]]&lt;br /&gt;
* [[S:MyLanguage/Publishing_Workflow|Publishing Workflow]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;noinclude&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[Category:Google Summer of Code 2017{{#translation:}}]]&lt;br /&gt;
[[Category:Development{{#translation:}}]]&lt;br /&gt;
[[Category:Joomla! 4.x{{#translation:}}]]&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/noinclude&amp;gt;&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Wisgar</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://docs.sandbox.joomla.org/index.php?title=Translations:Publishing_Workflow/Scenarios/27/fr&amp;diff=636546</id>
		<title>Translations:Publishing Workflow/Scenarios/27/fr</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://docs.sandbox.joomla.org/index.php?title=Translations:Publishing_Workflow/Scenarios/27/fr&amp;diff=636546"/>
		<updated>2019-10-19T11:42:49Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Wisgar: Created page with &amp;quot;Sélectionnez le &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Group Parent&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; : Enregistré&amp;quot;&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;Sélectionnez le &#039;&#039;&#039;Group Parent&#039;&#039;&#039; : Enregistré&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Wisgar</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://docs.sandbox.joomla.org/index.php?title=Publishing_Workflow/Scenarios/fr&amp;diff=636536</id>
		<title>Publishing Workflow/Scenarios/fr</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://docs.sandbox.joomla.org/index.php?title=Publishing_Workflow/Scenarios/fr&amp;diff=636536"/>
		<updated>2019-10-19T11:42:21Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Wisgar: Created page with &amp;quot;Saisissez le &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Titre du groupe&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;:&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Affiches du Blog&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;.&amp;quot;&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;&amp;lt;noinclude&amp;gt;&amp;lt;languages /&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/noinclude&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
==Implémentation des flux de travail ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
L&#039;ordre général des tâches pour créer un nouveau flux de travail est :&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
# Planifier&lt;br /&gt;
# Ajouter un nouveau &#039;&#039;&#039;Groupes d&#039;utilisateurs&#039;&#039;&#039; (facultatif)&lt;br /&gt;
# Ajouter de nouveaux &#039;&#039;&#039;Utilisateurs&#039;&#039;&#039; et les assigner aux groupes d&#039;utilisateurs appropriés (facultatif)&lt;br /&gt;
# Créer le the nouveau &amp;quot;flux de travail&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
# Créez l&#039;(es) état(s) pour ce flux de travail avec la(les) condition(s).&lt;br /&gt;
# Créer la(les) &#039;&#039;&#039;Transition(s)&#039;&#039;&#039; du flux de travail&lt;br /&gt;
# Ajoutez ou modifiez la &#039;&#039;&#039;Catégorie&#039;&#039;&#039; applicable pour ajouter le &#039;&#039;&#039;Flux de travail&#039;&#039;&#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
# Modifier les &#039;&#039;Permissions&#039;&#039;&#039; de la &#039;&#039;Catégorie&#039;&#039; de sorte que les nouveaux&#039;&#039;Groupes d&#039;utilisateurs&#039;&#039; aient les permissions de faire seulement ce qu&#039;ils sont en droit de faire&lt;br /&gt;
# Paramétrer les notifications si nécessaire&lt;br /&gt;
# Configurer l&#039;accès de connexion pour les &#039;&#039;&#039;Utilisateurs&#039;&#039;&#039; sur le frontend (ou le backend : non inclus dans ce tutoriel) (facultatif)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Planification ==&lt;br /&gt;
Planifiez ce que votre flux de travail fera. La planification est toujours la partie la plus importante. Répondez à ces questions pour vous aider à planifier :&lt;br /&gt;
* Combien de groupes d&#039;utilisateurs (même s&#039;il n&#039;y a qu&#039;un seul utilisateur dans le groupe) doivent intervenir?&lt;br /&gt;
* Combien d&#039;actions y aura-t-il dans le flux de travail?&lt;br /&gt;
* L&#039;un ou l&#039;autre des groupes aura-t-il besoin de recevoir des notifications pour prendre les mesures qui s&#039;imposent ?&lt;br /&gt;
* Les groupes effectueront-ils leurs actions à partir du frontend ou du backend ou de la combinaison des deux ?&lt;br /&gt;
* Quelles &amp;quot;Catégories&amp;quot; se verront attribuer un/ce flux de travail ?&lt;br /&gt;
* Les différentes catégories auront-elles des flux de travail différents ?&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Scénario #1 ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*Un groupe d&#039;utilisateurs ajoute des messages de blog mais ne peut pas les publier&lt;br /&gt;
*Le deuxième groupe d&#039;utilisateurs approuve les messages du blog et les publie.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Créer de nouveaux groupes d&#039;utilisateurs ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
# Allez dans &#039;&#039;&#039;Utilisateurs&#039;&#039;&#039; {{rarr}} &#039;&#039;&#039;Groupes&#039;&#039;&#039; {{rarr}} Nouveau&lt;br /&gt;
# Saisissez le &#039;&#039;&#039;Titre du groupe&#039;&#039;&#039;:&#039;&#039;Affiches du Blog&#039;&#039;&#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
# Select the &#039;&#039;&#039;Group Parent&#039;&#039;&#039;: Registered&lt;br /&gt;
# Cliquez sur Enregistrer &amp;amp; nouveau.&lt;br /&gt;
# Enter the &#039;&#039;&#039;Group Title&#039;&#039;&#039;: &#039;&#039;Blog Approvers&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
# Select the &#039;&#039;&#039;Group Parent&#039;&#039;&#039;: Registered&lt;br /&gt;
# Cliquez sur Enregistrer &amp;amp; fermer.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Créer de nouveaux utilisateurs (ou modifier des utilisateurs existants) ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Using the directions on [[S:MyLanguage/Adding_a_new_user|create your new &#039;&#039;&#039;Users&#039;&#039;&#039;]].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
# Create &#039;&#039;&#039;User(s)&#039;&#039;&#039; and assign them to the &#039;&#039;Blog Posters&#039;&#039; &#039;&#039;&#039;User Group&#039;&#039;&#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
# Create &#039;&#039;&#039;User(s)&#039;&#039;&#039; and assign them to the &#039;&#039;Blog Approvers&#039;&#039; &#039;&#039;&#039;User Group&#039;&#039;&#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;NOTE&#039;&#039;&#039;: If you want your &#039;&#039;&#039;Users&#039;&#039;&#039; to receive notifications for a &#039;&#039;&#039;Transition&#039;&#039;&#039; (see more below) then select Yes for &#039;&#039;&#039;Receives System Emails&#039;&#039;&#039; for each &#039;&#039;&#039;User&#039;&#039;&#039; to receive notifications.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Créer le flux de travail ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
# Go to &#039;&#039;&#039;Content&#039;&#039;&#039; {{rarr}} &#039;&#039;&#039;Workflows&#039;&#039;&#039; {{rarr}} New&lt;br /&gt;
# Enter the &#039;&#039;&#039;Title&#039;&#039;&#039;: &#039;&#039;Blog Workflow&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
# Cliquez sur Enregistrer &amp;amp; fermer.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;NOTE&#039;&#039;&#039;: Only mark this Default if it will be the Default Workflow for ALL NEW Articles created in Categories &#039;&#039;&#039;without&#039;&#039;&#039; an assigned Workflow. Existing Articles will not be changed.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Créer le(s) statut(s) du flux de travail ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
# From the &#039;&#039;&#039;Workflows&#039;&#039;&#039; list view, click the “&#039;&#039;&#039;manage&#039;&#039;&#039;” link in the &#039;&#039;&#039;States&#039;&#039;&#039; column next to the &#039;&#039;Blog Workflow&#039;&#039;. You will see the default &#039;&#039;&#039;State&#039;&#039;&#039; of Published.&lt;br /&gt;
# Click the &#039;&#039;&#039;Default State&#039;&#039;&#039; for Published and change the &#039;&#039;&#039;Title&#039;&#039;&#039; to: &#039;&#039;Publish new blog post&#039;&#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
# The &#039;&#039;&#039;Condition of items in this state: Published&#039;&#039;&#039; will remain unchanged.&lt;br /&gt;
# Cliquez sur Enregistrer &amp;amp; nouveau.&lt;br /&gt;
# Enter the &#039;&#039;&#039;Title&#039;&#039;&#039;: &#039;&#039;New blog post, unpublished&#039;&#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
# Change the &#039;&#039;&#039;Condition&#039;&#039;&#039; of items in this &#039;&#039;&#039;State&#039;&#039;&#039; to Unpublished.&lt;br /&gt;
# Change the &#039;&#039;&#039;Default&#039;&#039;&#039; to Yes (Green) since this is the &#039;&#039;&#039;Default State&#039;&#039;&#039; for Articles in this Workflow.&lt;br /&gt;
# Cliquez sur Enregistrer &amp;amp; fermer.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Créer la transition pour le flux de travail ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
There are two ways to access &#039;&#039;&#039;Transitions&#039;&#039;&#039;:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
# Click &#039;&#039;&#039;Transitions&#039;&#039;&#039; from the sidebar while in the States list view.&lt;br /&gt;
# Click the blue line with arrows in both directions from the &#039;&#039;&#039;Workflow&#039;&#039;&#039; list view.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
# Go to &#039;&#039;&#039;Transitions&#039;&#039;&#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
# Cliquez sur Nouveau&lt;br /&gt;
# Add the &#039;&#039;&#039;Title&#039;&#039;&#039;: &#039;&#039;Approve/Publish&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
# Select the &#039;&#039;&#039;State&#039;&#039;&#039; &#039;&#039;New blog post – unpublished&#039;&#039; in the &#039;&#039;&#039;From state&#039;&#039;&#039; field drop-down.&lt;br /&gt;
# Select the &#039;&#039;&#039;State&#039;&#039;&#039; &#039;&#039;Publish new blog post&#039;&#039; in the &#039;&#039;&#039;To state&#039;&#039;&#039; field drop-down.&lt;br /&gt;
# Click Save and remain in this &#039;&#039;&#039;Transition&#039;&#039;&#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
# Click the &#039;&#039;&#039;Permissions&#039;&#039;&#039; tab of the &#039;&#039;&#039;Transition&#039;&#039;&#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
# Select the &#039;&#039;&#039;User Group&#039;&#039;&#039; &#039;&#039;Blog Approvers&#039;&#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
# For the &#039;&#039;&#039;Action&#039;&#039;&#039; &#039;&#039;&#039;Execute transition&#039;&#039;&#039;, select &#039;&#039;&#039;Allowed&#039;&#039;&#039; from the &#039;&#039;&#039;Select New Setting&#039;&#039;&#039; drop-down.&lt;br /&gt;
# Cliquez sur Enregistrer &amp;amp; fermer.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;NOTE&#039;&#039;&#039;: You can quickly access your &#039;&#039;&#039;States&#039;&#039;&#039; and &#039;&#039;&#039;Transitions&#039;&#039;&#039; from the &#039;&#039;&#039;Workflow&#039;&#039;&#039; list view. The orange circle is the States and has the quantity of States listed next to the Workflow Title. The blue line with arrows in both directions is for Transitions and shows the quantity of Transitions for the Workflow.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Assign Workflow &amp;amp; User Group Permissions to the Category ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
# Allez dans &#039;&#039;&#039;Contenu&#039;&#039;&#039; {{rarr}} &#039;&#039;&#039;Catégories&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
# Access the &#039;&#039;Blog&#039;&#039; &#039;&#039;&#039;Category&#039;&#039;&#039; (or create it if necessary) and click the &#039;&#039;&#039;Workflow&#039;&#039;&#039; tab.&lt;br /&gt;
# Click the drop-down and select &#039;&#039;Blog Workflow&#039;&#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
# Cliquez sur l&#039;onglet &#039;&#039;&#039;Droits&#039;&#039;&#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
# Click on the &#039;&#039;Blog Poster&#039;&#039; &#039;&#039;&#039;User Group&#039;&#039;&#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
# For the &#039;&#039;&#039;Action&#039;&#039;&#039; Create and Edit, change the &#039;&#039;&#039;Select New Setting&#039;&#039;&#039; drop-down to Allowed.&lt;br /&gt;
# Click on the &#039;&#039;Blog Approvers&#039;&#039; &#039;&#039;&#039;User Group&#039;&#039;&#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
# For the &#039;&#039;&#039;Action&#039;&#039;&#039; Delete, Edit, Edit State and Edit Own, change the &#039;&#039;&#039;Select New Setting&#039;&#039;&#039; drop-down to Allowed.&lt;br /&gt;
# Cliquez sur Enregistrer &amp;amp; fermer.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
For more information on ACL and assigning permissions to User Groups, see the [[S:MyLanguage/J3.x:Access_Control_List_Tutorial|ACL Tutorial]].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Paramétrer les notifications ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Notifications use the Joomla core Messaging component. It is very basic. When enabled for Workflows, it will send a message to the User associated with the Group assigned to the Transition. The message simply states that they have a message in the site. It will then be their responsibility to login and check the articles that need approval and publish them.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;To set up notifications for the Workgroup Transitions:&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
# Allez dans &#039;&#039;&#039;Extensions&#039;&#039;&#039; {{rarr}} &#039;&#039;&#039;Plug-ins&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
# Click the &#039;&#039;&#039;Table Options&#039;&#039;&#039; button and &#039;&#039;&#039;Select Type&#039;&#039;&#039; of content&lt;br /&gt;
# Click on &#039;&#039;&#039;Content – Joomla&#039;&#039;&#039; and then toggle Yes for &#039;&#039;&#039;Email on transition execution&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
# Then make sure that the &#039;&#039;&#039;Users&#039;&#039;&#039; themselves have &#039;&#039;&#039;Receive System Emails&#039;&#039;&#039; toggled to Yes in &#039;&#039;&#039;Users&#039;&#039;&#039; {{rarr}} &#039;&#039;&#039;Manage&#039;&#039;&#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== To set it up so that Users can Post and Approve from the frontend ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
# Create a &#039;&#039;&#039;Menu Item&#039;&#039;&#039; for the &#039;&#039;&#039;Menu Item Type&#039;&#039;&#039; Login so that your Blog Posters can login.&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;&#039;&#039;&#039;Menus&#039;&#039;&#039; {{rarr}} &#039;&#039;Choose or create a menu&#039;&#039; {{rarr}} New {{rarr}} &#039;&#039;&#039;Users&#039;&#039;&#039; {{rarr}} &#039;&#039;&#039;Login&#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;OR&lt;br /&gt;
# Create a module for Login so that your Blog Posters can login.&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;&#039;&#039;&#039;Extensions&#039;&#039;&#039; {{rarr}} &#039;&#039;&#039;Modules&#039;&#039;&#039; {{rarr}} New {{rarr}} &#039;&#039;&#039;Login&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
# Add a &#039;&#039;&#039;Menu Item&#039;&#039;&#039; to a Menu that displays only for the &#039;&#039;&#039;Registered User Group&#039;&#039;&#039; to Add an article&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;&#039;&#039;&#039;Menu Item Type Articles&#039;&#039;&#039; {{rarr}} &#039;&#039;&#039;Create Article&#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;&#039;&#039;&#039;NOTE&#039;&#039;&#039;: this will display for all Registered Users unless you create an Access Level for your Blog Poster User Group and select this in the Menu Item under Access.&lt;br /&gt;
# When your &#039;&#039;&#039;User&#039;&#039;&#039; logs in, they add an &#039;&#039;&#039;Article&#039;&#039;&#039;, enter the content and Save.&lt;br /&gt;
# This will trigger a notification to the Blog Approvers Users that there is a new private message on the site. It doesn’t get more specific than that. Approvers should just come to the site and approve the Article. It will also send a message to Super Admins.&lt;br /&gt;
# When the Blog Approver logs in, they can navigate to where the new article will appear. They will be able to see the unpublished article and edit it/approve it/publish it. Then they can Save &amp;amp; Close and logout.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Admin note&#039;&#039;&#039;: Super Admins can use Batch to move existing Articles to a different workflow than it is currently assigned. It won’t make a difference if the Articles are already published.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Scénario #2 ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Ajoutez ici un autre scénario pour aider les autres à voir la puissance des flux de travail. Les documents peuvent être modifiés ou ajoutés par quiconque possèdant un compte.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Related Information==&lt;br /&gt;
See also:&lt;br /&gt;
* [[S:MyLanguage/Publishing_Workflow_Implementation|Publishing Workflow Implementation]]&lt;br /&gt;
* [[S:MyLanguage/Publishing_Workflow|Publishing Workflow]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;noinclude&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[Category:Google Summer of Code 2017{{#translation:}}]]&lt;br /&gt;
[[Category:Development{{#translation:}}]]&lt;br /&gt;
[[Category:Joomla! 4.x{{#translation:}}]]&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/noinclude&amp;gt;&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Wisgar</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://docs.sandbox.joomla.org/index.php?title=Translations:Publishing_Workflow/Scenarios/26/fr&amp;diff=636535</id>
		<title>Translations:Publishing Workflow/Scenarios/26/fr</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://docs.sandbox.joomla.org/index.php?title=Translations:Publishing_Workflow/Scenarios/26/fr&amp;diff=636535"/>
		<updated>2019-10-19T11:42:21Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Wisgar: Created page with &amp;quot;Saisissez le &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Titre du groupe&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;:&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Affiches du Blog&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;.&amp;quot;&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;Saisissez le &#039;&#039;&#039;Titre du groupe&#039;&#039;&#039;:&#039;&#039;Affiches du Blog&#039;&#039;&#039;.&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Wisgar</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://docs.sandbox.joomla.org/index.php?title=Publishing_Workflow/Scenarios/fr&amp;diff=636527</id>
		<title>Publishing Workflow/Scenarios/fr</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://docs.sandbox.joomla.org/index.php?title=Publishing_Workflow/Scenarios/fr&amp;diff=636527"/>
		<updated>2019-10-19T11:40:55Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Wisgar: Created page with &amp;quot;Le deuxième groupe d&amp;#039;utilisateurs approuve les messages du blog et les publie.&amp;quot;&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;&amp;lt;noinclude&amp;gt;&amp;lt;languages /&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/noinclude&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
==Implémentation des flux de travail ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
L&#039;ordre général des tâches pour créer un nouveau flux de travail est :&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
# Planifier&lt;br /&gt;
# Ajouter un nouveau &#039;&#039;&#039;Groupes d&#039;utilisateurs&#039;&#039;&#039; (facultatif)&lt;br /&gt;
# Ajouter de nouveaux &#039;&#039;&#039;Utilisateurs&#039;&#039;&#039; et les assigner aux groupes d&#039;utilisateurs appropriés (facultatif)&lt;br /&gt;
# Créer le the nouveau &amp;quot;flux de travail&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
# Créez l&#039;(es) état(s) pour ce flux de travail avec la(les) condition(s).&lt;br /&gt;
# Créer la(les) &#039;&#039;&#039;Transition(s)&#039;&#039;&#039; du flux de travail&lt;br /&gt;
# Ajoutez ou modifiez la &#039;&#039;&#039;Catégorie&#039;&#039;&#039; applicable pour ajouter le &#039;&#039;&#039;Flux de travail&#039;&#039;&#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
# Modifier les &#039;&#039;Permissions&#039;&#039;&#039; de la &#039;&#039;Catégorie&#039;&#039; de sorte que les nouveaux&#039;&#039;Groupes d&#039;utilisateurs&#039;&#039; aient les permissions de faire seulement ce qu&#039;ils sont en droit de faire&lt;br /&gt;
# Paramétrer les notifications si nécessaire&lt;br /&gt;
# Configurer l&#039;accès de connexion pour les &#039;&#039;&#039;Utilisateurs&#039;&#039;&#039; sur le frontend (ou le backend : non inclus dans ce tutoriel) (facultatif)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Planification ==&lt;br /&gt;
Planifiez ce que votre flux de travail fera. La planification est toujours la partie la plus importante. Répondez à ces questions pour vous aider à planifier :&lt;br /&gt;
* Combien de groupes d&#039;utilisateurs (même s&#039;il n&#039;y a qu&#039;un seul utilisateur dans le groupe) doivent intervenir?&lt;br /&gt;
* Combien d&#039;actions y aura-t-il dans le flux de travail?&lt;br /&gt;
* L&#039;un ou l&#039;autre des groupes aura-t-il besoin de recevoir des notifications pour prendre les mesures qui s&#039;imposent ?&lt;br /&gt;
* Les groupes effectueront-ils leurs actions à partir du frontend ou du backend ou de la combinaison des deux ?&lt;br /&gt;
* Quelles &amp;quot;Catégories&amp;quot; se verront attribuer un/ce flux de travail ?&lt;br /&gt;
* Les différentes catégories auront-elles des flux de travail différents ?&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Scénario #1 ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*Un groupe d&#039;utilisateurs ajoute des messages de blog mais ne peut pas les publier&lt;br /&gt;
*Le deuxième groupe d&#039;utilisateurs approuve les messages du blog et les publie.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Créer de nouveaux groupes d&#039;utilisateurs ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
# Allez dans &#039;&#039;&#039;Utilisateurs&#039;&#039;&#039; {{rarr}} &#039;&#039;&#039;Groupes&#039;&#039;&#039; {{rarr}} Nouveau&lt;br /&gt;
# Enter the &#039;&#039;&#039;Group Title&#039;&#039;&#039;: &#039;&#039;Blog Posters&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
# Select the &#039;&#039;&#039;Group Parent&#039;&#039;&#039;: Registered&lt;br /&gt;
# Cliquez sur Enregistrer &amp;amp; nouveau.&lt;br /&gt;
# Enter the &#039;&#039;&#039;Group Title&#039;&#039;&#039;: &#039;&#039;Blog Approvers&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
# Select the &#039;&#039;&#039;Group Parent&#039;&#039;&#039;: Registered&lt;br /&gt;
# Cliquez sur Enregistrer &amp;amp; fermer.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Créer de nouveaux utilisateurs (ou modifier des utilisateurs existants) ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Using the directions on [[S:MyLanguage/Adding_a_new_user|create your new &#039;&#039;&#039;Users&#039;&#039;&#039;]].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
# Create &#039;&#039;&#039;User(s)&#039;&#039;&#039; and assign them to the &#039;&#039;Blog Posters&#039;&#039; &#039;&#039;&#039;User Group&#039;&#039;&#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
# Create &#039;&#039;&#039;User(s)&#039;&#039;&#039; and assign them to the &#039;&#039;Blog Approvers&#039;&#039; &#039;&#039;&#039;User Group&#039;&#039;&#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;NOTE&#039;&#039;&#039;: If you want your &#039;&#039;&#039;Users&#039;&#039;&#039; to receive notifications for a &#039;&#039;&#039;Transition&#039;&#039;&#039; (see more below) then select Yes for &#039;&#039;&#039;Receives System Emails&#039;&#039;&#039; for each &#039;&#039;&#039;User&#039;&#039;&#039; to receive notifications.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Créer le flux de travail ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
# Go to &#039;&#039;&#039;Content&#039;&#039;&#039; {{rarr}} &#039;&#039;&#039;Workflows&#039;&#039;&#039; {{rarr}} New&lt;br /&gt;
# Enter the &#039;&#039;&#039;Title&#039;&#039;&#039;: &#039;&#039;Blog Workflow&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
# Cliquez sur Enregistrer &amp;amp; fermer.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;NOTE&#039;&#039;&#039;: Only mark this Default if it will be the Default Workflow for ALL NEW Articles created in Categories &#039;&#039;&#039;without&#039;&#039;&#039; an assigned Workflow. Existing Articles will not be changed.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Créer le(s) statut(s) du flux de travail ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
# From the &#039;&#039;&#039;Workflows&#039;&#039;&#039; list view, click the “&#039;&#039;&#039;manage&#039;&#039;&#039;” link in the &#039;&#039;&#039;States&#039;&#039;&#039; column next to the &#039;&#039;Blog Workflow&#039;&#039;. You will see the default &#039;&#039;&#039;State&#039;&#039;&#039; of Published.&lt;br /&gt;
# Click the &#039;&#039;&#039;Default State&#039;&#039;&#039; for Published and change the &#039;&#039;&#039;Title&#039;&#039;&#039; to: &#039;&#039;Publish new blog post&#039;&#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
# The &#039;&#039;&#039;Condition of items in this state: Published&#039;&#039;&#039; will remain unchanged.&lt;br /&gt;
# Cliquez sur Enregistrer &amp;amp; nouveau.&lt;br /&gt;
# Enter the &#039;&#039;&#039;Title&#039;&#039;&#039;: &#039;&#039;New blog post, unpublished&#039;&#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
# Change the &#039;&#039;&#039;Condition&#039;&#039;&#039; of items in this &#039;&#039;&#039;State&#039;&#039;&#039; to Unpublished.&lt;br /&gt;
# Change the &#039;&#039;&#039;Default&#039;&#039;&#039; to Yes (Green) since this is the &#039;&#039;&#039;Default State&#039;&#039;&#039; for Articles in this Workflow.&lt;br /&gt;
# Cliquez sur Enregistrer &amp;amp; fermer.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Créer la transition pour le flux de travail ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
There are two ways to access &#039;&#039;&#039;Transitions&#039;&#039;&#039;:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
# Click &#039;&#039;&#039;Transitions&#039;&#039;&#039; from the sidebar while in the States list view.&lt;br /&gt;
# Click the blue line with arrows in both directions from the &#039;&#039;&#039;Workflow&#039;&#039;&#039; list view.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
# Go to &#039;&#039;&#039;Transitions&#039;&#039;&#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
# Cliquez sur Nouveau&lt;br /&gt;
# Add the &#039;&#039;&#039;Title&#039;&#039;&#039;: &#039;&#039;Approve/Publish&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
# Select the &#039;&#039;&#039;State&#039;&#039;&#039; &#039;&#039;New blog post – unpublished&#039;&#039; in the &#039;&#039;&#039;From state&#039;&#039;&#039; field drop-down.&lt;br /&gt;
# Select the &#039;&#039;&#039;State&#039;&#039;&#039; &#039;&#039;Publish new blog post&#039;&#039; in the &#039;&#039;&#039;To state&#039;&#039;&#039; field drop-down.&lt;br /&gt;
# Click Save and remain in this &#039;&#039;&#039;Transition&#039;&#039;&#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
# Click the &#039;&#039;&#039;Permissions&#039;&#039;&#039; tab of the &#039;&#039;&#039;Transition&#039;&#039;&#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
# Select the &#039;&#039;&#039;User Group&#039;&#039;&#039; &#039;&#039;Blog Approvers&#039;&#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
# For the &#039;&#039;&#039;Action&#039;&#039;&#039; &#039;&#039;&#039;Execute transition&#039;&#039;&#039;, select &#039;&#039;&#039;Allowed&#039;&#039;&#039; from the &#039;&#039;&#039;Select New Setting&#039;&#039;&#039; drop-down.&lt;br /&gt;
# Cliquez sur Enregistrer &amp;amp; fermer.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;NOTE&#039;&#039;&#039;: You can quickly access your &#039;&#039;&#039;States&#039;&#039;&#039; and &#039;&#039;&#039;Transitions&#039;&#039;&#039; from the &#039;&#039;&#039;Workflow&#039;&#039;&#039; list view. The orange circle is the States and has the quantity of States listed next to the Workflow Title. The blue line with arrows in both directions is for Transitions and shows the quantity of Transitions for the Workflow.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Assign Workflow &amp;amp; User Group Permissions to the Category ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
# Allez dans &#039;&#039;&#039;Contenu&#039;&#039;&#039; {{rarr}} &#039;&#039;&#039;Catégories&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
# Access the &#039;&#039;Blog&#039;&#039; &#039;&#039;&#039;Category&#039;&#039;&#039; (or create it if necessary) and click the &#039;&#039;&#039;Workflow&#039;&#039;&#039; tab.&lt;br /&gt;
# Click the drop-down and select &#039;&#039;Blog Workflow&#039;&#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
# Cliquez sur l&#039;onglet &#039;&#039;&#039;Droits&#039;&#039;&#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
# Click on the &#039;&#039;Blog Poster&#039;&#039; &#039;&#039;&#039;User Group&#039;&#039;&#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
# For the &#039;&#039;&#039;Action&#039;&#039;&#039; Create and Edit, change the &#039;&#039;&#039;Select New Setting&#039;&#039;&#039; drop-down to Allowed.&lt;br /&gt;
# Click on the &#039;&#039;Blog Approvers&#039;&#039; &#039;&#039;&#039;User Group&#039;&#039;&#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
# For the &#039;&#039;&#039;Action&#039;&#039;&#039; Delete, Edit, Edit State and Edit Own, change the &#039;&#039;&#039;Select New Setting&#039;&#039;&#039; drop-down to Allowed.&lt;br /&gt;
# Cliquez sur Enregistrer &amp;amp; fermer.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
For more information on ACL and assigning permissions to User Groups, see the [[S:MyLanguage/J3.x:Access_Control_List_Tutorial|ACL Tutorial]].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Paramétrer les notifications ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Notifications use the Joomla core Messaging component. It is very basic. When enabled for Workflows, it will send a message to the User associated with the Group assigned to the Transition. The message simply states that they have a message in the site. It will then be their responsibility to login and check the articles that need approval and publish them.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;To set up notifications for the Workgroup Transitions:&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
# Allez dans &#039;&#039;&#039;Extensions&#039;&#039;&#039; {{rarr}} &#039;&#039;&#039;Plug-ins&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
# Click the &#039;&#039;&#039;Table Options&#039;&#039;&#039; button and &#039;&#039;&#039;Select Type&#039;&#039;&#039; of content&lt;br /&gt;
# Click on &#039;&#039;&#039;Content – Joomla&#039;&#039;&#039; and then toggle Yes for &#039;&#039;&#039;Email on transition execution&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
# Then make sure that the &#039;&#039;&#039;Users&#039;&#039;&#039; themselves have &#039;&#039;&#039;Receive System Emails&#039;&#039;&#039; toggled to Yes in &#039;&#039;&#039;Users&#039;&#039;&#039; {{rarr}} &#039;&#039;&#039;Manage&#039;&#039;&#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== To set it up so that Users can Post and Approve from the frontend ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
# Create a &#039;&#039;&#039;Menu Item&#039;&#039;&#039; for the &#039;&#039;&#039;Menu Item Type&#039;&#039;&#039; Login so that your Blog Posters can login.&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;&#039;&#039;&#039;Menus&#039;&#039;&#039; {{rarr}} &#039;&#039;Choose or create a menu&#039;&#039; {{rarr}} New {{rarr}} &#039;&#039;&#039;Users&#039;&#039;&#039; {{rarr}} &#039;&#039;&#039;Login&#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;OR&lt;br /&gt;
# Create a module for Login so that your Blog Posters can login.&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;&#039;&#039;&#039;Extensions&#039;&#039;&#039; {{rarr}} &#039;&#039;&#039;Modules&#039;&#039;&#039; {{rarr}} New {{rarr}} &#039;&#039;&#039;Login&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
# Add a &#039;&#039;&#039;Menu Item&#039;&#039;&#039; to a Menu that displays only for the &#039;&#039;&#039;Registered User Group&#039;&#039;&#039; to Add an article&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;&#039;&#039;&#039;Menu Item Type Articles&#039;&#039;&#039; {{rarr}} &#039;&#039;&#039;Create Article&#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;&#039;&#039;&#039;NOTE&#039;&#039;&#039;: this will display for all Registered Users unless you create an Access Level for your Blog Poster User Group and select this in the Menu Item under Access.&lt;br /&gt;
# When your &#039;&#039;&#039;User&#039;&#039;&#039; logs in, they add an &#039;&#039;&#039;Article&#039;&#039;&#039;, enter the content and Save.&lt;br /&gt;
# This will trigger a notification to the Blog Approvers Users that there is a new private message on the site. It doesn’t get more specific than that. Approvers should just come to the site and approve the Article. It will also send a message to Super Admins.&lt;br /&gt;
# When the Blog Approver logs in, they can navigate to where the new article will appear. They will be able to see the unpublished article and edit it/approve it/publish it. Then they can Save &amp;amp; Close and logout.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Admin note&#039;&#039;&#039;: Super Admins can use Batch to move existing Articles to a different workflow than it is currently assigned. It won’t make a difference if the Articles are already published.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Scénario #2 ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Ajoutez ici un autre scénario pour aider les autres à voir la puissance des flux de travail. Les documents peuvent être modifiés ou ajoutés par quiconque possèdant un compte.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Related Information==&lt;br /&gt;
See also:&lt;br /&gt;
* [[S:MyLanguage/Publishing_Workflow_Implementation|Publishing Workflow Implementation]]&lt;br /&gt;
* [[S:MyLanguage/Publishing_Workflow|Publishing Workflow]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;noinclude&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[Category:Google Summer of Code 2017{{#translation:}}]]&lt;br /&gt;
[[Category:Development{{#translation:}}]]&lt;br /&gt;
[[Category:Joomla! 4.x{{#translation:}}]]&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/noinclude&amp;gt;&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Wisgar</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://docs.sandbox.joomla.org/index.php?title=Translations:Publishing_Workflow/Scenarios/23/fr&amp;diff=636526</id>
		<title>Translations:Publishing Workflow/Scenarios/23/fr</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://docs.sandbox.joomla.org/index.php?title=Translations:Publishing_Workflow/Scenarios/23/fr&amp;diff=636526"/>
		<updated>2019-10-19T11:40:55Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Wisgar: Created page with &amp;quot;Le deuxième groupe d&amp;#039;utilisateurs approuve les messages du blog et les publie.&amp;quot;&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;Le deuxième groupe d&#039;utilisateurs approuve les messages du blog et les publie.&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Wisgar</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://docs.sandbox.joomla.org/index.php?title=Publishing_Workflow/Scenarios/fr&amp;diff=636511</id>
		<title>Publishing Workflow/Scenarios/fr</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://docs.sandbox.joomla.org/index.php?title=Publishing_Workflow/Scenarios/fr&amp;diff=636511"/>
		<updated>2019-10-19T11:39:29Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Wisgar: Created page with &amp;quot;Un groupe d&amp;#039;utilisateurs ajoute des messages de blog mais ne peut pas les publier&amp;quot;&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;&amp;lt;noinclude&amp;gt;&amp;lt;languages /&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/noinclude&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
==Implémentation des flux de travail ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
L&#039;ordre général des tâches pour créer un nouveau flux de travail est :&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
# Planifier&lt;br /&gt;
# Ajouter un nouveau &#039;&#039;&#039;Groupes d&#039;utilisateurs&#039;&#039;&#039; (facultatif)&lt;br /&gt;
# Ajouter de nouveaux &#039;&#039;&#039;Utilisateurs&#039;&#039;&#039; et les assigner aux groupes d&#039;utilisateurs appropriés (facultatif)&lt;br /&gt;
# Créer le the nouveau &amp;quot;flux de travail&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
# Créez l&#039;(es) état(s) pour ce flux de travail avec la(les) condition(s).&lt;br /&gt;
# Créer la(les) &#039;&#039;&#039;Transition(s)&#039;&#039;&#039; du flux de travail&lt;br /&gt;
# Ajoutez ou modifiez la &#039;&#039;&#039;Catégorie&#039;&#039;&#039; applicable pour ajouter le &#039;&#039;&#039;Flux de travail&#039;&#039;&#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
# Modifier les &#039;&#039;Permissions&#039;&#039;&#039; de la &#039;&#039;Catégorie&#039;&#039; de sorte que les nouveaux&#039;&#039;Groupes d&#039;utilisateurs&#039;&#039; aient les permissions de faire seulement ce qu&#039;ils sont en droit de faire&lt;br /&gt;
# Paramétrer les notifications si nécessaire&lt;br /&gt;
# Configurer l&#039;accès de connexion pour les &#039;&#039;&#039;Utilisateurs&#039;&#039;&#039; sur le frontend (ou le backend : non inclus dans ce tutoriel) (facultatif)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Planification ==&lt;br /&gt;
Planifiez ce que votre flux de travail fera. La planification est toujours la partie la plus importante. Répondez à ces questions pour vous aider à planifier :&lt;br /&gt;
* Combien de groupes d&#039;utilisateurs (même s&#039;il n&#039;y a qu&#039;un seul utilisateur dans le groupe) doivent intervenir?&lt;br /&gt;
* Combien d&#039;actions y aura-t-il dans le flux de travail?&lt;br /&gt;
* L&#039;un ou l&#039;autre des groupes aura-t-il besoin de recevoir des notifications pour prendre les mesures qui s&#039;imposent ?&lt;br /&gt;
* Les groupes effectueront-ils leurs actions à partir du frontend ou du backend ou de la combinaison des deux ?&lt;br /&gt;
* Quelles &amp;quot;Catégories&amp;quot; se verront attribuer un/ce flux de travail ?&lt;br /&gt;
* Les différentes catégories auront-elles des flux de travail différents ?&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Scénario #1 ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*Un groupe d&#039;utilisateurs ajoute des messages de blog mais ne peut pas les publier&lt;br /&gt;
*Second User Group approves blog posts and publishes them&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Créer de nouveaux groupes d&#039;utilisateurs ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
# Allez dans &#039;&#039;&#039;Utilisateurs&#039;&#039;&#039; {{rarr}} &#039;&#039;&#039;Groupes&#039;&#039;&#039; {{rarr}} Nouveau&lt;br /&gt;
# Enter the &#039;&#039;&#039;Group Title&#039;&#039;&#039;: &#039;&#039;Blog Posters&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
# Select the &#039;&#039;&#039;Group Parent&#039;&#039;&#039;: Registered&lt;br /&gt;
# Cliquez sur Enregistrer &amp;amp; nouveau.&lt;br /&gt;
# Enter the &#039;&#039;&#039;Group Title&#039;&#039;&#039;: &#039;&#039;Blog Approvers&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
# Select the &#039;&#039;&#039;Group Parent&#039;&#039;&#039;: Registered&lt;br /&gt;
# Cliquez sur Enregistrer &amp;amp; fermer.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Créer de nouveaux utilisateurs (ou modifier des utilisateurs existants) ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Using the directions on [[S:MyLanguage/Adding_a_new_user|create your new &#039;&#039;&#039;Users&#039;&#039;&#039;]].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
# Create &#039;&#039;&#039;User(s)&#039;&#039;&#039; and assign them to the &#039;&#039;Blog Posters&#039;&#039; &#039;&#039;&#039;User Group&#039;&#039;&#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
# Create &#039;&#039;&#039;User(s)&#039;&#039;&#039; and assign them to the &#039;&#039;Blog Approvers&#039;&#039; &#039;&#039;&#039;User Group&#039;&#039;&#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;NOTE&#039;&#039;&#039;: If you want your &#039;&#039;&#039;Users&#039;&#039;&#039; to receive notifications for a &#039;&#039;&#039;Transition&#039;&#039;&#039; (see more below) then select Yes for &#039;&#039;&#039;Receives System Emails&#039;&#039;&#039; for each &#039;&#039;&#039;User&#039;&#039;&#039; to receive notifications.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Créer le flux de travail ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
# Go to &#039;&#039;&#039;Content&#039;&#039;&#039; {{rarr}} &#039;&#039;&#039;Workflows&#039;&#039;&#039; {{rarr}} New&lt;br /&gt;
# Enter the &#039;&#039;&#039;Title&#039;&#039;&#039;: &#039;&#039;Blog Workflow&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
# Cliquez sur Enregistrer &amp;amp; fermer.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;NOTE&#039;&#039;&#039;: Only mark this Default if it will be the Default Workflow for ALL NEW Articles created in Categories &#039;&#039;&#039;without&#039;&#039;&#039; an assigned Workflow. Existing Articles will not be changed.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Créer le(s) statut(s) du flux de travail ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
# From the &#039;&#039;&#039;Workflows&#039;&#039;&#039; list view, click the “&#039;&#039;&#039;manage&#039;&#039;&#039;” link in the &#039;&#039;&#039;States&#039;&#039;&#039; column next to the &#039;&#039;Blog Workflow&#039;&#039;. You will see the default &#039;&#039;&#039;State&#039;&#039;&#039; of Published.&lt;br /&gt;
# Click the &#039;&#039;&#039;Default State&#039;&#039;&#039; for Published and change the &#039;&#039;&#039;Title&#039;&#039;&#039; to: &#039;&#039;Publish new blog post&#039;&#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
# The &#039;&#039;&#039;Condition of items in this state: Published&#039;&#039;&#039; will remain unchanged.&lt;br /&gt;
# Cliquez sur Enregistrer &amp;amp; nouveau.&lt;br /&gt;
# Enter the &#039;&#039;&#039;Title&#039;&#039;&#039;: &#039;&#039;New blog post, unpublished&#039;&#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
# Change the &#039;&#039;&#039;Condition&#039;&#039;&#039; of items in this &#039;&#039;&#039;State&#039;&#039;&#039; to Unpublished.&lt;br /&gt;
# Change the &#039;&#039;&#039;Default&#039;&#039;&#039; to Yes (Green) since this is the &#039;&#039;&#039;Default State&#039;&#039;&#039; for Articles in this Workflow.&lt;br /&gt;
# Cliquez sur Enregistrer &amp;amp; fermer.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Créer la transition pour le flux de travail ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
There are two ways to access &#039;&#039;&#039;Transitions&#039;&#039;&#039;:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
# Click &#039;&#039;&#039;Transitions&#039;&#039;&#039; from the sidebar while in the States list view.&lt;br /&gt;
# Click the blue line with arrows in both directions from the &#039;&#039;&#039;Workflow&#039;&#039;&#039; list view.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
# Go to &#039;&#039;&#039;Transitions&#039;&#039;&#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
# Cliquez sur Nouveau&lt;br /&gt;
# Add the &#039;&#039;&#039;Title&#039;&#039;&#039;: &#039;&#039;Approve/Publish&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
# Select the &#039;&#039;&#039;State&#039;&#039;&#039; &#039;&#039;New blog post – unpublished&#039;&#039; in the &#039;&#039;&#039;From state&#039;&#039;&#039; field drop-down.&lt;br /&gt;
# Select the &#039;&#039;&#039;State&#039;&#039;&#039; &#039;&#039;Publish new blog post&#039;&#039; in the &#039;&#039;&#039;To state&#039;&#039;&#039; field drop-down.&lt;br /&gt;
# Click Save and remain in this &#039;&#039;&#039;Transition&#039;&#039;&#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
# Click the &#039;&#039;&#039;Permissions&#039;&#039;&#039; tab of the &#039;&#039;&#039;Transition&#039;&#039;&#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
# Select the &#039;&#039;&#039;User Group&#039;&#039;&#039; &#039;&#039;Blog Approvers&#039;&#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
# For the &#039;&#039;&#039;Action&#039;&#039;&#039; &#039;&#039;&#039;Execute transition&#039;&#039;&#039;, select &#039;&#039;&#039;Allowed&#039;&#039;&#039; from the &#039;&#039;&#039;Select New Setting&#039;&#039;&#039; drop-down.&lt;br /&gt;
# Cliquez sur Enregistrer &amp;amp; fermer.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;NOTE&#039;&#039;&#039;: You can quickly access your &#039;&#039;&#039;States&#039;&#039;&#039; and &#039;&#039;&#039;Transitions&#039;&#039;&#039; from the &#039;&#039;&#039;Workflow&#039;&#039;&#039; list view. The orange circle is the States and has the quantity of States listed next to the Workflow Title. The blue line with arrows in both directions is for Transitions and shows the quantity of Transitions for the Workflow.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Assign Workflow &amp;amp; User Group Permissions to the Category ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
# Allez dans &#039;&#039;&#039;Contenu&#039;&#039;&#039; {{rarr}} &#039;&#039;&#039;Catégories&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
# Access the &#039;&#039;Blog&#039;&#039; &#039;&#039;&#039;Category&#039;&#039;&#039; (or create it if necessary) and click the &#039;&#039;&#039;Workflow&#039;&#039;&#039; tab.&lt;br /&gt;
# Click the drop-down and select &#039;&#039;Blog Workflow&#039;&#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
# Cliquez sur l&#039;onglet &#039;&#039;&#039;Droits&#039;&#039;&#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
# Click on the &#039;&#039;Blog Poster&#039;&#039; &#039;&#039;&#039;User Group&#039;&#039;&#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
# For the &#039;&#039;&#039;Action&#039;&#039;&#039; Create and Edit, change the &#039;&#039;&#039;Select New Setting&#039;&#039;&#039; drop-down to Allowed.&lt;br /&gt;
# Click on the &#039;&#039;Blog Approvers&#039;&#039; &#039;&#039;&#039;User Group&#039;&#039;&#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
# For the &#039;&#039;&#039;Action&#039;&#039;&#039; Delete, Edit, Edit State and Edit Own, change the &#039;&#039;&#039;Select New Setting&#039;&#039;&#039; drop-down to Allowed.&lt;br /&gt;
# Cliquez sur Enregistrer &amp;amp; fermer.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
For more information on ACL and assigning permissions to User Groups, see the [[S:MyLanguage/J3.x:Access_Control_List_Tutorial|ACL Tutorial]].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Paramétrer les notifications ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Notifications use the Joomla core Messaging component. It is very basic. When enabled for Workflows, it will send a message to the User associated with the Group assigned to the Transition. The message simply states that they have a message in the site. It will then be their responsibility to login and check the articles that need approval and publish them.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;To set up notifications for the Workgroup Transitions:&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
# Allez dans &#039;&#039;&#039;Extensions&#039;&#039;&#039; {{rarr}} &#039;&#039;&#039;Plug-ins&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
# Click the &#039;&#039;&#039;Table Options&#039;&#039;&#039; button and &#039;&#039;&#039;Select Type&#039;&#039;&#039; of content&lt;br /&gt;
# Click on &#039;&#039;&#039;Content – Joomla&#039;&#039;&#039; and then toggle Yes for &#039;&#039;&#039;Email on transition execution&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
# Then make sure that the &#039;&#039;&#039;Users&#039;&#039;&#039; themselves have &#039;&#039;&#039;Receive System Emails&#039;&#039;&#039; toggled to Yes in &#039;&#039;&#039;Users&#039;&#039;&#039; {{rarr}} &#039;&#039;&#039;Manage&#039;&#039;&#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== To set it up so that Users can Post and Approve from the frontend ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
# Create a &#039;&#039;&#039;Menu Item&#039;&#039;&#039; for the &#039;&#039;&#039;Menu Item Type&#039;&#039;&#039; Login so that your Blog Posters can login.&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;&#039;&#039;&#039;Menus&#039;&#039;&#039; {{rarr}} &#039;&#039;Choose or create a menu&#039;&#039; {{rarr}} New {{rarr}} &#039;&#039;&#039;Users&#039;&#039;&#039; {{rarr}} &#039;&#039;&#039;Login&#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;OR&lt;br /&gt;
# Create a module for Login so that your Blog Posters can login.&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;&#039;&#039;&#039;Extensions&#039;&#039;&#039; {{rarr}} &#039;&#039;&#039;Modules&#039;&#039;&#039; {{rarr}} New {{rarr}} &#039;&#039;&#039;Login&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
# Add a &#039;&#039;&#039;Menu Item&#039;&#039;&#039; to a Menu that displays only for the &#039;&#039;&#039;Registered User Group&#039;&#039;&#039; to Add an article&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;&#039;&#039;&#039;Menu Item Type Articles&#039;&#039;&#039; {{rarr}} &#039;&#039;&#039;Create Article&#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;&#039;&#039;&#039;NOTE&#039;&#039;&#039;: this will display for all Registered Users unless you create an Access Level for your Blog Poster User Group and select this in the Menu Item under Access.&lt;br /&gt;
# When your &#039;&#039;&#039;User&#039;&#039;&#039; logs in, they add an &#039;&#039;&#039;Article&#039;&#039;&#039;, enter the content and Save.&lt;br /&gt;
# This will trigger a notification to the Blog Approvers Users that there is a new private message on the site. It doesn’t get more specific than that. Approvers should just come to the site and approve the Article. It will also send a message to Super Admins.&lt;br /&gt;
# When the Blog Approver logs in, they can navigate to where the new article will appear. They will be able to see the unpublished article and edit it/approve it/publish it. Then they can Save &amp;amp; Close and logout.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Admin note&#039;&#039;&#039;: Super Admins can use Batch to move existing Articles to a different workflow than it is currently assigned. It won’t make a difference if the Articles are already published.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Scénario #2 ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Ajoutez ici un autre scénario pour aider les autres à voir la puissance des flux de travail. Les documents peuvent être modifiés ou ajoutés par quiconque possèdant un compte.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Related Information==&lt;br /&gt;
See also:&lt;br /&gt;
* [[S:MyLanguage/Publishing_Workflow_Implementation|Publishing Workflow Implementation]]&lt;br /&gt;
* [[S:MyLanguage/Publishing_Workflow|Publishing Workflow]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;noinclude&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[Category:Google Summer of Code 2017{{#translation:}}]]&lt;br /&gt;
[[Category:Development{{#translation:}}]]&lt;br /&gt;
[[Category:Joomla! 4.x{{#translation:}}]]&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/noinclude&amp;gt;&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Wisgar</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://docs.sandbox.joomla.org/index.php?title=Translations:Publishing_Workflow/Scenarios/22/fr&amp;diff=636510</id>
		<title>Translations:Publishing Workflow/Scenarios/22/fr</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://docs.sandbox.joomla.org/index.php?title=Translations:Publishing_Workflow/Scenarios/22/fr&amp;diff=636510"/>
		<updated>2019-10-19T11:39:28Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Wisgar: Created page with &amp;quot;Un groupe d&amp;#039;utilisateurs ajoute des messages de blog mais ne peut pas les publier&amp;quot;&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;Un groupe d&#039;utilisateurs ajoute des messages de blog mais ne peut pas les publier&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Wisgar</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://docs.sandbox.joomla.org/index.php?title=Publishing_Workflow/Scenarios/fr&amp;diff=636506</id>
		<title>Publishing Workflow/Scenarios/fr</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://docs.sandbox.joomla.org/index.php?title=Publishing_Workflow/Scenarios/fr&amp;diff=636506"/>
		<updated>2019-10-19T11:38:32Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Wisgar: Created page with &amp;quot;Les différentes catégories auront-elles des flux de travail différents ?&amp;quot;&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;&amp;lt;noinclude&amp;gt;&amp;lt;languages /&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/noinclude&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
==Implémentation des flux de travail ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
L&#039;ordre général des tâches pour créer un nouveau flux de travail est :&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
# Planifier&lt;br /&gt;
# Ajouter un nouveau &#039;&#039;&#039;Groupes d&#039;utilisateurs&#039;&#039;&#039; (facultatif)&lt;br /&gt;
# Ajouter de nouveaux &#039;&#039;&#039;Utilisateurs&#039;&#039;&#039; et les assigner aux groupes d&#039;utilisateurs appropriés (facultatif)&lt;br /&gt;
# Créer le the nouveau &amp;quot;flux de travail&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
# Créez l&#039;(es) état(s) pour ce flux de travail avec la(les) condition(s).&lt;br /&gt;
# Créer la(les) &#039;&#039;&#039;Transition(s)&#039;&#039;&#039; du flux de travail&lt;br /&gt;
# Ajoutez ou modifiez la &#039;&#039;&#039;Catégorie&#039;&#039;&#039; applicable pour ajouter le &#039;&#039;&#039;Flux de travail&#039;&#039;&#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
# Modifier les &#039;&#039;Permissions&#039;&#039;&#039; de la &#039;&#039;Catégorie&#039;&#039; de sorte que les nouveaux&#039;&#039;Groupes d&#039;utilisateurs&#039;&#039; aient les permissions de faire seulement ce qu&#039;ils sont en droit de faire&lt;br /&gt;
# Paramétrer les notifications si nécessaire&lt;br /&gt;
# Configurer l&#039;accès de connexion pour les &#039;&#039;&#039;Utilisateurs&#039;&#039;&#039; sur le frontend (ou le backend : non inclus dans ce tutoriel) (facultatif)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Planification ==&lt;br /&gt;
Planifiez ce que votre flux de travail fera. La planification est toujours la partie la plus importante. Répondez à ces questions pour vous aider à planifier :&lt;br /&gt;
* Combien de groupes d&#039;utilisateurs (même s&#039;il n&#039;y a qu&#039;un seul utilisateur dans le groupe) doivent intervenir?&lt;br /&gt;
* Combien d&#039;actions y aura-t-il dans le flux de travail?&lt;br /&gt;
* L&#039;un ou l&#039;autre des groupes aura-t-il besoin de recevoir des notifications pour prendre les mesures qui s&#039;imposent ?&lt;br /&gt;
* Les groupes effectueront-ils leurs actions à partir du frontend ou du backend ou de la combinaison des deux ?&lt;br /&gt;
* Quelles &amp;quot;Catégories&amp;quot; se verront attribuer un/ce flux de travail ?&lt;br /&gt;
* Les différentes catégories auront-elles des flux de travail différents ?&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Scénario #1 ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*One User Group adds blog posts but cannot publish them&lt;br /&gt;
*Second User Group approves blog posts and publishes them&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Créer de nouveaux groupes d&#039;utilisateurs ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
# Allez dans &#039;&#039;&#039;Utilisateurs&#039;&#039;&#039; {{rarr}} &#039;&#039;&#039;Groupes&#039;&#039;&#039; {{rarr}} Nouveau&lt;br /&gt;
# Enter the &#039;&#039;&#039;Group Title&#039;&#039;&#039;: &#039;&#039;Blog Posters&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
# Select the &#039;&#039;&#039;Group Parent&#039;&#039;&#039;: Registered&lt;br /&gt;
# Cliquez sur Enregistrer &amp;amp; nouveau.&lt;br /&gt;
# Enter the &#039;&#039;&#039;Group Title&#039;&#039;&#039;: &#039;&#039;Blog Approvers&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
# Select the &#039;&#039;&#039;Group Parent&#039;&#039;&#039;: Registered&lt;br /&gt;
# Cliquez sur Enregistrer &amp;amp; fermer.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Créer de nouveaux utilisateurs (ou modifier des utilisateurs existants) ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Using the directions on [[S:MyLanguage/Adding_a_new_user|create your new &#039;&#039;&#039;Users&#039;&#039;&#039;]].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
# Create &#039;&#039;&#039;User(s)&#039;&#039;&#039; and assign them to the &#039;&#039;Blog Posters&#039;&#039; &#039;&#039;&#039;User Group&#039;&#039;&#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
# Create &#039;&#039;&#039;User(s)&#039;&#039;&#039; and assign them to the &#039;&#039;Blog Approvers&#039;&#039; &#039;&#039;&#039;User Group&#039;&#039;&#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;NOTE&#039;&#039;&#039;: If you want your &#039;&#039;&#039;Users&#039;&#039;&#039; to receive notifications for a &#039;&#039;&#039;Transition&#039;&#039;&#039; (see more below) then select Yes for &#039;&#039;&#039;Receives System Emails&#039;&#039;&#039; for each &#039;&#039;&#039;User&#039;&#039;&#039; to receive notifications.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Créer le flux de travail ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
# Go to &#039;&#039;&#039;Content&#039;&#039;&#039; {{rarr}} &#039;&#039;&#039;Workflows&#039;&#039;&#039; {{rarr}} New&lt;br /&gt;
# Enter the &#039;&#039;&#039;Title&#039;&#039;&#039;: &#039;&#039;Blog Workflow&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
# Cliquez sur Enregistrer &amp;amp; fermer.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;NOTE&#039;&#039;&#039;: Only mark this Default if it will be the Default Workflow for ALL NEW Articles created in Categories &#039;&#039;&#039;without&#039;&#039;&#039; an assigned Workflow. Existing Articles will not be changed.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Créer le(s) statut(s) du flux de travail ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
# From the &#039;&#039;&#039;Workflows&#039;&#039;&#039; list view, click the “&#039;&#039;&#039;manage&#039;&#039;&#039;” link in the &#039;&#039;&#039;States&#039;&#039;&#039; column next to the &#039;&#039;Blog Workflow&#039;&#039;. You will see the default &#039;&#039;&#039;State&#039;&#039;&#039; of Published.&lt;br /&gt;
# Click the &#039;&#039;&#039;Default State&#039;&#039;&#039; for Published and change the &#039;&#039;&#039;Title&#039;&#039;&#039; to: &#039;&#039;Publish new blog post&#039;&#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
# The &#039;&#039;&#039;Condition of items in this state: Published&#039;&#039;&#039; will remain unchanged.&lt;br /&gt;
# Cliquez sur Enregistrer &amp;amp; nouveau.&lt;br /&gt;
# Enter the &#039;&#039;&#039;Title&#039;&#039;&#039;: &#039;&#039;New blog post, unpublished&#039;&#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
# Change the &#039;&#039;&#039;Condition&#039;&#039;&#039; of items in this &#039;&#039;&#039;State&#039;&#039;&#039; to Unpublished.&lt;br /&gt;
# Change the &#039;&#039;&#039;Default&#039;&#039;&#039; to Yes (Green) since this is the &#039;&#039;&#039;Default State&#039;&#039;&#039; for Articles in this Workflow.&lt;br /&gt;
# Cliquez sur Enregistrer &amp;amp; fermer.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Créer la transition pour le flux de travail ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
There are two ways to access &#039;&#039;&#039;Transitions&#039;&#039;&#039;:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
# Click &#039;&#039;&#039;Transitions&#039;&#039;&#039; from the sidebar while in the States list view.&lt;br /&gt;
# Click the blue line with arrows in both directions from the &#039;&#039;&#039;Workflow&#039;&#039;&#039; list view.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
# Go to &#039;&#039;&#039;Transitions&#039;&#039;&#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
# Cliquez sur Nouveau&lt;br /&gt;
# Add the &#039;&#039;&#039;Title&#039;&#039;&#039;: &#039;&#039;Approve/Publish&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
# Select the &#039;&#039;&#039;State&#039;&#039;&#039; &#039;&#039;New blog post – unpublished&#039;&#039; in the &#039;&#039;&#039;From state&#039;&#039;&#039; field drop-down.&lt;br /&gt;
# Select the &#039;&#039;&#039;State&#039;&#039;&#039; &#039;&#039;Publish new blog post&#039;&#039; in the &#039;&#039;&#039;To state&#039;&#039;&#039; field drop-down.&lt;br /&gt;
# Click Save and remain in this &#039;&#039;&#039;Transition&#039;&#039;&#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
# Click the &#039;&#039;&#039;Permissions&#039;&#039;&#039; tab of the &#039;&#039;&#039;Transition&#039;&#039;&#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
# Select the &#039;&#039;&#039;User Group&#039;&#039;&#039; &#039;&#039;Blog Approvers&#039;&#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
# For the &#039;&#039;&#039;Action&#039;&#039;&#039; &#039;&#039;&#039;Execute transition&#039;&#039;&#039;, select &#039;&#039;&#039;Allowed&#039;&#039;&#039; from the &#039;&#039;&#039;Select New Setting&#039;&#039;&#039; drop-down.&lt;br /&gt;
# Cliquez sur Enregistrer &amp;amp; fermer.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;NOTE&#039;&#039;&#039;: You can quickly access your &#039;&#039;&#039;States&#039;&#039;&#039; and &#039;&#039;&#039;Transitions&#039;&#039;&#039; from the &#039;&#039;&#039;Workflow&#039;&#039;&#039; list view. The orange circle is the States and has the quantity of States listed next to the Workflow Title. The blue line with arrows in both directions is for Transitions and shows the quantity of Transitions for the Workflow.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Assign Workflow &amp;amp; User Group Permissions to the Category ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
# Allez dans &#039;&#039;&#039;Contenu&#039;&#039;&#039; {{rarr}} &#039;&#039;&#039;Catégories&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
# Access the &#039;&#039;Blog&#039;&#039; &#039;&#039;&#039;Category&#039;&#039;&#039; (or create it if necessary) and click the &#039;&#039;&#039;Workflow&#039;&#039;&#039; tab.&lt;br /&gt;
# Click the drop-down and select &#039;&#039;Blog Workflow&#039;&#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
# Cliquez sur l&#039;onglet &#039;&#039;&#039;Droits&#039;&#039;&#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
# Click on the &#039;&#039;Blog Poster&#039;&#039; &#039;&#039;&#039;User Group&#039;&#039;&#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
# For the &#039;&#039;&#039;Action&#039;&#039;&#039; Create and Edit, change the &#039;&#039;&#039;Select New Setting&#039;&#039;&#039; drop-down to Allowed.&lt;br /&gt;
# Click on the &#039;&#039;Blog Approvers&#039;&#039; &#039;&#039;&#039;User Group&#039;&#039;&#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
# For the &#039;&#039;&#039;Action&#039;&#039;&#039; Delete, Edit, Edit State and Edit Own, change the &#039;&#039;&#039;Select New Setting&#039;&#039;&#039; drop-down to Allowed.&lt;br /&gt;
# Cliquez sur Enregistrer &amp;amp; fermer.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
For more information on ACL and assigning permissions to User Groups, see the [[S:MyLanguage/J3.x:Access_Control_List_Tutorial|ACL Tutorial]].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Paramétrer les notifications ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Notifications use the Joomla core Messaging component. It is very basic. When enabled for Workflows, it will send a message to the User associated with the Group assigned to the Transition. The message simply states that they have a message in the site. It will then be their responsibility to login and check the articles that need approval and publish them.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;To set up notifications for the Workgroup Transitions:&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
# Allez dans &#039;&#039;&#039;Extensions&#039;&#039;&#039; {{rarr}} &#039;&#039;&#039;Plug-ins&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
# Click the &#039;&#039;&#039;Table Options&#039;&#039;&#039; button and &#039;&#039;&#039;Select Type&#039;&#039;&#039; of content&lt;br /&gt;
# Click on &#039;&#039;&#039;Content – Joomla&#039;&#039;&#039; and then toggle Yes for &#039;&#039;&#039;Email on transition execution&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
# Then make sure that the &#039;&#039;&#039;Users&#039;&#039;&#039; themselves have &#039;&#039;&#039;Receive System Emails&#039;&#039;&#039; toggled to Yes in &#039;&#039;&#039;Users&#039;&#039;&#039; {{rarr}} &#039;&#039;&#039;Manage&#039;&#039;&#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== To set it up so that Users can Post and Approve from the frontend ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
# Create a &#039;&#039;&#039;Menu Item&#039;&#039;&#039; for the &#039;&#039;&#039;Menu Item Type&#039;&#039;&#039; Login so that your Blog Posters can login.&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;&#039;&#039;&#039;Menus&#039;&#039;&#039; {{rarr}} &#039;&#039;Choose or create a menu&#039;&#039; {{rarr}} New {{rarr}} &#039;&#039;&#039;Users&#039;&#039;&#039; {{rarr}} &#039;&#039;&#039;Login&#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;OR&lt;br /&gt;
# Create a module for Login so that your Blog Posters can login.&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;&#039;&#039;&#039;Extensions&#039;&#039;&#039; {{rarr}} &#039;&#039;&#039;Modules&#039;&#039;&#039; {{rarr}} New {{rarr}} &#039;&#039;&#039;Login&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
# Add a &#039;&#039;&#039;Menu Item&#039;&#039;&#039; to a Menu that displays only for the &#039;&#039;&#039;Registered User Group&#039;&#039;&#039; to Add an article&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;&#039;&#039;&#039;Menu Item Type Articles&#039;&#039;&#039; {{rarr}} &#039;&#039;&#039;Create Article&#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;&#039;&#039;&#039;NOTE&#039;&#039;&#039;: this will display for all Registered Users unless you create an Access Level for your Blog Poster User Group and select this in the Menu Item under Access.&lt;br /&gt;
# When your &#039;&#039;&#039;User&#039;&#039;&#039; logs in, they add an &#039;&#039;&#039;Article&#039;&#039;&#039;, enter the content and Save.&lt;br /&gt;
# This will trigger a notification to the Blog Approvers Users that there is a new private message on the site. It doesn’t get more specific than that. Approvers should just come to the site and approve the Article. It will also send a message to Super Admins.&lt;br /&gt;
# When the Blog Approver logs in, they can navigate to where the new article will appear. They will be able to see the unpublished article and edit it/approve it/publish it. Then they can Save &amp;amp; Close and logout.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Admin note&#039;&#039;&#039;: Super Admins can use Batch to move existing Articles to a different workflow than it is currently assigned. It won’t make a difference if the Articles are already published.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Scénario #2 ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Ajoutez ici un autre scénario pour aider les autres à voir la puissance des flux de travail. Les documents peuvent être modifiés ou ajoutés par quiconque possèdant un compte.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Related Information==&lt;br /&gt;
See also:&lt;br /&gt;
* [[S:MyLanguage/Publishing_Workflow_Implementation|Publishing Workflow Implementation]]&lt;br /&gt;
* [[S:MyLanguage/Publishing_Workflow|Publishing Workflow]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;noinclude&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[Category:Google Summer of Code 2017{{#translation:}}]]&lt;br /&gt;
[[Category:Development{{#translation:}}]]&lt;br /&gt;
[[Category:Joomla! 4.x{{#translation:}}]]&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/noinclude&amp;gt;&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Wisgar</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://docs.sandbox.joomla.org/index.php?title=Translations:Publishing_Workflow/Scenarios/20/fr&amp;diff=636505</id>
		<title>Translations:Publishing Workflow/Scenarios/20/fr</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://docs.sandbox.joomla.org/index.php?title=Translations:Publishing_Workflow/Scenarios/20/fr&amp;diff=636505"/>
		<updated>2019-10-19T11:38:31Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Wisgar: Created page with &amp;quot;Les différentes catégories auront-elles des flux de travail différents ?&amp;quot;&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;Les différentes catégories auront-elles des flux de travail différents ?&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Wisgar</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://docs.sandbox.joomla.org/index.php?title=Publishing_Workflow/Scenarios/fr&amp;diff=636502</id>
		<title>Publishing Workflow/Scenarios/fr</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://docs.sandbox.joomla.org/index.php?title=Publishing_Workflow/Scenarios/fr&amp;diff=636502"/>
		<updated>2019-10-19T11:36:29Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Wisgar: Created page with &amp;quot;Quelles &amp;quot;Catégories&amp;quot; se verront attribuer un/ce flux de travail ?&amp;quot;&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;&amp;lt;noinclude&amp;gt;&amp;lt;languages /&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/noinclude&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
==Implémentation des flux de travail ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
L&#039;ordre général des tâches pour créer un nouveau flux de travail est :&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
# Planifier&lt;br /&gt;
# Ajouter un nouveau &#039;&#039;&#039;Groupes d&#039;utilisateurs&#039;&#039;&#039; (facultatif)&lt;br /&gt;
# Ajouter de nouveaux &#039;&#039;&#039;Utilisateurs&#039;&#039;&#039; et les assigner aux groupes d&#039;utilisateurs appropriés (facultatif)&lt;br /&gt;
# Créer le the nouveau &amp;quot;flux de travail&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
# Créez l&#039;(es) état(s) pour ce flux de travail avec la(les) condition(s).&lt;br /&gt;
# Créer la(les) &#039;&#039;&#039;Transition(s)&#039;&#039;&#039; du flux de travail&lt;br /&gt;
# Ajoutez ou modifiez la &#039;&#039;&#039;Catégorie&#039;&#039;&#039; applicable pour ajouter le &#039;&#039;&#039;Flux de travail&#039;&#039;&#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
# Modifier les &#039;&#039;Permissions&#039;&#039;&#039; de la &#039;&#039;Catégorie&#039;&#039; de sorte que les nouveaux&#039;&#039;Groupes d&#039;utilisateurs&#039;&#039; aient les permissions de faire seulement ce qu&#039;ils sont en droit de faire&lt;br /&gt;
# Paramétrer les notifications si nécessaire&lt;br /&gt;
# Configurer l&#039;accès de connexion pour les &#039;&#039;&#039;Utilisateurs&#039;&#039;&#039; sur le frontend (ou le backend : non inclus dans ce tutoriel) (facultatif)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Planification ==&lt;br /&gt;
Planifiez ce que votre flux de travail fera. La planification est toujours la partie la plus importante. Répondez à ces questions pour vous aider à planifier :&lt;br /&gt;
* Combien de groupes d&#039;utilisateurs (même s&#039;il n&#039;y a qu&#039;un seul utilisateur dans le groupe) doivent intervenir?&lt;br /&gt;
* Combien d&#039;actions y aura-t-il dans le flux de travail?&lt;br /&gt;
* L&#039;un ou l&#039;autre des groupes aura-t-il besoin de recevoir des notifications pour prendre les mesures qui s&#039;imposent ?&lt;br /&gt;
* Les groupes effectueront-ils leurs actions à partir du frontend ou du backend ou de la combinaison des deux ?&lt;br /&gt;
* Quelles &amp;quot;Catégories&amp;quot; se verront attribuer un/ce flux de travail ?&lt;br /&gt;
* Will different Categories have different Workflows?&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Scénario #1 ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*One User Group adds blog posts but cannot publish them&lt;br /&gt;
*Second User Group approves blog posts and publishes them&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Créer de nouveaux groupes d&#039;utilisateurs ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
# Allez dans &#039;&#039;&#039;Utilisateurs&#039;&#039;&#039; {{rarr}} &#039;&#039;&#039;Groupes&#039;&#039;&#039; {{rarr}} Nouveau&lt;br /&gt;
# Enter the &#039;&#039;&#039;Group Title&#039;&#039;&#039;: &#039;&#039;Blog Posters&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
# Select the &#039;&#039;&#039;Group Parent&#039;&#039;&#039;: Registered&lt;br /&gt;
# Cliquez sur Enregistrer &amp;amp; nouveau.&lt;br /&gt;
# Enter the &#039;&#039;&#039;Group Title&#039;&#039;&#039;: &#039;&#039;Blog Approvers&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
# Select the &#039;&#039;&#039;Group Parent&#039;&#039;&#039;: Registered&lt;br /&gt;
# Cliquez sur Enregistrer &amp;amp; fermer.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Créer de nouveaux utilisateurs (ou modifier des utilisateurs existants) ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Using the directions on [[S:MyLanguage/Adding_a_new_user|create your new &#039;&#039;&#039;Users&#039;&#039;&#039;]].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
# Create &#039;&#039;&#039;User(s)&#039;&#039;&#039; and assign them to the &#039;&#039;Blog Posters&#039;&#039; &#039;&#039;&#039;User Group&#039;&#039;&#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
# Create &#039;&#039;&#039;User(s)&#039;&#039;&#039; and assign them to the &#039;&#039;Blog Approvers&#039;&#039; &#039;&#039;&#039;User Group&#039;&#039;&#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;NOTE&#039;&#039;&#039;: If you want your &#039;&#039;&#039;Users&#039;&#039;&#039; to receive notifications for a &#039;&#039;&#039;Transition&#039;&#039;&#039; (see more below) then select Yes for &#039;&#039;&#039;Receives System Emails&#039;&#039;&#039; for each &#039;&#039;&#039;User&#039;&#039;&#039; to receive notifications.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Créer le flux de travail ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
# Go to &#039;&#039;&#039;Content&#039;&#039;&#039; {{rarr}} &#039;&#039;&#039;Workflows&#039;&#039;&#039; {{rarr}} New&lt;br /&gt;
# Enter the &#039;&#039;&#039;Title&#039;&#039;&#039;: &#039;&#039;Blog Workflow&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
# Cliquez sur Enregistrer &amp;amp; fermer.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;NOTE&#039;&#039;&#039;: Only mark this Default if it will be the Default Workflow for ALL NEW Articles created in Categories &#039;&#039;&#039;without&#039;&#039;&#039; an assigned Workflow. Existing Articles will not be changed.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Créer le(s) statut(s) du flux de travail ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
# From the &#039;&#039;&#039;Workflows&#039;&#039;&#039; list view, click the “&#039;&#039;&#039;manage&#039;&#039;&#039;” link in the &#039;&#039;&#039;States&#039;&#039;&#039; column next to the &#039;&#039;Blog Workflow&#039;&#039;. You will see the default &#039;&#039;&#039;State&#039;&#039;&#039; of Published.&lt;br /&gt;
# Click the &#039;&#039;&#039;Default State&#039;&#039;&#039; for Published and change the &#039;&#039;&#039;Title&#039;&#039;&#039; to: &#039;&#039;Publish new blog post&#039;&#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
# The &#039;&#039;&#039;Condition of items in this state: Published&#039;&#039;&#039; will remain unchanged.&lt;br /&gt;
# Cliquez sur Enregistrer &amp;amp; nouveau.&lt;br /&gt;
# Enter the &#039;&#039;&#039;Title&#039;&#039;&#039;: &#039;&#039;New blog post, unpublished&#039;&#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
# Change the &#039;&#039;&#039;Condition&#039;&#039;&#039; of items in this &#039;&#039;&#039;State&#039;&#039;&#039; to Unpublished.&lt;br /&gt;
# Change the &#039;&#039;&#039;Default&#039;&#039;&#039; to Yes (Green) since this is the &#039;&#039;&#039;Default State&#039;&#039;&#039; for Articles in this Workflow.&lt;br /&gt;
# Cliquez sur Enregistrer &amp;amp; fermer.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Créer la transition pour le flux de travail ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
There are two ways to access &#039;&#039;&#039;Transitions&#039;&#039;&#039;:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
# Click &#039;&#039;&#039;Transitions&#039;&#039;&#039; from the sidebar while in the States list view.&lt;br /&gt;
# Click the blue line with arrows in both directions from the &#039;&#039;&#039;Workflow&#039;&#039;&#039; list view.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
# Go to &#039;&#039;&#039;Transitions&#039;&#039;&#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
# Cliquez sur Nouveau&lt;br /&gt;
# Add the &#039;&#039;&#039;Title&#039;&#039;&#039;: &#039;&#039;Approve/Publish&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
# Select the &#039;&#039;&#039;State&#039;&#039;&#039; &#039;&#039;New blog post – unpublished&#039;&#039; in the &#039;&#039;&#039;From state&#039;&#039;&#039; field drop-down.&lt;br /&gt;
# Select the &#039;&#039;&#039;State&#039;&#039;&#039; &#039;&#039;Publish new blog post&#039;&#039; in the &#039;&#039;&#039;To state&#039;&#039;&#039; field drop-down.&lt;br /&gt;
# Click Save and remain in this &#039;&#039;&#039;Transition&#039;&#039;&#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
# Click the &#039;&#039;&#039;Permissions&#039;&#039;&#039; tab of the &#039;&#039;&#039;Transition&#039;&#039;&#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
# Select the &#039;&#039;&#039;User Group&#039;&#039;&#039; &#039;&#039;Blog Approvers&#039;&#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
# For the &#039;&#039;&#039;Action&#039;&#039;&#039; &#039;&#039;&#039;Execute transition&#039;&#039;&#039;, select &#039;&#039;&#039;Allowed&#039;&#039;&#039; from the &#039;&#039;&#039;Select New Setting&#039;&#039;&#039; drop-down.&lt;br /&gt;
# Cliquez sur Enregistrer &amp;amp; fermer.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;NOTE&#039;&#039;&#039;: You can quickly access your &#039;&#039;&#039;States&#039;&#039;&#039; and &#039;&#039;&#039;Transitions&#039;&#039;&#039; from the &#039;&#039;&#039;Workflow&#039;&#039;&#039; list view. The orange circle is the States and has the quantity of States listed next to the Workflow Title. The blue line with arrows in both directions is for Transitions and shows the quantity of Transitions for the Workflow.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Assign Workflow &amp;amp; User Group Permissions to the Category ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
# Allez dans &#039;&#039;&#039;Contenu&#039;&#039;&#039; {{rarr}} &#039;&#039;&#039;Catégories&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
# Access the &#039;&#039;Blog&#039;&#039; &#039;&#039;&#039;Category&#039;&#039;&#039; (or create it if necessary) and click the &#039;&#039;&#039;Workflow&#039;&#039;&#039; tab.&lt;br /&gt;
# Click the drop-down and select &#039;&#039;Blog Workflow&#039;&#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
# Cliquez sur l&#039;onglet &#039;&#039;&#039;Droits&#039;&#039;&#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
# Click on the &#039;&#039;Blog Poster&#039;&#039; &#039;&#039;&#039;User Group&#039;&#039;&#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
# For the &#039;&#039;&#039;Action&#039;&#039;&#039; Create and Edit, change the &#039;&#039;&#039;Select New Setting&#039;&#039;&#039; drop-down to Allowed.&lt;br /&gt;
# Click on the &#039;&#039;Blog Approvers&#039;&#039; &#039;&#039;&#039;User Group&#039;&#039;&#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
# For the &#039;&#039;&#039;Action&#039;&#039;&#039; Delete, Edit, Edit State and Edit Own, change the &#039;&#039;&#039;Select New Setting&#039;&#039;&#039; drop-down to Allowed.&lt;br /&gt;
# Cliquez sur Enregistrer &amp;amp; fermer.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
For more information on ACL and assigning permissions to User Groups, see the [[S:MyLanguage/J3.x:Access_Control_List_Tutorial|ACL Tutorial]].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Paramétrer les notifications ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Notifications use the Joomla core Messaging component. It is very basic. When enabled for Workflows, it will send a message to the User associated with the Group assigned to the Transition. The message simply states that they have a message in the site. It will then be their responsibility to login and check the articles that need approval and publish them.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;To set up notifications for the Workgroup Transitions:&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
# Allez dans &#039;&#039;&#039;Extensions&#039;&#039;&#039; {{rarr}} &#039;&#039;&#039;Plug-ins&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
# Click the &#039;&#039;&#039;Table Options&#039;&#039;&#039; button and &#039;&#039;&#039;Select Type&#039;&#039;&#039; of content&lt;br /&gt;
# Click on &#039;&#039;&#039;Content – Joomla&#039;&#039;&#039; and then toggle Yes for &#039;&#039;&#039;Email on transition execution&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
# Then make sure that the &#039;&#039;&#039;Users&#039;&#039;&#039; themselves have &#039;&#039;&#039;Receive System Emails&#039;&#039;&#039; toggled to Yes in &#039;&#039;&#039;Users&#039;&#039;&#039; {{rarr}} &#039;&#039;&#039;Manage&#039;&#039;&#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== To set it up so that Users can Post and Approve from the frontend ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
# Create a &#039;&#039;&#039;Menu Item&#039;&#039;&#039; for the &#039;&#039;&#039;Menu Item Type&#039;&#039;&#039; Login so that your Blog Posters can login.&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;&#039;&#039;&#039;Menus&#039;&#039;&#039; {{rarr}} &#039;&#039;Choose or create a menu&#039;&#039; {{rarr}} New {{rarr}} &#039;&#039;&#039;Users&#039;&#039;&#039; {{rarr}} &#039;&#039;&#039;Login&#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;OR&lt;br /&gt;
# Create a module for Login so that your Blog Posters can login.&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;&#039;&#039;&#039;Extensions&#039;&#039;&#039; {{rarr}} &#039;&#039;&#039;Modules&#039;&#039;&#039; {{rarr}} New {{rarr}} &#039;&#039;&#039;Login&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
# Add a &#039;&#039;&#039;Menu Item&#039;&#039;&#039; to a Menu that displays only for the &#039;&#039;&#039;Registered User Group&#039;&#039;&#039; to Add an article&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;&#039;&#039;&#039;Menu Item Type Articles&#039;&#039;&#039; {{rarr}} &#039;&#039;&#039;Create Article&#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;&#039;&#039;&#039;NOTE&#039;&#039;&#039;: this will display for all Registered Users unless you create an Access Level for your Blog Poster User Group and select this in the Menu Item under Access.&lt;br /&gt;
# When your &#039;&#039;&#039;User&#039;&#039;&#039; logs in, they add an &#039;&#039;&#039;Article&#039;&#039;&#039;, enter the content and Save.&lt;br /&gt;
# This will trigger a notification to the Blog Approvers Users that there is a new private message on the site. It doesn’t get more specific than that. Approvers should just come to the site and approve the Article. It will also send a message to Super Admins.&lt;br /&gt;
# When the Blog Approver logs in, they can navigate to where the new article will appear. They will be able to see the unpublished article and edit it/approve it/publish it. Then they can Save &amp;amp; Close and logout.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Admin note&#039;&#039;&#039;: Super Admins can use Batch to move existing Articles to a different workflow than it is currently assigned. It won’t make a difference if the Articles are already published.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Scénario #2 ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Ajoutez ici un autre scénario pour aider les autres à voir la puissance des flux de travail. Les documents peuvent être modifiés ou ajoutés par quiconque possèdant un compte.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Related Information==&lt;br /&gt;
See also:&lt;br /&gt;
* [[S:MyLanguage/Publishing_Workflow_Implementation|Publishing Workflow Implementation]]&lt;br /&gt;
* [[S:MyLanguage/Publishing_Workflow|Publishing Workflow]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;noinclude&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[Category:Google Summer of Code 2017{{#translation:}}]]&lt;br /&gt;
[[Category:Development{{#translation:}}]]&lt;br /&gt;
[[Category:Joomla! 4.x{{#translation:}}]]&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/noinclude&amp;gt;&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Wisgar</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://docs.sandbox.joomla.org/index.php?title=Translations:Publishing_Workflow/Scenarios/19/fr&amp;diff=636501</id>
		<title>Translations:Publishing Workflow/Scenarios/19/fr</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://docs.sandbox.joomla.org/index.php?title=Translations:Publishing_Workflow/Scenarios/19/fr&amp;diff=636501"/>
		<updated>2019-10-19T11:36:29Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Wisgar: Created page with &amp;quot;Quelles &amp;quot;Catégories&amp;quot; se verront attribuer un/ce flux de travail ?&amp;quot;&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;Quelles &amp;quot;Catégories&amp;quot; se verront attribuer un/ce flux de travail ?&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Wisgar</name></author>
	</entry>
</feed>